Item No: 125

AC- 23/7/2020

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering
in

Civil Engineering
Second Year with Effect from AY 2020-21
Third Year with Effect from AY 2021-22
Final Year with Effect from AY 2022-23

(REV- 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF SCIENCE &

TECHNOLOGY
(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year
2019–2020)
 Item No: -125
AC- 23/7/2020

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus for Approval

Sr. No.
Heading Particulars

1 Title of the Course Second Year B.E. Civil Engineering

After Passing First Year Engineering as per the

2 Eligibility for Admission Ordinance 0.6242

3 Passing Marks 40%

Ordinances /
4 Ordinance 0.6242
Regulations ( if any)

5 No. of Years / Semesters 8 semesters

6 Level U.G.

7 Pattern Semester

8 Status New

To be implemented from
9 With effect from Academic Year: 2020-2021
Academic Year

Date

Dr. S. K. Ukarande Dr Anuradha Muzumdar

Associate Dean Dean
Faculty of Science and Technology Faculty of Science and Technology
University of Mumbai University of Mumbai
Page 2 of 77
 Preamble

To meet the challenge of ensuring excellence in engineering education, the issue of quality needs to be
addressed, debated and taken forward in a systematic manner. Accreditation is the principal means of
quality assurance in higher education. The major emphasis of accreditation process is to measure the
outcomes of the program that is being accredited. In line with this Faculty of Science and Technology
(in particular Engineering) of University of Mumbai has taken a lead in incorporating philosophy of
outcome based education in the process of curriculum development.
Faculty resolved that course objectives and course outcomes are to be clearly defined for each course,
so that all faculty members in affiliated institutes understand the depth and approach of course to be
taught, which will enhance learner’s learning process. Choice based Credit and grading system enables
a much-required shift in focus from teacher-centric to learner-centric education since the workload
estimated is based on the investment of time in learning and not in teaching. It also focuses on
continuous evaluation which will enhance the quality of education. Credit assignment for courses is
based on 15 weeks teaching learning process, however content of courses is to be taught in 13 weeks
and remaining 2 weeks to be utilized for revision, guest lectures, coverage of content beyond syllabus
etc.
There was a concern that the earlier revised curriculum more focused on providing information and
knowledge across various domains of the said program, which led to heavily loading of students in
terms of direct contact hours. In this regard, faculty of science and technology resolved that to minimize
the burden of contact hours, total credits of entire program will be of 170, wherein focus is not only on
providing knowledge but also on building skills, attitude and self learning. Therefore in the present
curriculum skill based laboratories and mini projects are made mandatory across all disciplines of
engineering in second and third year of programs, which will definitely facilitate self learning of
students. The overall credits and approach of curriculum proposed in the present revision is in line with
AICTE model curriculum.
The present curriculum will be implemented for Second Year of Engineering from the academic year
2020-21. Subsequently this will be carried forward for Third Year and Final Year Engineering in the
academic years 2021-22, 2022-23, respectively.

Dr. S. K. Ukarande Dr Anuradha Muzumdar

Associate Dean Dean
Faculty of Science and Technology Faculty of Science and Technology
University of Mumbai University of Mumbai

Page 3 of 77
Incorporation and Implementation of Online Contents from
NPTEL/ Swayam Platform

The curriculum revision is mainly focused on knowledge component, skill based activities and
project based activities. Self learning opportunities are provided to learners. In the revision process
this time in particular Revised syllabus of ‘C ‘ scheme wherever possible additional resource links
of platforms such as NPTEL, Swayam are appropriately provided. In an earlier revision of
curriculum in the year 2012 and 2016 in Revised scheme ‘A' and ‘B' respectively, efforts were
made to use online contents more appropriately as additional learning materials to enhance
learning of students.
In the current revision based on the recommendation of AICTE model curriculum overall credits
are reduced to 171, to provide opportunity of self learning to learner. Learners are now getting
sufficient time for self learning either through online courses or additional projects for enhancing
their knowledge and skill sets.
The Principals/ HoD’s/ Faculties of all the institute are required to motivate and encourage learners
to use additional online resources available on platforms such as NPTEL/ Swayam. Learners can
be advised to take up online courses, on successful completion they are required to submit
certification for the same. This will definitely help learners to facilitate their enhanced learning
based on their interest.

Dr. S. K. Ukarande Dr Anuradha Muzumdar

Associate Dean Dean
Faculty of Science and Technology Faculty of Science and Technology
University of Mumbai University of Mumbai

Page 4 of 77
 Preface
The engineering education in India is expanding and is set to increase manifold. The major
challenge in the current scenario is to ensure quality to the stakeholders along with expansion. To
meet this challenge, the issue of quality needs to be addressed, debated and taken forward in a
systematic manner. Accreditation is the principal means of quality assurance in higher education
and reflects the fact that in achieving recognition, the institution or program of study is committed
and open to external review to meet certain minimum specified standards. The major emphasis of
this accreditation process is to measure the outcomes of the program that is being accredited.
Program Outcomes (POs) are essentially a range of skills and knowledge that a student will have
at the time of graduation from the program. In line with this, Faculty of Technology of University
of Mumbai has taken a lead in incorporating the philosophy of outcome based education (OBE) in
the process of curriculum development from Rev-2012 onwards and continued to enhance the
curriculum further based on OBE in Rev-2016 and Rev-2019 “C” scheme.
As Chairman and Members of Board of Studies in Civil Engineering, University of Mumbai, we
are happy to state here that, the Program Educational Objectives (PEOs) for Undergraduate
Program were finalized in a brain storming sessions, which was attended by more than 40 members
from different affiliated Institutes of the University, who are either Heads of Departments or their
senior representatives from the Department of Civil Engineering. The PEOs finalized for the
undergraduate program in Civil Engineering are listed below;
1. To prepare the Learner with a sound foundation in mathematical, scientific and engineering
fundamentals
2. To motivate the Learner in the art of self-learning and to use modern tools for solving real life
problems
3. To prepare the Learner for a successful career in Indian and Multinational Organisations and
for excelling in post-gradute studies
4. To motivate learners for life-longing learning
5. To inculcate a professional and ethical attitude, good leadership qualities and commitment to
social responsibilities in the Learner’s thought process
In addition to the above listed PEOs, every institute is encouraged to add a few (2-3) more PEOs
suiting their institute vision and mission
Apart from the PEOs, for each course of the program, objectives and expected outcomes from a
learner’s point of view are also included in the curriculum to support the philosophy of OBE. We
strongly believe that even a small step taken in the right direction will definitely help in providing
quality education to the major stakeholders.

Board of Studies in Civil Engineering, University of Mumbai

1. Dr. S. K. Ukarande: Chairman
2. Dr. K. K. Sangle: Member
3. Dr. S. B. Charhate: Member
4. Dr. A. R. Kambekar: Member
5. Dr. R. B. Magar: Member
6. Dr. Seema Jagtap: Member

Page 5 of 77
 Program Structure for Second Year Engineering
Semester III & IV
UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI
(With Effect from 2020-2021)
Semester - III
Course Teaching Scheme
Course Name Credits Assigned
Code (Contact Hours)
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
CEC301 Engineering Mathematics-III 3 - 1 3 - 1 4
CEC302 Mechanics of Solids 4 4 4
CEC303 Engineering Geology 3 3 3
Architectural Planning &
CEC304 2 - - 2 - - 2
Design of Buildings
CEC305 Fluid Mechanics- I 3 - - 3 - - 3
CEL301 Mechanics of Solids - 2 - - 1 - 1
CEL302 Engineering Geology - 2 - - 1 - 1
Architectural Planning &
CEL303 - 2 - - 1 - 1
Design of Buildings
CEL304 Fluid Mechanics- I - 2 - - 1 - 1
CEL305 Skill Based Lab Course-I 3 - 1.5 1.5
CEM301 Mini Project – 1 A - 3$ - - 1.5 - 1.5
Total 15 14 1 15 7 1 23

Examination Scheme

Exam
End
Internal Durati
Course Name Sem Term Prac.
Assessment on Total
Course Exam Work /Oral
(Hrs.)-
Code
Test Test Avg
I II .
CEC301 Engineering Mathematics-III 20 20 20 80 3 25 - 125
CEC302 Mechanics of Solids 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
CEC303 Engineering Geology 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
CEC304 Architectural Planning &
20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
Design of Buildings
CEC305 Fluid Mechanics- I 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
CEL301 Mechanics of Solids - - - - - 25 25 50
CEL302 Engineering Geology - - - - - 25 25 50
CEL303 Architectural Planning &
- - - - - 25 25 50
Design of Buildings
CEL304 Fluid Mechanics- I - - - - - 25 25 50
CEL305 Skill Based Lab Course-I - - - - - 50 - 50
CEM301 Mini Project – 1 A - - - - - 25 25 50
Total 100 400 - 200 125 825

Page 6 of 77
 Semester – IV

Course Teaching Scheme

Course Name Credits Assigned
Code (Contact Hours)
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
CEC401 Engineering Mathematics - IV 3 -- 1 3 - 1 4

CEC402 Structural Analysis 4 -- - 4 - - 4

CEC403 Surveying 3 -- - 3 - - 3
CEC404 Building Materials &Concrete 3 -- - 3 - - 3
Technology
CEC405 Fluid Mechanics-II 3 - - 3 - - 3
CEL 401 Structural Analysis -- 2 - - 1 - 1
CEL 402 Surveying -- 3 - - 1.5 - 1.5
CEL 403 Building Material Concrete -- 2 - - 1 - 1
Technology
CEL 404 Fluid Mechanics-II -- 2 1 1
CEL 405 Skill Based lab Course-II -- 2 - - 1 - 1
CEM401 Mini Project – 1 B -- 3$ - - 1.5 - 1.5
Total 16 14 1 16 7 1 24

Examination Scheme

Exam
End
Internal Durati
Course Name Sem Term Prac.
Assessment on Total
Course Exam Work /Oral
(Hrs.)-
Code
Test Test Avg
I II .
CEC 401 Engineering Mathematics - IV 20 20 20 80 3 25 - 125
CEC 402 Structural Analysis 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
CEC 403 Surveying 20 20 20 80 3 100
CEC 404 Building Materials & Concrete 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
Technology
CEC 405 Fluid Mechanics-II 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
CEL 401 Structural Analysis 25 25 50
CEL 402 Surveying 50 25 75
CEL 403 Building Materials & Concrete - - - - - 25 25 50
Technology
CEL 404 Fluid Mechanics-II - - - - - 25 25 50
CEL 405 Skill Based lab Course-II - - - - - 50 - 50
CEM401 Mini Project – 1 B - - - - - 25 25 50
Total 100 400 - 225 125 850

Page 7 of 77
 Semester- III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC 301 Engineering Mathematics-III 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - 01 03 - 01 04

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Duration of Total
Sem. End Sem. TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average
Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 03 hrs 25 - - 125

Pre-requisite: Engineering Mathematics-I,

Engineering Mathematics-II,
Course Objectives:
1. To familiarize with the Laplace Transform, Inverse Laplace Transform of various
functions, its applications.
2. To acquaint with the concept of Fourier Series, its complex form and enhance the problem
solving skills.
3. To familiarize with the concept of complex variables, C-R equations with applications.
4. To study the application of the knowledge of matrices and numerical methods in complex
engineering problems.

Course Outcomes: Learner will be able to….

1. Apply the concept of Laplace transform to solve the real integrals in engineering problems.
2. Apply the concept of inverse Laplace transform of various functions in engineering
problems.
3. Expand the periodic function by using Fourier series for real life problems and complex
engineering problems.
4. Find orthogonal trajectories and analytic function by using basic concepts of complex
variable theory.
5. Apply Matrix algebra to solve the engineering problems.
6. Solve Partial differential equations by applying numerical solution and analytical methods
for one dimensional heat and wave equations.

Page 8 of 77
Module Detailed Contents Hrs.
Module: Laplace Transform 07 Hrs.
1.1 Definition of Laplace transform, Condition of Existence of Laplace transform,
1.2 Laplace Transform (L) of Standard Functions like 𝑒 𝑎𝑡 , 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝑎𝑡),
𝑠𝑖𝑛ℎ(𝑎𝑡), 𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ(𝑎𝑡) and 𝑡 𝑛 , 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑛 ≥ 0.
01 1.3 Properties of Laplace Transform: Linearity, First Shifting theorem, Second
Shifting Theorem, change of scale Property, multiplication by t, Division by t,
Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals (Properties without proof).
1.4 Evaluation of integrals by using Laplace Transformation.
Self-learning topics: Heaviside’s Unit Step function, Laplace Transform. of Periodic
functions, Dirac Delta Function.

Module: Inverse Laplace Transform 06 Hrs.

2.1 Inverse Laplace Transform, Linearity property, use of standard formulae to
find inverse Laplace Transform, finding Inverse Laplace transform using
derivative
02 2.2 Partial fractions method & first shift property to find inverse Laplace transform.
2.3 Inverse Laplace transform using Convolution theorem (without proof)

Self-learning Topics: Applications to solve initial and boundary value problems

involving ordinary differential equations.
Module: Fourier Series: 07Hrs.
3.1 Dirichlet’s conditions, Definition of Fourier series and Parseval’s Identity
(without proof)
3.2 Fourier series of periodic function with period 2π and 2l,
03 3.3 Fourier series of even and odd functions
3.4 Half range Sine and Cosine Series.

Self-learning Topics: Complex form of Fourier Series, orthogonal and orthonormal

set of functions, Fourier Transform.
Module: Complex Variables: 07Hrs.
4.1 Function f(z) of complex variable, limit, continuity and differentiability of f(z),

Analytic function, necessary and sufficient conditions for f(z) to be analytic (without proof),
04
4.2 Cauchy-Riemann equations in cartesian coordinates (without proof)
4.3 Milne-Thomson method to determine analytic function f(z) when real part (u) or Imaginary
part (v) or its combination (u+v or u-v) is given.

Page 9 of 77
 4.4 Harmonic function, Harmonic conjugate and orthogonal trajectories

Self-learning Topics: Conformal mapping, linear, bilinear mapping, cross ratio, fixed points and
standard transformations

Module: Matrices: 06 Hrs.

5.1 Characteristic equation, Eigen values and Eigen vectors, Properties of Eigen
values and Eigen vectors. (No theorems/ proof)
5.2 Cayley-Hamilton theorem (without proof): Application to find the inverse
of the given square matrix and to determine the given higher degree

05 polynomial matrix.
5.3 Functions of square matrix
5.4 Similarity of matrices, Diagonalization of matrices

Self-learning Topics: Verification of Cayley Hamilton theorem, Minimal

polynomial and Derogatory matrix & Quadratic Forms (Congruent transformation &
Orthogonal Reduction)
Module: Numerical methods for PDE 06 Hrs.
6.1 Introduction of Partial Differential equations, method of separation of
variables, Vibrations of string, Analytical method for one dimensional heat and
06 wave equations. (only problems)
6.2 Crank Nicholson method
6.3 Bender Schmidt method
Self-learning Topics: Analytical methods of solving two and three dimensional
problems.
Total 39

Term Work:
General Instructions:
1 Batch wise tutorials are to be conducted. The number of student’sperbatch should be as per University
pattern for practicals.

2 Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on entire syllabus.

3 A group of 4-6 students should be assigned a self-learning topic. Students should prepare a
presentation/problem solving of 10-15 minutes. This should be considered as mini project in
Engineering Mathematics. This project should be graded for 10 marks depending on the
performance of the students.

Page 10 of 77
The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows –
1 Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks
2 Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks
3 Mini project 10 marks

Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on
approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40%
but excluding contents covered in Test I). Duration of each test shall be one hour.
End Semester Examination: Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be
proportional to number of respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3
then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

References:
1 Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, KhannaPublication
2 Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley EasternLimited,
3 Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S.R.K. Iyengar, Narosapublication
4 Advanced Engineering Mathematics, H.K. Das, S. Chand Publication
5 Higher Engineering Mathematics B.V. Ramana, McGraw HillEducation
6 Complex Variables and Applications, Brown and Churchill, McGraw-Hilleducation,
7 Text book of Matrices, Shanti Narayan and P K Mittal, S. ChandPublication
8 Laplace transforms, Murray R. Spiegel, Schaum’s OutlineSeries
*****************

Page 11 of 77
 Semester- III
Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC 302 Mechanics of Solids 4

Contact Hours Credits Assigned
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - 4 - -- 4
Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Duration of
Total
Test- Sem. End Sem TE PR OR
Test-I Average
II Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - -- -- 100

Rationale

Civil Engineering structures are made using various engineering materials such as steel, concrete,
timber, other metals or their composites. They are subjected to force systems resulting into axial
forces, bending moments, shear forces, torsion and their combinations. Different materials
respond differently to these by getting deformed and having induced stresses. Determination of
stress, strain, and deflection suffered by structural elements when subjected to diverse loads is
prerequisite for an economical and safe design.
In this course, learners will understand the internal response behavior of material under different
force systems. The knowledge of ‘Mechanics of Solids’ will be foundation of essential theoretical
background for the subjects of Structural Analysis and Structural Design.

Objectives

1) To learn stress - strain behavior and physical properties of materials and to compute the
Stresses developed and deformation of Elastic members and thin cylinders subjected to
internal pressure.
2) To learn to represent graphically the distribution of axial force, shear force and bending
moment along the length of statically determinate beams and portal frames.
3) To compute area moment of inertia and to analyze the distribution of shear stress and the
flexural (bending) stress across the cross section of structural members.
4) To study circular shafts under the action of twisting moment and to determine the direct and
bending stresses in columns and study buckling behavior of centrally and eccentrically
loaded columns.
5) To determine principal planes and stresses and strain energy computation in elastic members.
6) To learn the computation of slope and deflection of elastic beams and general theorems used
in this computation.

Page 12 of 77
 Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Modules / Contents Periods

Module Name- Stresses and Strains in Elastic members, Spherical and (9)
Cylindrical shells
Types of Stresses and Strains, stress-strain curve, different types of 6
Elastic moduli and relationships between them, Poisson’s ratio, factor
1.1
of safety. Bars of varying sections, composite sections, temperature
1 stresses
Thin cylindrical and spherical shells under Internal pressure: 3
1.2 Determination of Hoop stress, Longitudinal stress, Shear stress and
volumetric strain.
Module Name- Axial force, shear force and bending moment diagrams (9)
for beams and portal frames
Concept of Axial Force, Shear Force and Bending Moment. 6

a) A.F. S.F. and B M Diagrams for statically determinate S S and

Cantilever beams without internal hinges and for single loading like
2 2.1 point load, UDL, UVL or Couple moment.
b) A.F. S.F. and B.M. Diagrams for statically determinate beams
with internal hinges and combination of loading
A.F. S.F. and B.M Diagrams for statically determinate 3-member 3
2.2
Portal Frames with or without internal hinges .
Module Name- Area Moment of Inertia, Shear stresses and Bending (9)
stresses in beams
Area Moment of inertia, Parallel and Perpendicular axis theorem, polar 5
moment of inertia. Radius of gyration. (Rectangular, Triangular,
3.1 Circular, Semicircular section and their combination)
3
Distribution of shear stress across plane sections Commonly used for
structural purposes.
Theory of pure bending, Flexure formula for straight beam, simple 4
3.2 problems involving application of Flexure formula, section modulus,
moment of resistance, flitch beams.
Module Name- Torsion in Shafts, Columns (10)

Torsion in solid and hollow circular shafts, shafts with varying cross 4
4 4.1 sections, Shafts transmitting and receiving power at different points.
Stresses in Shafts while transmitting power.
4.2 Direct and bending stresses in Columns, Core of section. 6

Page 13 of 77
 Buckling of Columns, Members subjected to axial loading, concept of
buckling, effective length, different support conditions, Euler’s and
Rankine’s formula. Concept of Eccentrically loaded columns.
Module Name- Principal planes and stresses, Strain Energy (8)

General equation for transformation of stress, Principal planes and 4

5.1 principal stresses, maximum Shear stress, stress determination by
5
analytical and Graphical method (using Mohr’s circle).
Strain energy due to axial force and impact loads in columns, due to 4
5.2
bending in beams, due to torsion of shaft.
Module Name- Slope and Deflection in Beams , General Theorems (7)

Concept of Slope and Deflection in Beams, Macaulay’s Method for 4

6.1 slope and deflection in S S and Cantilever beams subjected to point
loads, UDL and couple moments.
6
General Theorems: Betti and Maxwell’s reciprocal Theorem,, 3
Principle of Superposition, Principle of Virtual work, Castigliano’s
6.2 theorems.

Contribution to Outcome

On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1) Evaluate stress - strain behavior of elastic members and thin cylinders subjected to internal
pressure.
2) Draw variation of axial force, shear force and bending moment diagram for statically
determinate beams and frames.
3) Calculate Moment of Inertia for cross sections and analyse the material response under the
action of shear and the effect of flexure (bending).
4) Predict the angle of twist and shear stress developed in torsion and compute direct and
bending stresses developed in the cross section of centrally and eccentrically loaded
columns.
5) Locate principal planes in members and calculate principal stresses using analytical and
graphical method and to calculate strain energy stored in members due to elastic
deformation.
6) Evaluate slope and deflection of beams supported and loaded in different ways.
Internal Assessment (20 Marks):
One Compulsory Class Test, based on approximately 40% of contents and another on 40% from
the remaining content be taken. Average of the two will be considered as IA Marks.

Page 14 of 77
End Semester Examination (80 Marks):
Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture
Hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1) Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2) Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3) Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4) Only Four questions need to be solved.
Recommended Books:
1. Strength of Materials: S. Ramamrutham, Dhanpatrai Publishers.
2. Strength of Materials: R.K. Rajput, S. Chand Publications.
3. Mechanics of Materials: Vol-I: S.B. Junnarkar and H.J. Shah, Charotar Publications.
4. Strength of Materials: Subramanian, Oxford University Press
5. Strength of Materials: S.S. Rattan, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, New Delhi
6. Strength of Materials (Mechanics of Materials): R.S. Lehri and A.S. Lehri, S.K. Kataria
Publishers, New Delhi
7. Strength of Materials: Dr. V.L. Shah, Structures Publications, Pune
Reference Books:
8. Mechanics of Materials: James, M. and Barry J.; Cengage Learning.
9. Mechanics of Materials: Andrew Pytel and Jaan Kiusalaas, Cengage Learning.
10. Mechanics of Materials: Timoshenko and Gere, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
11. Mechanics of Materials: James M. Gere, Books/Cole.
12. Strength of Materials: G.H. Ryder, Mc-Millan.
13. Mechanics of Materials: E.P. Popov, Prentice Hall India (PHI) Pvt. Ltd.
14. Mechanics of Materials: Pytel and Singer, Mc-Graw Hill, New Delhi.
15. Strength of Materials: William A. Nash and Nillanjan Mallick, Mc-Graw Hill Book Co.
(Schaum’s Outline Series)
*****************

Page 15 of 77
 Semester-III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC 303 Engineering Geology 3

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
3 - 3 - 3

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Total
TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam
20 20 20 80 3 hrs - 100

Rationale

Engineering geology is an applied geology discipline that involves the collection, analysis, and
Interpretation of geological data and information required for the safe development of civil
works. The objective of this course is to focus on the core activities of engineering geologists –
site characterization, geologic hazard identification and mitigation. Through lectures, labs, and
case study examination student will learn to couple geologic expertise with the engineering
properties of rock in the characterization of geologic sites for civil work projects.
Understanding of the foundation rocks and structures present in them is of utmost importance
for the safety and stability of Civil engineering structures. The study also helps in the assessment
of groundwater, oil and gas and mineral resource evaluation.

Objectives

1. To acquire basic knowledge of Geology and to understand its significance in various civil
engineering projects.
2. To study minerals and rocks in order to understand their fundamental characteristics and
engineering properties.
3. To study structural geology for characterization of site, analysis and report geologic data
using standards in engineering practice.
4. To study methods of subsurface investigation, advantages and disadvantages caused due
to geological conditions and assessment of site for the construction of civil structures.
5. To study rock mass characterization for the construction of tunnels and assessment of rock
as source of ground water.
6. To study the control of geology over the natural hazards and their preventive measures.

Page 16 of 77
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Modules / Contents Periods

Introduction & Physical Geology 5

Branches of geology useful to civil engineering, Importance of

geological studies in various civil engineering Projects. Departments
1.1
dealing with this subject in India and their scope of work- GSI, Granite
Dimension Stone Cell, NIRM.
Internal structure of the Earth and use of seismic waves in
1 1.2
understanding the interior of the earth. Theory of Plate Tectonics.
Weathering types, Erosion and Denudation. Factors affecting
1.3 weathering and product of weathering (engineering consideration)
Superficial deposits and its geological Importance.
1.4 Brief study of geological action of wind, glacier and river.
Mineralogy and Petrology 7

Identification of minerals with the help of physical properties, rock

2.1 forming minerals, megascopic identification of primary and secondary
minerals, study of common ore minerals.
Igneous Petrology - Mode of formation, Texture and structure, form of
2.2 Igneous rocks, Classification of Igneous rocks, study of commonly
occurring igneous rocks, Engineering aspect of Granite and Basalt.
2 Sedimentary Petrology - Mode of formation, Textures, characteristics
of shallow water deposits like lamination, bedding, current bedding
2.3
etc., classification, study of commonly occurring sedimentary rocks
and their engineering application.
Metamorphic Petrology - Mode of formation, agents and types of
metamorphism, structures and textures of metamorphic rocks,
2.4 classification and study of commonly occurring metamorphic rocks and
their engineering application.

Structural Geology and Stratigraphy 12

Dip and Strike. Outcrop and width of outcrop. Inliers and Outliers. Type
of discontinuities in the rocks.
Fold: Terminology, Classification on the basis of position of axial
3 plane, Criteria for their recognition in field and engineering
3.1
consideration.
Fault: Terminology, Classification on the basis of movement of faulted
block, Criteria for recognition in field, effects on outcrops and
Engineering consideration.
Page 17 of 77
 Joints & Unconformity: Types and geological importance.
Three point problems to determine attitude of the strata
3.2 Determination of thickness of the strata with the help of given data.
Geological Maps and their application for civil engineering works,
3.3
Identification of symbols in maps.
General principles of Stratigraphy, geological time scale,
3.4 Physiographic divisions of India and their characteristics. Stratigraphy
of Deccan Volcanic Province.
Geological Investigation, study of dam and reservoir site: 7

Required geological consideration for selecting dam and reservoir site.

Favorable & unfavorable conditions in different types of rocks in
4.1
presence of various structural features, precautions to be taken to
counteract unsuitable conditions.
4
Electrical resistivity and Seismic method of geological investigation.
4.2 Rock Quality Designation and its importance to achieve safety and
economy of the projects like dams and tunnels.
Borehole problems and their significance in determining subsurface
4.3
geology of the area.
Tunnel Investigation and Ground Water Control 5

Importance of geological considerations while choosing tunnel sites

5.1 and alignments of the tunnel, safe and unsafe geological and structural
conditions.

5 5.2 Geo-mechanics classification (RMR) and its application.

Sources, zones, water table, unconfined, confined and Perched water
tables. Factors controlling water bearing capacity of rocks, Pervious
5.3 and Impervious rocks, Different types of rocks as source of ground
water. Artesian well (flowing and non-flowing). Cone of Depression
and its use in Civil engineering.
Geological Disasters and Control Measures 3

Landslides-Types, causes and preventive measures for landslides,

6.1
Landslides in Deccan region.

6 6.2 Volcano- Central type and fissure type, products of volcano.

Earthquake- Terminology, Earthquake waves, construction and
working of seismograph, Earthquake zones of India, elastic rebound
6.3
theory, Preventive measures for structures constructed in Earthquake
prone area.

Page 18 of 77
 Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1) Explain the concepts of Geology and its application for safe, stable and economic design
of any civil engineering structure.
2) Interpret the lithological characters of the rock specimen and distinguish them on the basis
of studied parameters.
3) Describe the structural elements of the rocks and implement the knowledge for collection
and analysis of the geological data.
4) Interpret the geological conditions for the dam site and calculate RQD for the assessment
of rock masses.
5) Analyze the given data and suggest rock mass rating for assessment of tunnelling
conditions.
6) Interpret the causes of geological hazards and implement the knowledge for their
prevention.
Internal Assessment (20 Marks):
Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second
test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination (80 Marks):

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecturehours mentioned in the curriculum.
1) Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2) Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3) Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module
3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4) Only Four questions need to be solved.
Recommended Books:
1) Text book of Engineering Geology: N. Chenna, Kesavulu, Mc-Millan.
2) Text book of Engineering and General Geology, 8th edition (2010): Parbin Singh, S K
Kataria& Sons.
3) Text book of Engineering Geology: P. K. Mukerjee, Asia.
4) Text book of Engineering Geology: Dr. R. B. Gupte, Pune VidyarthiGriha
5) Prakashan, Pune.
6) Principles of Engineering Geology: K. M. Banger.

Reference Books:
7) A Principles of Physical Geology: Arthur Homes, Thomas Nelson Publications, London.
8) Structural Geology, 3rd edition (2010): Marland P. Billings, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi
9) Earth Revealed, Physical Geology: David McGeeary and Charles C. Plummer
10) Principles of Geomorphology: William D. Thornbury, John Wiley Publications, New York.
11) Geology for Civil Engineering: A. C. McLean, C.D. Gribble, George Allen &UnwinLondon.
12) Engineering Geology: A Parthsarathy, V. Panchapakesan, R Nagarajan, Wiley India 2013.
*****************

Page 19 of 77
 Semester - III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC304 Architectural Planning & Design of Buildings 02

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
02 - - 02 - - 02

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment Total
End Sem Duration of End
TW PR OR
Exam Sem Exam
Test-I Test-II Average
20 20 20 80 03 Hrs --- - 100

Rationale
Drawing is the language of Civil Engineers to communicate. Drawing is one of the most essential
documents as far as civil engineering is concerned. It provides guidance and instructions to
architects, engineers and workmen at field, on how to construct structures according to the figures
and dimensions shown in the drawing. Approved drawings are also essential for the estimation
of cost and materials; as well as a very important contract document.

Objectives

1) To remember and recall the intricate details of building design and drawing.
2) To gain an understanding of the basic concepts of building design and drawing.
3) To learn how to apply professional ethics and act responsibly pertaining to the norms of
building design and drawing practices, rules, regulation and byelaws, Building codes
4) To identify, analyze, research literate and solve complex building design and drawing
problems.
5) To have new solutions for complex building design and drawing problems.
6) To effectively communicate ideas, related to building design and drawing, both orally as well
as in written format like reports & drawings.

Course Outcomes
At the end of the course learners will be able to:
1) Remember and recall the intricate details of building design and drawing.
2) Understand the basic concepts of building design and drawing.
3) Learn how to apply professional ethics and act responsibly pertaining to the norms of
building design and drawing practices.
4) Identify, analyze, research literate and solve complex building design and drawing
problems.
5) Have new solutions for complex building design and drawing problems.
6) Effectively communicate ideas, related to building design and drawing, both orally as
well as in written format like reports & drawings.
Page 20 of 77
Detailed Syllabus
Module Sub- Modules/ Contents Periods
Principles and Codes of Practices for Planning and Designing of 8
1
Buildings(Residential and Public buildings)
Study of IS 962: 1989 – Code of Practice for Architectural and Building
Drawings; How to develop Line plan into actual PLAN, ELEVATION,
1.1
Section etc. including all the constructional details of various components
in a BUILDING
1.2 Principles of planning for Residential buildings
Classification of buildings: Residential –Individual Bungalows &
Apartments/Flats.
1.3
Public – Education (Schools, Colleges etc.) &Health (Primary Health
Center, Hospital) related buildings
Study & drawing of SITE PLAN,FOUNDATION PLAN,ROOF PLAN of
building;
Study of building Bye – laws, Zoning Regulations and permissions
1.4
required from commencement to completion of the building according to
National Building Code (N.B.C.) of India and local Development Control
(D.C.) rules
1.5
Study of sun path diagram, wind rose diagram and sun shading devices
1.6 Calculation of setback distances, carpet area, built-up area and floor
spaceindex (FSI)
Study of Principles of planning for public buildings:
1.7 i) Building for education: schools, colleges, institutions etc.
ii) Buildings for health: hospitals, primary health centers etc.
2. Components and Services of a Building 3
2.1 Staircase (dog -legged) planning, designing & drawing in details
Foundations: stepped footing, isolated sloped footing and combined
2.2
footing
2.3 Openings: doors and windows
2.4 Types of pitched roof and their suitability (plan and section)
2.5 Building services: Water supply, sanitary and electrical layouts
3. Perspective Drawings 4
3.1 One-point perspective drawing
3.2 Two-point perspective drawing
4 Town Planning, Architectural Planning & Built Environment 3
4.1 Objectives and planning of TOWN PLANNING
Master plan,
4.2 Re-Development of buildings, Slum rehabilitation.
4.3 Architectural Planning: introduction and principles
4.4 Built Environment: introduction and principles
5 Green Buildings 2
5.1
Introduction, uses ,objectives of Green Buildings and overview
5.2
Study of Certification methods such as LEED, TERI, GRIHA, IGBC.
6. Computer Aided Drawing (CAD) 6
6.1 Details and learning methods of CAD in Civil Engineering structures
6.2 Study and demonstration of any one of the professional CAD software’s
Total 26

Page 21 of 77
Theory Examination:
1) Only 4 questions (out of 6) need to be attempted.
2) Question no. 1 will be compulsory and based on the drawing work of any one building,
may be residential or public building.. Some questions from the remaining may be on
Theory portion.
3) 4. Any 3 out of the remaining 5 questions need to be attempted.
4) In question paper, weightage of each module maybe approximately proportional to the
number of lecture hours assigned to it in the syllabus.
Internal Assessment:
There will be Two class tests (to be referred to as an ‘Internal Assessment’) to be conducted in
the semester. The first internal assessment (IA-I) will be conducted in the mid of the semester
based on the 50% of the syllabus. It will be of 20 marks. Similarly, the second internal assessment
(IA-II) will be conducted at the end of the semester and it will be based on next 50% of the syllabus.
It will be of 20 marks. Lastly, the average of the marks scored by the students in both the Internal
Assessment will be considered. Duration of both the IA examination will be of one hour duration,
respectively. Civil Engineering Drawing (including Architectural aspect) by M. Chakraborti
(Monojit Chakraborti Publications, Kolkata)
Recommended Books

1) Planning and Designing Buildings by Y. S. Sane (Modern Publication House, Pune)

2) Building Drawing and Detailing by B.T.S. Prabhu, K.V. Paul and C. V. Vijayan (SPADES
Publication, Calicut)
3) Building Planning by Gurucharan Singh (Standard Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi)

References:
1) IS 962: 1989 – Code of Practice for Architectural and Building Drawings.
2) National Building Code of India – 2005 (NBC 2005)
3) Development Control Regulations for Mumbai Metropolitan Region for 2016 – 2036
(https://mmrda.maharashtra.gov.in)
4) Development Control Regulations for Navi Mumbai Municipal Corporation – 1994
(https://www.nmmc.gov.in/development-control-regulations)
5) Development Plan and Control Regulation KDMC, https://mmrda.maharashtra.gov.in
Reference Codes:

1) National Building Code of India, 2005

2) IS 779-1978 Specification for Water Meter
3) IS 909-1975 Specification for Fire Hydrant
4) IS 1172-1983 Code of Basic Requirement for Water Supply, Drainage & Sanitation
5) IS 1742-1983 Code of Practice for Building Drainage
************

Page 22 of 77
 Semester- III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC305 Fluid Mechanics - I 03

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Duration of Total
Sem End Sem. TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average
Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 03 hrs - - - 100

Rationale

The concept of fluid mechanics in civil engineering is essential to understand the processes and
science offluids. The course deals with the basic concepts and principles in hydrostatics, hydro
kinematics andhydrodynamics with their applications in fluid flow problems.

Objectives
The students will be able to learn:
1. The properties of fluids, units and dimensions
2. Pressure measurement, manometry, Hydrostatic forces acting on different surfaces,
Principle of buoyancy and stability of floating body
3. Kinematic and Dynamic behavior through various laws of fluids like continuity, Euler’s,
Bernoulli’s equations, energy and momentum equations.
4. Importance of fluid flow and various velocity measuring and discharge measuring devices
used in pipes and channels.
5. The basic difference between incompressible and compressible flow, Propagation
of pressure waves and stagnation points.

Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Modules / Contents Periods

Properties of Fluids
Mass density, weight density, specific gravity, specific volume, viscosity,
1 05
compressibility and elasticity, surface tension, capillarity, vapour pressure,
types of fluids, and introduction to real life applications.
Fluid Statics
Pressure Measurement:
Pascal’s law, hydrostatic law, pressure variation in fluids at rest.
2 2.1
Pressure scale, Absolute, atmospheric, gauge pressure, measurement
of pressure using manometers
11
2.2 Hydrostatic force on surfaces:
Page 23 of 77
 Total pressure and centre of pressure, total pressure on horizontal
planesurface, vertical plane surface, Inclined plane surface, centre of
pressure for vertical plane surface and for inclined plane surface,
practical applications of total pressure and centre of pressure on
dams, gates, and tanks.
Buoyancy and floatation:
Archimedes principle, Meta-Centre, metacentric height, Stability of
floating and submerged bodies, determination of metacentric height,
2.3
Experimental and analytical methods, metacentric height for floating
bodies containing liquid, Time period of Transverse oscillations of
floating bodies.
Fluid Kinematics
Types of fluid flow, description of flow pattern, Lagrangian methods,
3
Eulerian method, continuity equation, velocity and acceleration of fluid
05
particles, streamline, streak line, path line,velocity potential and stream
function, equipotential lines and flow net, uses of flow net, rotational and
irrotational motions, circulation and vorticity
Fluid Dynamics
Control volume and control surface, Forces acting on fluid in motion,
Navier Stokes Equation, Euler’s Equation of motion, Integration of Euler’s
06
4 equations of motion, Bernoulli’s Theorem and its derivation, Bernoulli’s
equation for compressible fluid and real fluid, practical applications of
Bernoulli’s Equation - Venturimeter, Orifice meter, nozzle meter, pitot
tube, Rota meter.
Flow measurement 08
Orifices and mouthpieces
Classification of orifices, flow through orifices, determination of
hydraulic coefficients, flow through large rectangular orifice, flow
through fully submerged and partially submerged orifice, time of
5.1
emptying a tank through an orifice at its bottom. Classification of
Mouthpieces, Flow through external cylindrical mouthpiece,
5 convergent-divergent mouthpiece, Borda’s mouthpieces.

Notches and weirs

Classification of notches and weirs, discharge over a rectangular,
5.2 triangular, trapezoidal notch/weir, velocity of approach, stepped
notch, Cipolleti weir, broad crested weir, ogee weir, discharge over
a submerged weir, ventilation of weirs.

6 6.1 Compressible flow 04

Basic equation of flow (elementary study), velocity of sound or
pressure wave in a fluid, Mach number, propagation of pressure
waves, area-velocity relationship, Stagnation properties.
Total 39

Page 24 of 77
 Contribution to Outcome
Upon completion of the course, students shall have ability to:
1) Describe various properties of fluids and types of flow
2) Determine the pressure difference in pipe flows, application of Continuity equation and
Bernoulli’s theorem to determine velocity and discharge
3) Apply hydrostatic and dynamic solutions for fluid flow applications
4) Analyse the stability of floating bodies
5) Apply the working concepts of various devices to measure the flow through pipes and channels
6) Explain the compressible flow, propagation of pressure waves and stagnation properties
Internal Assessment (20 Marks):
Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests:
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remainingcontents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination (80 Marks):

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1) Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2) Question 1will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3) Remaining questions will be mixed in nature(for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3
then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4) Only Four questions need to be solved.
Recommended Books:
1) Hydraulics and Fluid mechanics: Dr. P.M. Modi and Dr. S.M. Seth, Standard Book House,
Delhi
2) Theory and Application of Fluid Mechanics: K. Subramanian, Tata McGraw hill publishing
company, New Delhi.
3) Fluid Mechanics: Dr. A.K Jain, Khanna Publishers.
4) Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics: Dr. S.K. Ukarande, Ane’s Books Pvt.Ltd. (Revised Edition
2012), ISBN 97893 8116 2538
5) Fluid Mechanics and fluid pressure engineering: Dr. D.S. Kumar, F.K. Kataria and sons
6) Fluid Mechanics: R.K. Bansal Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd.

Reference Books:
1) Fluid Mechanics: Frank M. White, Tata McGraw Hill International Edition.
2) Fluid Mechanics: Streeter White Bedford, Tata McGraw International Edition.
3) Fluid Mechanics with Engineering Applications: R.L. Daugherty, J.B. Franzini, E.J.
Fennimore, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
4) Hydraulics: James F. Cruise, Vijay P. Singh and Mohsen M. Sherif, CENGAGE Learning
India (Pvt.) Ltd.
5) Introduction to Fluid Mechanics: Edward J. Shaughnessy, Jr, Ira M. Katz, James P. Schaffer.
Oxford Higher Education.

Page 25 of 77
 Semester- III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL301 Mechanics of Solids- LAB 01

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Total
Duration of
Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average End Sem Exam
Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Objectives

1) To learn stress - strain behavior and physical properties of materials and to compute the
Stresses developed and deformation of Elastic members.
2) To compute the distribution of shear stress and the flexural (bending) stress across the cross
section of structural members
3) To study circular shafts under the action of twisting moment.
4) To learn the computation of slope and deflection of elastic beams and general theorems used
in this computation.

Outcomes

Learner will be able to…

1) Evaluate stress - strain behavior of materials and assess the structural behavior by the virtue of
stresses developed and deformation of elastic members.
2) Analyze the material response under the action of shear and the effect of flexure (bending).
3) Predict the angle of twist and shear stress developed in torsion.
4) Evaluate slope and deflection of beams supported and loaded in different ways.

Term Work :Term work comprises of Laboratory work and assignments.

Page 26 of 77
Laboratory work : (At least 6- Performances - Any one from each Module)
Mechanics of Solids (Practical performance)
Schedule Name of Experiment Duration
(Hours)
1st week Using UTM find different Moduli of a material or
1) 2
The Tension Test on M S rod or
2)
The Tension Test on M S Flat
3)
3rd week The Compression Test on Concrete cube or
1) 2
The Compression Test on Timber or
2)
The Compression Test on Brick
3)
5th week Test of Bending Using a Strain Guage or
1) 2
Test of Bending Using a other electronic devices or
2)
Test of Shear Stress in Beams
3)
th
7 week 1)Using TorsionTesting Machine, verify the torsion equation, find 2
different Moduli of a material. or
2) Spring Stiffness Test using strain gauges or other electronic devices
9th week 1) Charpy impact testing and Energy concept. or 2
2) Izod impact testing and Energy concept.
11th week 1) Using U T M perform experiments and verify Slope and deflection 2
equations, 3 points and 4 points loading. (Performance) or
2) Deflection of Simply supported Beams (Performance) or
3) Deflection of Cantilever Beams (Performance)
Total Duration = 12 Hours

Assignment:
(At least 1 from each module as per the Course instructor’s guidelines; it is to be assessed during
Laboratory hours. In order to avoid Copying/ repetition, Course Instructor may give different
assignments to different groups.)
Mechanics of Solids
Schedule Assignment Duration
(Hours)
Stresses and strains in Elastic members, Spherical and Cylindrical shells 2
2nd week • Prepare a model of Cylindrical vessel or
• Prepare a model of spherical vessel or
• Prepare a model of Cylindrical vessel with hemispherical ends or
• Prepare a chart showing diagrammatic representation of stresses or
• A set of 5 questions on a module designed by course instructor, or
• A site visit to a relevant place or
• A model / chart based on a module or
• Design of a new experiment based on a module or
• Write a Computer program in C++ or MSExcel on how to find a
particular quantity from given data (Ex: Find output, Elongation ‘б’ from
the input values of P,L,A and E)
• A chart about scientists and their contribution to the study of ‘Mechanics
of Solids’ (Example given at the end of this document – Appendix I)

Page 27 of 77
 Axial force, shear force and bending moment diagrams for beams and 2
4th week portal frames
• A set of 5 questions on a module designed by course instructor, or
• A site visit to a relevant place or
• A model / chart based on a module or
• Design of a new experiment based on a module or
• A chart about scientists and their contribution to the study of ‘Mechanics
of Structures’ (Example given at the end of this document) or
• Prepare a chart showing AFD, SFD & BMD for different symmetric and
asymmetric loads on S S beams or
• Prepare a chart showing AFD, SFD & BMD for different loads on
Cantilever beams
6th week Area Moment of Inertia, Bending stresses and Shear stresses in beams 2
• Prepare a chart showing MI @ XX, YY &ZZ axes passing through the
centroid. or
• Prepare 3D models of different typical cross sections of beams and find
their cross sectional area, Ixx, Iyy and Izz.. or
• Prepare charts showing typical cross sections and variation of Bending
stresses and shear stresses across the cross section. or
• A set of 5 questions on a module designed by course instructor, or
• A site visit to a relevant place or
• A model / chart based on a module or
• Design of a new experiment based on a module or
• Write a Computer program in C++ or MS Excel on how to find a
particular quantity from given data (Ex: Find output, Flexural stress ‘f’
from the input values of P,L,I and E)
• A chart about scientists and their contribution to the study of ‘Mechanics
of Structures’ (Example given at the end of this document)
8th week Torsion of Shafts, Columns 2
• Prepare 3D models of different solid and hollow circular cross sections
of shafts and find their cross sectional area, Ixx, Iyy and Izz. or
• A set of 5 questions on a module designed by course instructor, or
• Write a Computer program in C++ or MS Excel on how to find a
particular quantity from given data (Ex: Find output, Shear stress ‘q’ or
angle ‘ϴ’ from the input values of T,L,G and J)
• A site visit to a relevant place or
• A model / chart based on a module or
• Design of a new experiment based on a module or
• A chart about scientists and their contribution to the study of ‘Mechanics
of Solids’ (Example given at the end of this document)
10th week Principal planes and stresses, Strain Energy 2
• Draw typical stress transformation cases of Mohr’s circle using graph
paper. or
• A set of 5 questions on a module designed by course instructor, or
• A site visit to a relevant place or
• A model / chart based on a module or
• Design of a new experiment based on a module or
• A chart about scientists and their contribution to the study of ‘Mechanics
of solids’ (Example given at the end of this document)

Page 28 of 77
 12th week Slope and Deflection in Beams ; General Theorems 2
• Prepare chart to explain General theorems for slope and deflection. or
• A set of 5 questions on a module designed by course instructor, or
• A site visit to a relevant place or
• A model / chart based on a module or
• Design of a new experiment based on a module or
• A chart about scientists and their contribution to the study of ‘Mechanics
of Solids’ (Example given at the end of this document)
Total Duration = 12 Hours

Appendix -I:
A chart about scientists and their contribution to the study of ‘Mechanics of solids’ be made by
students. Contributions of Scientists like GiordanoRiccati, Leonhard Euler, Saint Venant, Christian
Otto Mohr, William J M Rankine, Carlo Castigliano, EnricoBetti, Robert Hooke, W. H. Macaulay,
Augustin- Louis Cauchy, Simeon Poisson can be studied and presented.
Important Websites:
1) http://www.iitk.ac.in/mseold/mse_new/facilities/laboratories/Material Testing Lab /
MSE313A.pdf
2) https://home.iitm.ac.in/kramesh/Strength of Materials Laboratory Manual.pdf
3) https://www.researchgate.net/publication/338139499_Me_8381-
Strength_Of_Materials_Lab_Manual

Assessment:
To be done in 13th week
⚫ Term Work:
Including Laboratory Work and Assignments both, Distribution of marks for Term Work shall be
as follows:
Laboratory work- : 15 Marks
Assignments- : 10 Marks
The sum will be multiplied by a factor of attendance between
0.5 (for poor attendance) to 1 (very good attendance).

⚫ End Semester Oral Examination

Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus
*****************

Page 29 of 77
 Semester- III
Course Code Course Name Credits
CEL302 Engineering Geology Lab. Practice 1

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 2 - - 1 - 1

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment Duration of
End Sem Total
End Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average Exam
Exam
- - - - 3 hrs 25 - 25 50

Objectives

1. To acquire basic knowledge of Geological Lab practices and apply it for the safe
development of Civil Engineering works.
2. To examine the mineral and rock sample and understand their fundamental properties for
their evaluation as construction and foundation material.
3. To study the Geological maps and their sections in terms of selecting the sites for various
civil engineering structures.
4. To study Borehole problems for determination of subsurface geology of the area.
5. To Study the drilling data and calculate RQD for assessment of rock masses for Civil
Engineering purposes.

Outcomes
Learner will be able to…

1. Identify various rock forming minerals on the basis of physical properties.

2. Explain the characteristics of Igneous, Sedimentary and Metamorphic rocks and assess
their suitability as construction material and foundation rock.
3. Interpret the rock characteristics and comment on their suitability as water bearing
horizons.
4. Interpret the geological map and assess the suitability of the site for Civil Engineering
works.
5. Solve the borehole problems and interpret it in order to understand subsurface Geology of
the area.
6. Calculate RQD and evaluate the rock masses for Civil Engineering Works.

Page 30 of 77
A) List of Experiments
Module Detailed Contents Lab
Sessions/Hr
Study of Physical Properties of Minerals:
Identification of common Rock forming minerals on the basis of
physical Properties- Silica Group: Quartz and its varieties;
Cryptocrystalline silica: Jasper and Agate; Feldspar Group: 6
1
Orthoclase, Plagioclase; Carbonate Group: calcite; Amphibole
Group: Asbestos, Actinolite and Hornblende; Pyroxene
Group:Augite; Mica Group:Muscovite, Biotite and Talc; Element
Group: Graphite.
Identification of Metallic minerals: Galena, Pyrite, Hematite, 2
2
Magnetite.
Identification of rocks:
Igneous Rocks-Granite and its varieties, Syenite, Diorite, Gabbro, 4
3
Pegmatite. Porphyry, Dolerite, Rhyolite, Pumice, Trachyte, Basalt and
its varieties, Volcanic Breccia, Volcanic Tuffs.
Sedimentary Rocks- Conglomerate, Breccia, Sandstone and its 2
4
varieties, Shales, Limestones, Laterites.
Metamorphic Rocks- Schist and its varieties, Gneiss and its varieties, 2
5
Slate, Marbles, Quartzite and Phyllite.
Geological Maps: 6
a) Horizontal strata: Drawing the cross section and assessment of
geological history of the area.
b) Inclined Strata: Calculation of dip and strike in an inclined strata
and assessment of geological history of the area.
6 c) Assessment of the geological conditions for a proposed dam site
in the given map.
d) Assessment of the geological conditions for a proposed tunnel
site in the given map.
e) Assessment of the geological conditions for groundwater reserve
in the given map.
7 Borehole problems to interpret subsurface geology 2
Calculation of RQD from the given data and assessment of rock 2
8
quality.

B) Assessment:
⚫ Term Work
Including Laboratory Work and Assignments both, Distribution of marks for Term Work
Shall beas follows:
Laboratory work- : 10 Marks
Assignments- : 10 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks

⚫ End Semester Oral Examination

Oral examination will be based on the entire syllabus.
*****************
Page 31 of 77
 Semester- III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL 303 Architectural Planning & Design of Buildings 01
Lab

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End
Duration of End Total
Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average Sem Exam
Exam
-
- - - - 25 - 25 50

@ For the course ‘Building Design and Drawing, the oral examination shall be conducted in
conjunction with the sketching examination.

Rationale

Drawing is the language of Civil Engineers to communicate. Drawing is one of the most essential
documents as far as civil engineering is concerned. It provides guidance and instructions to
architects, engineers and workmen at field, on how to construct structures according to the figures
and dimensions shown in the drawing. Approved drawings are also essential for the estimation
of cost and materials; as well as a very important contract document.

Course Objectives
1) To remember and recall the intricate details of building design and drawing.
2) To gain an understanding of the basic concepts of building design and drawing.
3) To learn how to apply professional ethics and act responsibly pertaining to the norms of
building design and drawing practices.
4) To identify, analyze, research literate and solve complex building design and
drawing problems.
5) To have new solutions for complex building design and drawing problems.
6) To effectively communicate ideas, related to building design and drawing, both orally as
well as in written format like reports & drawings.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
1) Plan and design of residential and public building by implementing the principles
of planning of buildings, Green building principles, byelaws, regulations and codes
for planning
Page 32 of 77
 2) Preparing various working and detailed drawing of the buildings in CAD.
3) Preparing layouts of various building services.
4) Preparing perspective views for all types of buildings
5) Preparing the reports based on the drawings prepared, if required
Practical:
Students should make all the drawings during the Practical time allotted to them.
1) Drawings (Manually) should be drawn in the allotted Drawing hall only.
2) Drawings (CAD sheets) should be drawn on the Desktop/Laptop in Computational Lab.
After completing the work, Print out of those sheets should be submitted for gradation/Marks.

Assignments:
Two Assignments should be completed, covering all the modules in the syllabus.
1) Assignment-1 should be on 50% of the syllabus, to be completed before Internal
Assessment-I exam.
2) Assignment-2 should be on the remaining 50% of the Syllabus, to be completed before
Internal Assessment-II exam.
Site Visit:
Students should visit any Residential building/Public building physically and take
Measurements inside of all rooms & over all outside of the building & can submit asmalldrawing
sheet with the help of CAD. (Optional only)

Practical Examination (Oraland Sketching)

Practical examination will consist of sketching and oral examination based on the entire syllabus.
Term Work:
Drawings & Assignments:
1) Ground floor plan, first floor plan, elevation, section passing through at least one sanitary
unit & staircase, Site plan, Foundation Plan and details of one FOOTING, Roof Plan
,schedule of opening and construction notes of a residential building(bungalow or
apartment) to be constructed as a (G+1) R.C.C. framed structure ( only Manual Drawing)
2) One-Point Perspective drawingfor any Residential structure( only Manual drawing)
3) Ground floor plan, first floor plan, elevation, section passing through at least one sanitary
unit & staircase, schedule of opening and construction notes of a public
building(Education/Health related ) be constructed as a (G+1) R.C.C. framed structure (
only CAD drawing Sheet)
4) Two-Point perspective drawing for any one public building (only CAD drawing Sheet)
5) Assignment No.- 1
6) Assignment No.- 2

Distribution of Term-work Marks:

Page 33 of 77
The marks of term-work shall be judiciously awarded depending upon the quality of the term work.
The final certification acceptance of term-work warrants the satisfactorily the appropriate
completion of the required quality & quantity of work for the minimum passing marks to be
obtained by the students. Broadly, the split of the marks for term work shall be as given below.
However, there can be further bifurcation in the marks under any of the heads to account for any
sub-head therein.

Particulars Marks
1 Drawing Sheet (Manual) 7.5 Marks
2 Drawing Sheet (CAD Based) 7.5 Marks
3 Assignments 5 Marks
4 Attendance 5 Marks
Total 25 Marks
Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be resorted
to. 75% 80%: 03 Marks; 81% 90%: 04 Marks 91% onwards: 05 Marks (Consider Practical
attendance)
Recommended Books:
• Building Drawing with an Integrated Approach to Built Environment by M. G. Shah, C.
M. Kale, S.Y. Patki(Tata McGraw-Hill Education)
• Civil Engineering Drawing (including Architectural aspect) by M. Chakraborti
(MonojitChakraborti Publications, Kolkata)
• Planning and Designing Buildings by Y. S. Sane (Modern Publication House, Pune)
• Building Drawing and Detailing by B.T.S. Prabhu, K.V. Paul and C. V. Vijayan (SPADES
Publication, Calicut)
• Building Planning by Gurucharan Singh (Standard Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi)
References:
• IS 962: 1989 – Code of Practice for Architectural and Building Drawings.
• National Building Code of India – 2005 (NBC 2005)
• Development Control Regulations for Mumbai Metropolitan Region for 2016 – 2036
(https://mmrda.maharashtra.gov.in)
• Development Control Regulations for Navi Mumbai Municipal Corporation – 1994
(https://www.nmmc.gov.in/development-control-regulations)
• Development Plan and Control Regulation KDMC, https://mmrda.maharashtra.gov.in
Reference Codes:
• National Building Code of India, 2005
• IS 779-1978Specification for water meter
• IS 909-1975 Specification for fire hydrant
• IS 1172-1983 Code of basic requirement for water supply ,drainage & sanitation
• IS 1742-1983 code of practice for building drainage
*****************

Semester- III

Page 34 of 77
 Course Code Course Name Credits
CEL304 Fluid Mechanics – I (Lab) 01

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Duration of Total
Sem End Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average
Exam Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course Objectives:
The students will be able to learn:
1. The basic fluid mechanics concepts
2. Measuring pressure, velocity and discharge of fluid flow through pipes and channels

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learner will be able to:
1. Calculate the metacentric height
2. Verify the Bernoulli’s theorem
3. Determine the discharge coefficients
4. Measure fluid flow using various devices
5. Determine the hydraulic coefficients of an orifice

List of Experiments (Minimum Six)

Module Detailed Contents Lab
Sessions/Hr
1 Determination of the Metacentric height of a floating body 02 hrs
Investigating the validity of the Bernoulli equation applied to a steady 04 hrs
2
flow of water through a tapered duct
3 Determination of coefficient of discharge of Venturimeter. 02 hrs
4 Determination of coefficient of discharge of Orifice meter. 02 hrs
5 Determination of coefficient of discharge of Nozzle meter. 04 hrs
Determination of coefficient of discharge of Notches (Rectangular and 02 hrs
6
Triangular notch).
Determination of coefficient of discharge of weirs (Broad Crested 04 hrs
7
weir and Ogee weir).
To determine the value of coefficient of contraction, coefficient of 04 hrs
8
velocity and coefficient of discharge for the given orifice
9 Determination of coefficient of discharge of mouthpiece. 02 hrs

Assessment:
Page 35 of 77
Term Work
Including Laboratory Work and Assignments both, Distribution of marks for Term Work shall be
as follows:
Laboratory work : 15 Marks
Assignments : 05 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks

End Semester Oral Examination

Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.
Reference Books:
• Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines: R. K. Rajput, S. Chand and Company
• Hydraulics and Fluid mechanics: Dr.P.M. Modi and Dr. S.M. Seth, Standard Book House, Delhi
• Hydraulics Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines: S. Ramamrutham, DhanpatRai Publishing
Company (P) Ltd-New Delhi
• Theory and Application of Fluid Mechanics: K. Subramanian, Tata McGraw hill publishing
company, New Delhi.
• Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics: Dr. S.K. Ukarande, Ane’s Books Pvt. Ltd. (Revised Edition
2012), ISBN 97893 8116 2538
• Fluid Mechanics and fluid pressure engineering: Dr. D.S. Kumar, F.K. Kataria and sons
• Fluid Mechanics: R.K. Bansal Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd.

*****************

Page 36 of 77
 Semester-III

Course Code Course Name Credits

Skill Based Lab Course-I
CEL305 Computer Aided Drafting & Building 1.5
Information Modelling

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 3 - - 1.5 - 1.5

Term Work
Theory
/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Duration of Total
Sem End Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average
Exam Exam
- - - - - 50 - - 50

Objectives:
1. To enable the learners efficiently draft and label buildings components using the concepts
of 2D and 3D drawing and detailing
2. To introduce the concepts of object-based modelling in 3-D environment to learners
3. To enable the learners to work on drawing and drafting softwares so that they can
conveniently understand and design civil engineering components through the softwares.
Outcomes: Learner will be able to…
1. Transfer the plan from a drawing sheet to a 2-D drafting software
2. Visualize the various elements in the software like points, lines, polygons, etc. as objects
of the real world and relate it with civil engineering components.
3. Apply civil engineering concepts to draft efficient civil engineering plans in accordance to
various building bye laws and forms.
4. Conceptualize the space, logistic and statutory constraints in the real world to draw an
efficient plan so that optimization is achieved
5. Attach and retrieve information pertaining to various civil engineering components through
3-D modelling software
6. Demonstrate a virtual walkthrough of buildings
C) List of Experiments (Minimum Eight)
Lab
Module Detailed Contents Sessions/Hr

Listing out the various Computer Aided Drawing and Drafting 03

1 (CADD) tools available for civil engineering projects in the market
and highlighting the capabilities and advantages of each
Basic introduction to compatibilities, utilities and attributes of 03
2 peculiar drafting softwares w.r.t their various commands, features,
capabilities and functions.
3 Line plan of a residential structure using a CADD tool 03
Page 37 of 77
 Developed plan of a residential structure (minimum G+4) using a 06
4
CADD tool
5 Developed plan of a public building using a CADD tool 06
Basic introduction to compatibilities, utilities and attributes of 03
6 peculiar building information modelling (BIM) softwares w.r.t their
various commands, features, capabilities and functions.
7 Creating families and basic models on BIM 06
8 Creating architectural plan on BIM of a G+1 bungalow 03
9 Demonstrating a walkthrough on BIM for clients and presenting it 03
10 Clash detection and removal 03

D) Assessment:
⚫ Term Work
Including Laboratory Work comprising of minimum 6 software generated sheets and one
walkthrough presentation on BIM, distribution of marks for Term Work shall be as
follows:
Laboratory work : 30 Marks (comprising of minimum 6 software generated sheets)
Presentation : 10 Marks (showing 3-D walk through the building)
Attendance : 10 Marks

*****************

Page 38 of 77
 Semester- III

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEM 301 Mini Project -1 A 1.5

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 03 - - 1.5 - 1.5

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Duration of Total
Test- Test- Sem. End Sem. TW PR OR
Average
I II Exam Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50
Objectives
1. To acquaint with the process of identifying the needs and converting it into the problem.
2. To familiarize the process of solving the problem in a group.
3. To acquaint with the process of applying basic engineering fundamentals to attempt
solutions to the problems.
4. To inculcate the process of self-learning and research.

Outcome: Learner will be able to…

1. Identify problems based on societal /research needs.
2. Apply Knowledge and skill to solve societal problems in a group.
3. Develop interpersonal skills to work as member of a group or leader.
4. Draw the proper inferences from available results through theoretical/
experimental/simulations.
5. Analyse the impact of solutions in societal and environmental context for sustainable
development.
6. Use standard norms of engineering practices
7. Excel in written and oral communication.
8. Demonstrate capabilities of self-learning in a group, which leads to life long learning.
9. Demonstrate project management principles during project work.

Guidelines for Mini Project

▪ Students shall form a group of 3 to 4 students, while forming a group shall not be allowed
less than three or more than four students, as it is a group activity.
▪ Students should do survey and identify needs, which shall be converted into problem
statement for mini project in consultation with faculty supervisor/head of
department/internal committee of faculties.
▪ Students hall submit implementation plan in the form of Gantt/PERT/CPM chart, which
will cover weekly activity of mini project.
▪ A log book to be prepared by each group, wherein group can record weekly work progress,
guide/supervisor can verify and record notes/comments.
▪ Faculty supervisor may give inputs to students during mini project activity;however, focus
shall be on self-learning.

Page 39 of 77
 ▪ Students in a group shall understand problem effectively, propose multiple solution and
select best possible solution in consultation with guide/ supervisor.
▪ Students shall convert the best solution into working model using various components of
their domain areas and demonstrate.
▪ The solution to be validated with proper justification and report to be compiled in standard
format of University of Mumbai.
▪ With the focus on the self-learning, innovation, addressing societal problems and
entrepreneurship quality development within the students through the Mini Projects, it is
preferable that a single project of appropriate level and quality to be carried out in two
semesters by all the groups of the students. i.e. Mini Project 1 in semester III and IV.
Similarly, Mini Project 2 in semesters V and VI.
▪ However, based on the individual students or group capability, with the mentor’s
recommendations, if the proposed Mini Project adhering to the qualitative aspects
mentioned above gets completed in odd semester, then that group can be allowed to work
on the extension of the Mini Project with suitable improvements/modifications or a
completely new project idea in even semester. This policy can be adopted on case by case
basis.

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project:

Term Work
▪ The review/ progress monitoring committee shall be constituted by head of departments of
each institute. The progress of mini project to be evaluated on continuous basis, minimum
two reviews in each semester.
▪ In continuous assessment focus shall also be on each individual student, assessment based
on individual’s contribution in group activity, their understanding and response to
questions.
▪ Distribution of Term work marks for both semesters shall be as below;
• Marks awarded by guide/supervisor based on log book : 10
• Marks awarded by review committee : 10
• Quality of Project report : 05
Review/progress monitoring committee may consider following points for
assessment based on either one year or half year project as mentioned in
general guidelines.
One-year project:
• In first semester entire theoretical solution shall be ready, including components/system
selection and cost analysis. Two reviews will be conducted based on presentation given by
students group.
• First shall be for finalisation of problem
• Second shall be on finalisation of proposed solution of problem.
• In second semester expected work shall be procurement of component’s/systems, building
of working prototype, testing and validation of results based on work completed in an
earlier semester.
• First review is based on readiness of building working prototype to be conducted.
• Second review shall be based on poster presentation cum demonstration of working model
in last month of the said semester.
Page 40 of 77
Half-year project:
• In this case in one semester students’ group shall complete project in all aspects including,
o Identification of need/problem
o Proposed final solution
o Procurement of components/systems
o Building prototype and testing
• Two reviews will be conducted for continuous assessment,
o First shall be for finalisation of problem and proposed solution
o Second shall be for implementation and testing of solution.
Assessment criteria of Mini Project.
Mini Project shall be assessed based on following criteria;
1) Quality of survey/ need identification
2) Clarity of Problem definition based on need.
3) Innovativeness in solutions
4) Feasibility of proposed problem solutions and selection of best solution
5) Cost effectiveness
6) Societal impact
7) Innovativeness
8) Cost effectiveness and Societal impact
9) Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements
10) Effective use of skill sets
11) Effective use of standard engineering norms
12) Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader
13) Clarity in written and oral communication
• In one year, project, first semester evaluation may be based on first six criteria’s and remaining
may be used for second semester evaluation of performance of students in mini project.
• In case of half year project all criteria’s in generic may be considered for evaluation of
performance of students in mini project.

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project Practical/Oral Examination:

• Report should be prepared as per the guidelines issued by the University of Mumbai.
• Mini Project shall be assessed through a presentation and demonstration of working model by
the student project group to a panel of Internal and External Examiners preferably from industry
or research organisations having experience of more than five years approved by head of
Institution.
• Students shall be motivated to publish a paper based on the work in Conferences/students
competitions.
Mini Project shall be assessed based on following points;
1) Quality of problem and Clarity
2) Innovativeness in solutions
3) Cost effectiveness and Societal impact
4) Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements
5) Effective use of skill sets
6) Effective use of standard engineering norms
7) Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader
8) Clarity in written and oral communication
*****************

Page 41 of 77
 Second Year Civil Engineering
UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI
(With Effect from 2020-2021)
Semester – IV

Course Teaching Scheme

Course Name Credits Assigned
Code (Contact Hours)
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
CEC401 Engineering Mathematics - IV 3 -- 1 3 - 1 4

CEC402 Structural Analysis 4 -- - 4 - - 4

CEC403 Surveying 3 -- - 3 - - 3
CEC404 Building Materials & Concrete 3 -- - 3 - - 3
Technology
CEC405 Fluid Mechanics-II 3 - - 3 - - 3
CEL 401 Structural Analysis -- 2 - - 1 - 1
CEL 402 Surveying -- 3 - - 1.5 - 1.5
CEL 403 Building Material Concrete -- 2 - - 1 - 1
Technology
CEL 404 Fluid Mechanics-II -- 2 1 1
CEL 405 Skill Based lab Course -- 2 - - 1 - 1
CEM401 Mini Project – 1 B -- 3$ - - 1.5 - 1.5
Total 16 14 1 16 7 1 24

Examination Scheme

Exam
End
Internal Durati
Course Name Sem Term Prac.
Assessment on Total
Course Exam Work /Oral
(Hrs.)-
Code
Test Test Avg
I II .
CEC 401 Engineering Mathematics - IV 20 20 20 80 3 25 - 125
CEC 402 Structural Analysis 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
CEC 403 Surveying 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
CEC 404 Building Materials & 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
Concrete Technology
CEC 405 Fluid Mechanics-II 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
CEL 401 Structural Analysis 25 25 50
CEL 402 Surveying 50 25 75
CEL 403 Building Materials & - - - - - 25 25 50
Concrete Technology
CEL 404 Fluid Mechanics-II - - - - - 25 25 50
CEL 405 Skill Based lab Course - - - - - 50 - 50
CEM401 Mini Project – 1 B - - - - - 25 25 50
Total 100 400 - 225 125 850
Semester- IV
Page 42 of 77
 Course Code Course Name Credits
CEC 401 Engineering Mathematics-IV 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - 01 03 - 01 04

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Duration of
Total
Averag Sem End Sem. TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II
e Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 03 hrs 25 - - 125

Pre-requisite:
• Engineering Mathematics-I,
• Engineering Mathematics-II,
• Engineering Mathematics-III,

Objectives:
1) To study the concept of Vector calculus & its applications in engineering.
2) To study Line and Contour integrals and expansion of complex valued function in a power
series.
3) To familiarize with the concepts of statistics for data analysis.
4) To acquaint with the concepts of probability, random variables with their distributions and
expectations.
5) To familiarize with the concepts of probability distributions and sampling theory with its
applications.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to….

1) Apply the concept of Vector calculus to evaluate line integrals, surface integrals using
Green’s theorem, Stoke’s theorem & Gauss Divergence theorem.
2) Use the concepts of Complex Integration for evaluating integrals, computing residues &
evaluate various contour integrals.
3) Apply the concept of Correlation, Regression and curve fitting to the engineering problems
in data science.
4) Illustrate understanding of the concepts of probability and expectation for getting the
spread of the data and distribution of probabilities.
5) Apply the concept of probability distribution to engineering problems& Testing hypothesis
of small samples using sampling theory
6) Apply the concepts of parametric and nonparametric tests for analysing practical problems.

Page 43 of 77
Module Detailed Contents Hrs.
Module : Vector Calculus
1.1 Solenoidal and irrotational (conservative) vector fields.
1.2 Line integrals – definition and problems. 07
1.3 Green’s theorem (without proof) in a plane, Stokes’ theorem (without Proof),
01 Gauss’ Divergence theorem (without proof) and problems (only evaluation).

Self Learning Topics: Identities connecting Gradient, Divergence and Curl, Angle
between surfaces. Verifications of Green’s theorem, Stoke’s theorem & Gauss-
Divergence theorem, related identities & deductions.
Module: Complex Integration
2.1 Line Integral, Cauchy’s Integral theorem for simple connected and multiply
connected regions (without proof), Cauchy’s Integral formula (without proof).
2.2 Taylor’s and Laurent’s series (without proof). 07
02
2.3 Definition of Singularity, Zeroes, poles of f(z), Residues, Cauchy’s Residue Theorem
(without proof)

Self-learning Topics: Application of Residue Theorem to evaluate real integrations.

Module: Statistical Techniques
3.1 Karl Pearson’s Coefficient of correlation (r) and related concepts with problems
3.2 Spearman’s Rank correlation coefficient (R) ( Repeated & non repeated ranks
problems)
03
3.3 Lines of regression 06
3.4 Fitting of first and second degree curves.

Self-learning Topics: Covariance, fitting of exponential curve.

Module: Probability Theory:
4.1 Conditional probability, Total Probability and Baye’s Theorem.
4.2 Discrete and Continuous random variables, Probability mass and density function, 06
Probability distribution for random variables,
04 4.3 Expectation, Variance, Co-variance, moments, Moment generating functions,
(Four moments about the origin &about the mean).

Self- learning Topics: Properties variance and covariance,

Module: Probability Distribution and Sampling Theory-I

5.1 Probability Distribution: Poisson and Normal distribution
5.2 Sampling distribution, Test of Hypothesis, Level of Significance, Critical 07
region, One-tailed, and two-tailed test, Degree of freedom.
05 5.3 Students’ t-distribution (Small sample). Test the significance of single sample mean
and two independent sample means and paired t- test)

Self -learning Topics: Test of significance of large samples, Proportion test, Survey
based project.
Module: Sampling theory-II 06
6.1 Chi-square test: Test of goodness of fit and independence of attributes (Contingency
table) including Yate’s Correction.
6.2 Analysis of variance: F-test (significant difference between variances of two
06
samples)

Self- learning Topics: ANOVA: One way classification, Two-way classification (short-
cut method).
Page 44 of 77
Term Work:
General Instructions:
1) Batch wise tutorials are to be conducted. The number of students per batch should be as
per University pattern for practical.
2) Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on entire syllabus.
3) A group of 4-6 students should be assigned a self-learning topic. Students should prepare
a presentation/problem solving of 10-15 minutes. This should be considered as mini project
in Engineering mathematics. This project should be graded for 10 marks depending on the
performance of the students.

The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows –

1 Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks
2 Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks
3 Mini project 10 marks

Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on
approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40%
but excluding contents covered in Test I). Duration of each test shall be one hour.
End Semester Examination: Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be
proportional to number of respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
• Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks
• Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
• Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module
3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
• Only Four questions need to be solved.

References:
1. Higher Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, Khanna Publication
2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Limited,
3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S. R. K. Iyengar, Narosa publication,
4. Vector Analysis, Murray R. Spiegel, Schaum Series
5. Complex Variables and Applications, Brown and Churchill, McGraw-Hilleducation
6. Probability Statistics and Random Processes, T. Veerarajan, Mc. GrawHilleducation.

*****************

Page 45 of 77
 Semester-IV
Course Code Course Name Credits
CEC402 Structural Analysis 4
Contact Hours Credits Assigned
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4
Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Duration of Total
Test- Sem. End Sem. TW PR OR
Test-I Average
II Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 3 hrs - - - 100

Rationale

Different components of civil engineering structures are subjected to variousforce systems and
their combinations. For designing the components, these are analyzed for their response. The
structural systems are determinate or indeterminate in nature and so there are different analysis
methods.These will be learnt in this course. Subject knowledge of Engineering Mechanics and
Mechanics of solids is the prerequisite of this course.
Their application on solids and mechanisms, the action of force systems is studied and further
extended in this subject. Learner will learn to apply these to the analysis of various members of
structural systems such as beams, trusses, portal frames and arches. These analyses will further be
used while designing of Steel and RCC structures.

Objectives

1. To analyze for axial force in the Coplanar, perfect trusses and analysis of 3- Hinged arches.
2. To study the concept of Influence Line Diagrams for Reactions, SF and B M in beams and
axial forces in trusses and their application for rolling load systems.
3. To learn methods for evaluating rotation and displacement parameters in respect of frames
andtrusses using various methods. To understand static and kinematic indeterminacy of
structures.
4. To analyze the indeterminate structures using Flexibility methods and Using Clapeyron’s
Theorem..
5. To analyze the indeterminate structures such as beams & simple rigid jointed framesusing
direct stiffness method.
6. To analyze the indeterminate structures using Moment Distribution as Stiffness method
and Plastic analysis of structures.

Page 46 of 77
Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Modules / Contents Duration
Trusses and 3 hinged Arches (9)
1. Trusses: Analysis of Perfect Coplanar Trusses by Method of Joints (3) 6
1 Analysis of Perfect Coplanar Trusses by Method of sections.(3)
Three hinged elastic arches, Determination of normal thrust, radial 3
1
1. shear and bending moment for Symmetrical & Unsymmetrical parabolic
2 three hinged arches.(3)

Influence line diagrams and rolling loads (09)

Influence lines for Reactions, shear force and bending moment at a 6
section of cantilever, simply supported, overhanging beams without
internal hinges. (2)
2.
Rolling loads, Determination of S F and BM at a section, Value and
2 1
criteria for maximum shear force and bending moment, absolute
maximum shear force and bending moment under rolling loads (UDL
and series of point loads) for simply supported girder. (4)
2. I L D for Axial forces in members of Pin jointed trusses (3) 3
2
Determinate and Indeterminate structures (8)
Deflection of Statically determinate structures, methods based on energy 5
principles and Castigliano’s theorems to evaluate deflection in portal
3.
frames, bent up and arch type structures. Application of Unit Load
1
Method for calculating slope and deflection of a point on rigid jointed
3 frames and deflection of a point on Pin jointed truss.
Static and kinematic indeterminacies: Types of structures occurring in 3
practice, their classification, linear and non-linear behavior of
3.
materials, geometric non-linearity, static and kinematic determinacy and
2
indeterminacy of structure.

Analysis of indeterminate structures by Flexibility method (9)

Analysis of fixed beam. Application of Clapeyron’s theorem of three 4
4.1
moments to fixed beam and continuous beam.
4
Flexibility coefficients and their use in formulation of compatibility 5
4.2 equations. Application of flexibility method to propped cantilevers,
fixed beams & continuous beams, Simple rigid jointed frames.
Analysis of indeterminate structures by Stiffness method (8)
Direct stiffness method: 4
5.1 Stiffness coefficients for prismatic members and their use for
5
formulation of equilibrium equations.
Application of Direct stiffness method to indeterminate beams & simple 4
5.2
rigid jointed frames.
6 Moment distribution method and Plastic Analysis of structures. (9)

Page 47 of 77
 Moment distribution method: 5
Application to indeterminate beams & simple rigid jointed frames &
6.1
frame with inclined member but having only single translation degree of
freedom including the effect of support settlement.
Plastic analysis of structures: Introduction to plastic analysis, concept 4
of plastic hinge, plastic moment carrying capacity, shape factor. Static
6.2
and kinematic method of plastic analysis.Determination of collapse load
for single and multiple span beams.

Contribution to Outcome

On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1. Calculate axial forces in the Coplanartrusses by using Method of joints and method of
sections and also calculate radial shear, normal thrust and bending moment in parabolic 3-
Hinged arches.
2. Draw Influence Line Diagrams for axial forces in trusses, Reactions, SF and B M in beams
and find their values when rolling loads are passing over them..
3. Evaluate rotation and displacement at a joint of frames and deflection at any joint of truss
and will be able to compute static and kinematic indeterminacy of structure.
4. Apply Flexibility methods and make use of Clapeyron’s Theorem to analyze the
indeterminate structures.
5. Analyse the indeterminate structures such as beams & simple rigid jointed frames using
direct stiffness method.
6. Analyse the indeterminate structures using Moment Distribution as Stiffness method and
make plastic analysis.

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination (80 Marks):

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1) Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2) Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3) Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module
3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4) Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1. Basic Structural Analysis: C.S. Reddy, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi.
2. Mechanics of Structures: Vol-I: S. B. Junnarkar and H.J. Shah, Charotar Publishers, Anand.
3. Analysis of Structures: Vol. I and II, Vazirani and Ratwani
Page 48 of 77
 4. Strength of Materials: S. Ramamrutham, Dhanpatrai and Publishers, Delhi
5. Theory of Structures: S. Ramamrutham, Dhanpatrai and Sons, Delhi
6. Structural Analysis I: HemantPatil, YogeshPatil, Jignesh Patel, Synergy Knowledgeware,
Mumbai.
7. Strength of Materials: Rajput, S. Chand Publications, Delhi
8. Structural Analysis: Bhavikatti, Vikas publisher house Pvt, ltd.
9. Structural Analysis: DevdasMenon, Narosa Publishing House.
10. Basic Structural Analysis: K.U. Muthu, Azmi Ibrahim, M. Vijyanand,
11. MagantiJanadharnand. I.K.International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
12. Comprehensive Structural Analysis: Vol-I and II by Vaidyanathan R. and Perumal
R.LaxmiPublications.
13. Elementary Structural Analysis: Jindal
14. Structural Analysis: L.S. Negi and R.S. Jangid, Tata Mc-Graw Hill India
15. Fundamentals of Structural Analysis: Sujit Kumar Roy and SubrotaChakrabarty, S. Chand
Publications.
16. Structural Analysis: T.S. Thandavamoorthy, Oxford University Press.
17. Structural Analysis: Manmohan Das, Bharghab Mohan Pentice Hall International. .

Reference Books:
1. Structural Analysis: Hibbler, Pentice Hall International.
2. Structural Analysis: Chajes, ElBS London.
3. Theory of Structures: Timoshenko and Young, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi.
4. Structural Analysis: Kassimali, TWS Publications.
5. Element of Structural Analysis: Norris and Wilbur, McGraw Hill.
6. Structural Analysis: Laursen H.I, McGraw Hill Publishing Co.
7. Structural theorem and their application: B.G. Neal, Pergaman Press.
8. Fundamentals of Structural Analysis: K.M. Leet, C.M. Uang and A.M. Gilbert, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
9. Elementary theory of Structures: Hseih, Prentice Hall

*****************

Page 49 of 77
 Semester- IV

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC403 Surveying 03

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorials Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Duration of
Total
Sem. End Sem. TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average
Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 03 hrs - - - 100

Rationale

As it is always said “well begun is half done”. All civil engineering projects such as buildings,
roads, bridges, railways, airports, dams, water treatment plants, sewage treatment plants begin
with surveying. Knowledge of surveying is thus fundamental and very useful to all civil
engineers. In this course, the students are well informed about the principles and methods of
surveying. The students are made conversant with various instruments which are used in the field
to take measurements for preparation of drawings. The course introduces the advancements in
instruments and methods of surveying. The study deals with the methods of computing land
areas and volume of earthworks. The course also covers horizontal and vertical curves.

Objectives

The students will be able to learn:

1. The basic principles and classification of surveying.

2. Various methods of measurements in surveying.
3. The appropriate techniques of surveying and skills of collecting field data for preparing
drawings.
4. Advancements in instruments and methods of surveying.
5. The methods of computing areas and volumes using the site specific data for various
purposes.
6. The setting out techniques of curves.

Detailed Syllabus
Page 50 of 77
Module Course Modules/ Contents Periods
Introduction 5
1.1 Definition, principles, objectives, fundamental classification-plane and
geodetic.
1.2 Chaining, Ranging and offsetting: Definitions, Principles, Instruments
1 required, Obstacles, conventional signs and symbols.
1.3 Bearings – Different types, compass – prismatic, surveyor,
dip,declination and local attraction, compass traversing
Levelling and Contouring 8
2.1 Definitions, basic terms, types of instruments-dumpy level and Auto
level, principal axes of dumpy level, temporary and permanent
adjustments
2.2 Booking and reduction of levels, plane of collimation (HI) and rise-fall
methods, computation of missing data, distance to the visible
horizon,corrections due to curvature and refraction, reciprocal
2 levelling, Numerical problems
2.3 Differential levelling, profile levelling, fly levelling, check levelling,
precise levelling, sources of errors,difficulties in levelling work,
corrections and precautions work in levelling
2.4 Contouring: terms, contour, contouring, contour interval, horizontal
equivalent Direct and indirect methods of contouring, interpolation of
contours, uses of Contours and characteristics of contour lines.
Grade contour
Theodolite Surveying 8
3.1 Various parts and axes of transit, technical terms, temporary and
permanent adjustments of a transit, measurement of horizontal and
vertical angles, Methods of repetition and reiteration.
3.2 Different methods of running a theodolite traverse, Latitudes and
departures,rectangular coordinates,traverse adjustments by Bowditch’s,
3 transit and Modified transit rules, Gales Traverse Table, Numerical
Problems.
3.3 Miscellaneous use of theodolite for various works such as prolongation
of a straight line,setting out an angle, bearing measurements.Omitted
measurements, Problems in using theodolite traversing, errors in
theodolite traversing.
Indirect and Advanced Methods of Measurement 7
4.1 Tacheometry-Principle, Objective, Suitability and different methods of
tacheometry, Stadia formula, Radial contouring , numerical on stadia
4 method only
4.2 Electronic Distance Measurement: Working Principles, types,
applications in surveying
Total Station- Working Principles, applications in surveying
4.3 Introduction to GPS
Plane Table Surveying, Areas and Volumes 5
Page 51 of 77
 5.1 Definition, principle, accessories required for plane table surveying,
merits and demerits, temporary adjustments, Different methods of plane
table surveying
5 5.2 Areas: Area of an irregular figure by trapezoidal rule, average ordinate
rule,Simpson’s 1/3 rule, various coordinate methods.Planimeter: types
including digital planimeter, area of zero circle, uses of planimeter.
5.3 Volumes: Computation of volume by trapezoidal and prismoidal
formula,volume from spot levels, volume from contour plans.
Curves 6
Horizontal Curves-Definitions of different terms, necessity and types of
6.1 curves.Methods of setting out Simple circular curves- linear methods
and Angular methods (Numericals on simple circular curves only)
6 6.2 Vertical curves– Definitions, geometry and types. Tangent correction
and chord gradient methods.
Total 39

Contribution to Outcomes

After completion of the course, the learner will be able to:

1. 1.Apply the principles of surveying and field procedures to conduct the various surveys
2. Use various methods for taking linear and angular measurements
3. Collect, record and analyse the field data for preparing drawings.
4. Explain the advancements in instruments and methods
5. 5.Calculate the area of land and volume of earthwork
6. Set out curves

Internal Assessment (20 marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests:
First test based on approximately 40% of the contents and second test based on remaining
contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test Ⅰ)

End Semester Examination (80 marks):

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of

respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum
1. The question paper will consist of six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Question 1 will be compulsoryand should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature( for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module
3 then part (b) will be from any other module other than module 3 )
4. OnlyFour questions need to be solved.
Recommended Books:
1. Surveying and Levelling: R. Agor, Vol. -I, 11th Edition, Khanna Publishers
(ISBN8174092358)

Page 52 of 77
 2. Surveying and Levelling:Kanetkar and Kulkarni, Vol. -I, 24th Edition, Pune Vidyarthi
Griha, Pune. (ISBN 8185825114)
3. Surveying and Levelling:Dr. B.C. Punmia, Vol.-I, 16th Edition, Vol. -II 4th Edition, Laxmi
Publications (ISBN9788170088530)
4. Surveying and Levelling: N NBasak, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. (ISBN
9789332901537)

Reference Books:

1. Surveying: Volume -I: Dr K.R. Arora, Standard Book House.

2. Surveying and Levelling (2nd Edition): R. Subramanian; Oxford Higher Education.
3. Surveying and Levelling (Vol.-I): S.K. Duggal, Tata McGraw Hill
4. Textbook of Surveying, C Venkatramaiah, University Press, Hyderabad, Latest Edition
5. Fundamentals of Surveying, S.K. Roy, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi
6. Surveying for Engineers, John Uraine and Bill Price, Palgrave Macmillan
7. Surveying: Theory and Practice, James Anderson, Edward M. Mikhail, Tata Mcgraw Hill
*****************

Page 53 of 77
 Semester - IV

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC 404 Building Materials & Concrete Technology 03

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - 03 - - 03

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Duration of Total
Sem End Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average
Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 03 Hrs -- -- --- 100

Rationale

Materials are essential elements, constituent parts (or) substances which are used to raise a
building, but materials could not be turned into structures without a method of construction. This
course provides necessary knowledge about properties, uses of different types of building materials
and the selection of materials, its mix proportioning, mixing, placing, compacting and curing. This
course is intended for gaining useful knowledge with respect to facts, concepts, principles and
procedures related to building materials and concrete technology so that student can effectively
execute quality control during building construction work.
Objectives

1. To identify the good and significant materials to be used for the construction work and
their associated quality, durability, warrantees, and availability.
2. To study the manufacturing process, properties and use of different types of building
materials like stone, brick, glass, timber and the materials such as paints and varnishes
used for the treatment of surfaces so as to achieve good knowledge about the building
materials.
3. To acquire a thorough knowledge about the properties and significance of different
materials used for the manufacturing of concrete.
4. To study the properties, test conducted and significance of concrete in terms of properties
of fresh and hardened concrete.
5. To understand the concept and optimization of mix design of concrete for different
exposure conditions.
6. To enable the students to understand the mechanized and precise procedure of concrete
production in Ready Mix Plants. To understand the basic non-destructive tests conducted
on concrete to check the in place strength and durability of concrete.

Page 54 of 77
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Modules / Contents Periods

Introduction to building materials and concrete: 03
Introduction to building materials: Introduction, role of
1 1.1
materials in construction, classification of materials, economical
and durable materials.
1.2 Introduction to concrete: History of concrete, necessity,
limitations, merits and demerits.
Building Materials:
Stones: Classification and properties of building stones, relation
2.1
to their structural requirements, quarrying, dressing, seasoning and
preservative treatments.
Bricks and blocks: Burnt clay bricks: raw materials,
manufacturing processes, classification, properties, defects, tests
2.2 09
as per BIS codes. Bricks for special use: refractory bricks.
Concrete blocks, Paver block, Autoclaved Aerated Concrete
2 (AAC) blocks, Cellular Light Weight Concrete (CLC) blocks and
ceramic tiles: raw materials, manufacturing process and properties.
2.3 Glass: Properties, types, uses.
Timber: Types of natural wood and artificial wood, preservative
2.4 treatments, defects in timber, wood products and wood
composites.
2.5 Damp proofing, water proofing materials and Termite proofing.
2.6 Mortar: Types, ingredients, proportions and suitability.
2.7 Paints, Enamels and Varnishes: Composition.
Painting on: plastered surfaces, wood surfaces, meta l surfaces.
Effect of weather on: Enamels, distemper, white wash and colour
wash, varnish, French polish, Wax Polish.
2.8 Miscellaneous Materials: Gypsum, Plaster of Paris, Heat and
sound insulating materials.
Constituent of Concrete:
Fine and Coarse Aggregates: Classification, physical and
3.1 mechanical propertiesand their influence on the properties of
concrete, gradation, Alkali aggregate reaction. Properties of
3 09
manufacturing sand.
Cement (OPC): Grades, Manufacturing, Chemical composition,
3.2 Hydration of cement, Physical properties as per BIS code. Effects
of chemical constituents on the properties of cement.
Different types of cement: Chemical composition, properties as per
relevant IS codes and their applications.
3.3 Water: Desiredquality of water for concrete.
3.4 Lime:Types and their usages.
3.5 Admixtures: Definition and purposes, types of mineral and
Page 55 of 77
 chemical admixtures. Test on admixtures: chemistry and
compatibility with concrete.
Concrete:
4.1 Grades, manufacturing process, preparation of batch report, Duff
Abram’s W/C ratio law & its significance.
06
Properties of fresh and hardened concrete, factors affecting of
4 4.2
workability, vibration of concrete, Types of vibrators: Internal,
external, surface and table vibrators.
Durability: factors affecting durability, relation between durability
4.3
and permeability, laboratory tests on durability such as Permeability
test, Rapid chloride penetration test (RCPT).
Concrete Mix Design:
Definition and objectives, Types of mix as per IS:456, Mix design
5 5.1
for compressive strength and flexural strength in accordance with IS 08
10262 and IS 456.
Methods of Curing of concrete, Methods of determining
compressive Strength of accelerated-cured concrete test specimens
5.2
as per IS 9013, Calculation of ingredients of concrete for batching
as per concrete mix proportions for different grades.
Concreting Methods and Test
Ready Mixed Concrete: Advantages of RMC, Components and
6 6.1 04
Lay-out of RMC plant. Distribution and Transport, Handling and
Placing. Codes recommendations.
6.2 Non-Destructive Testing: Need, application and limitation,
Schmidt Rebound hammer test, Ultrasonic Pulse Velocity test.

Contribution to Outcome

On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1. To develop and implement the conceptual knowledge of building materials in the
construction industry.
2. Assess the properties of building stones and their classifications. Understand the concept
of various methods of manufacturing of bricks and different types of concrete blocks.
3. To expose students to various quality control aspects of civil engineering materials by
performing different lab tests on materials.
4. Identify the ingredients and properties of fresh and hardened concrete.
5. To interpret and design concrete mix for various grades for various exposure conditions.
6. To study the new technology for manufacturing, testing and quality of concrete.

Page 56 of 77
Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests

First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I).

End Semester Examination (80 Marks):

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks
2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module3)
4. Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1. A Building Construction: S.C. Rangwala, Charotar Publications, Gujarat, India.
2. Building Construction: S.P. Arora, Dr.S.P. Bindra,DhanpatRai Publication, New Delhi.
3. Building Construction: Dr. B.C. Punmia, A.K.Jain, A.R.Jain,Laxmi Publication., New Delhi.
4. Concrete Technology Theory and Practice: M.S. Shetty, S.Chand Publication.
5. Concrete Technology: M.L. Gambhir, Tata McGraw Hill, NewDelhi.
6. Concrete Technology: A.M. Neville & J. J. Brooks., ELBS-Longman.
7. Concrete Technology: A.M. Neville & Isaac Pitman, London.
8. Concrete Technology: A. R. Shanthakumar, Oxford University Press.
9. Materials of Construction: D. N. Ghose, Tata McGraw Hill, Delhi.
10. Building Materials: S.K. Duggal, New Age International Publishers.
11. Concrete Technology: D. F. Orchardi, Wiley, 1962.
12. Relevant codes: BIS, ACI & BS.

Reference Books/Reference Materials:

1. Engineering Materials: S.R. Rangwala,Charotar Publications.
2. Architectural Materials science: D. Anapetor, Mir Publishers.
3. Introduction to Engineering Materials: B. K. Agrawal, Tata McGraw Hill, NewDelhi.
4. Engineering Materials: P. Surendra Singh, Vani Education Books,New Delhi.
5. Building Materials (Products, Properties and Systems): M.L. Gambhir and
NehaJamwal,McGraw Hill Publications.
6. Properties of concrete: Neville, Isaac Pitman, London.
7. NPTEL Lecture series on Building Materials and Concrete Technology.
**************

Semester- IV

Page 57 of 77
 Course Code Course Name Credits
CEC405 Fluid Mechanics - II 03

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Duration of Total
Sem End Sem. TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average
Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 03 hrs - - - 100

Rationale

The course introduces the fluid flow science, problems and their applications in varied conditions.
The study deals with the characteristics of fluid flow in pipes namely compressible, laminar and
turbulent with their applications in detail.
Objectives

The students will be able to learn:

1. The knowledge of closed conduit flows, determine various losses through pipes, Pipe
network and Water hammer effect
2. Theory of Laminar flow and Turbulent flow,
3. Understand the concept of Boundary Layer theory, flow separation and forces around
submerged bodies
4. Application of moment of momentum principle on pipe bends and sprinklers
5. The importance of dimensionless numbers, dimensional analysis and similarities.
Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Modules / Contents Periods

Flow through pipes 14

Flow through pipes:

Loss of head through pipes, Darcy-Weisbach equation, Major and

1.1 minor losses. Hydraulic gradient line and Total energy gradient line,
pipes in series,equivalent pipes, pipes in parallel, flow through laterals,
1 flow through Branched pipes, three reservoir problem, siphon.
Pipe network and water hammer:
1.2 Hardy cross method, water hammer in Pipes-Gradual closure and
instantaneous closure of valve control measures

Page 58 of 77
 Flow through nozzles:
1.3 Power transmitted through nozzle, condition for maximum power
transmitted,diameter of nozzle for maximum transmission of power
Laminar Flow 05
2 Reynolds experiment, critical velocity, laminar flow through circular pipes,
flow between two parallel plates: stationary and moving.
Turbulent Flow 04

Causes of turbulence, shear stress in turbulent flow, Reynolds’s stresses,

3 Prandtl’s mixing length Theory, Hydro dynamically smooth and rough
boundaries, velocity distribution in smooth and rough pipes, Karman-
Prandtl’s velocity distribution equation.
Boundary Layer Theory 07

Development of boundary layer over flat surfaces. Boundary layer thickness,

4 energy thickness and momentum thickness, Boundary layer separation and
control. Introduction to flow around submerged body, drag and lift, terminal
velocity of body, Magnus Effect.
Dynamics of Fluid Flow 04
5 Momentum principle, Moment of momentum principle (applications: Pipe
bends and sprinklers).
Dimensional Analysis 05

Dimensional homogeneity, Buckingham’s π theorem, Rayleigh’s method,

6 dimensionless numbers and their significance, Model (or similarity) laws,
application of model laws: Reynolds’s model law, Froude’s model law,
Euler’s Model law, Weber’s Model law, Mach model law, scale effect in
models.
Total 39

Contribution to Outcome

Upon completion of the course, students shall have ability to:

1. Analyze flow through pipes, various losses through pipes, pipe network and power
transmission through nozzle
2. Explain the concept of Laminar flow and velocity distribution through parallel plates and
pipes
3. Explain the concept of Turbulent flow and velocity distribution in pipes
4. Describe boundary layer concept , boundary layer separation and flow around submerged
bodies
5. Apply Moment of Momentum Principle

Page 59 of 77
 6. Explain the importance of dimensionless numbers, dimensional analysis and similarity
behavior of model and prototype

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests:
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remainingcontents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination (80 Marks):

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four questions need to be solved.
Recommended Books:
1. Hydraulics and Fluid mechanics: Dr P.M. Modi and Dr. S.M. Seth, Standard book House,
Delhi
2. Theory and Application of Fluid Mechanics: K. Subramanya, Tata McGraw hill publishing
company
3. Fluid Mechanics: Dr. A.K Jain, Khanna Publishers.
4. Fluid Mechanics and fluid pressure engineering: Dr. D.S. Kumar, F.K. Kataria and sons
5. Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics: Dr. S. K. Ukarande, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd. (Revised
Edition, 2012), ISBN97893 8116 2538
6. Fluid Mechanics: R.K. Bansal Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd.
7. Fluid Mechanics and Machinery: C.S.P.Ojha, R. Berndtsson and P.N. Chandramouli.
Oxford HigherEducation.
Reference Books:
1. Fluid Mechanics: Frank M. White, Tata Mc-Graw-Hill International edition.
2. Fluid Mechanics: Streeter White Bed ford, Tata McGraw International edition.
3. Fluid Mechanics with engineering applications: R.L. Daugherty, J.B.Franzini,
E.J.,Finnemore, TataMcGraw Hill New Delhi.
4. Hydraulics: James F. Cruise, Vijay P. Singh and Mohsen M. Sherif, CENGAGE Learning
India Pvt. Ltd.,Delhi.
*****************

Page 60 of 77
 Semester- IV

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL401 Structural Analysis Tutorial 01
Contact Hours Credits Assigned
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Total
Duration of End
Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average Sem Exam
Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Objectives:
1. To analyse for axial force in the Coplanar, perfect trusses and analysis of 3- Hinged arches.
2. To study the concept of Influence Line Diagrams and rolling loads.
3. To learn methods for evaluating rotation and displacement of frames and trusses.
4. To analyse the indeterminate structures using Flexibility methods and Stiffness methods.
5. To understand Plastic analysis.
Outcomes:
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Calculate axial forces in the Coplanar trusses by using Method of joints and method of
sections and also calculate radial shear, normal thrust and bending moment in parabolic 3-
Hinged arches.
2. Draw Influence Line Diagrams for axial forces in trusses, Reactions, SF and B M in beams
and find their values when rolling loads are passing over them..
3. Evaluate rotation and displacement at a joint of frames and deflection at any joint of truss and
will be able to compute static and kinematic indeterminacy of structure.
4. Analyse the indeterminate structures such as beams & simple rigid jointed frames using
Flexibility methods and direct stiffness method.

List of Tutorials and Assignments

Week Content Hours
(Activity)
1st week Analysis of Trusses and Three hinged elastic arches 2
(Tutorial) (Numericals based on this Module will be solved in tutorial room.)

Page 61 of 77
2nd week 1) Analysis of Trusses and Three hinged elastic arches 2
(Assignments) 2) Solve set of questions given by the course instructor or
3) Write a report on use of arches in civil engineering or
4) Difference in behaviour of trusses and arches if used in bridges
or
5) Write a report on limitations of trusses /arches or
6) Report Famous Truss structures / arch structures in world or
7) 6 Write a report on use of trusses in Civil Engineering
rd
3 week Influence line diagrams and rolling loads 2
(Tutorial) (Numericals based on this Module will be solved in tutorial room.)
th
4 week Influence line diagrams and rolling loads 2
(Assignments) 1) Solve set of questions given by the course instructor or
2) Write a report on use of arches in civil engineering or
3) Design an experiment for ILD of reactions of beam. or
4) Design an experiment for ILD of axial forces of a multi-bay
truss. or
5) write a report on IRC and classes of rolling loads
th
5 week Determinate and Indeterminate structure 2
(Tutorial) (Numericals based on this Module will be solved in tutorial room.)
6 th week Determinate and Indeterminate structure 2
(Assignments) 1) Solve set of questions given by the course instructor or
2) Prepare a chart explaining static and kinematic indeterminacy or
3) Write a computer program in C++ or MS-excel or similar for
ILD of reactions. or
4) Write a computer program in C++ or MS-excel or similar for
ILD for axial forces in Truss members.
th
7 week Analysis of indeterminate structures by Flexibility method 2
(Tutorial) (Numerical based on this Module will be solved in tutorial room.)
8th week Analysis of indeterminate structures by Flexibility method 2
(Assignments) 1) Solve set of questions given by the course instructor or
2) Prepare a poster on Flexibility and Stiffness approach or
3) Solve a set of 4-5 questions given by the course instructor on
Flexibility methods and validate the same using relevant
Structural Analysis or design software.

9th week Analysis of indeterminate structures by Direct stiffness method 2

(Tutorial) (Numericals based on this Module will be solved in tutorial room).
10th week Analysis of indeterminate structures by Direct stiffness method 2
(Assignments) 1) Solve set of questions given by the course instructor or
2) Write a report on Stiffness methods in civil engineering or
3) Prepare a poster on Clapeyron’s theorem for continuous beam.or
4) Solve a set of 4-5 questions given by the course instructor on
Direct stiffness method and validate the same using relevant
Structural Analysis or design software.

Page 62 of 77
 11th week Moment distribution method, Plastic analysis of structures 2
(Tutorial) (Numerical based on this Module will be solved in tutorial room.)
12th week Moment distribution method, Plastic analysis of structures 2
1) Solve set of questions given by the course instructor or
(Assignments) 2) Write a report on Plastic analysis of structures or
3) Solve a set of 4-5 questions given by the course instructor on
Moment distribution method and validate the same using
relevant Structural Analysis or design software.
th
13 week Viva-Voce Examination 2

• Assessment:

Term Work: Term work will include Tutorial work and Assignments both, Distribution of marks
for Term Work shall be as follows:
Tutorial work- : 15 Marks
Assignments- : 10 Marks
Total Term work : 25 Marks
Attendance : Apply multiplying Factor 0.5 to 1.0 to the above total.

End Semester Oral Examination

Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

*****************

Page 63 of 77
 Semester- IV

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL402 Surveying(Lab) 1.5

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 03 - - 1.5 - 1.5

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Total
Duration of
Test- Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Average End Sem Exam
II Exam
- - - - - 50 - 25 75
@ For the course “Surveying (Lab)” the oral examination shall be conducted in conjunction with
the practical conduction.

Course Objectives:

The students will be able to learn:

1) Various surveying instruments, their least counts, various parts and suitable uses.
2) Methods of measurements in the field.
3) Skills for collecting, recording and analysing the field data.
4) Advanced instruments and methods.
5) First hand practical experience by receiving field exposure to collect site specific data.
6) Setting out techniques.

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, learner will be able to:

1) Operate and use the surveying instruments according to the accuracy and suitability.
2) Measure linear and angular dimensions in horizontal and vertical planes.
3) Collect, record and analyse the field data systematically.
4) Prepare plans of the existing features on the ground, sections and contours.
5) Compute the area of land and the volume of earthwork.
6) Set out curves and foundation plans.

Page 64 of 77
List of practical’s and projects:

Perform minimum six practical’s out of 01 to 10 and all the projects are mandatory
Modul Detailed Contents Lab
e Sessions/Hr

1 Chain and cross staff surveying. 03 hrs

Measuring bearings of a closed traverse with prismatic compass 03 hrs
2
and computation of interior angles.
3 Simple and compound levelling 03 hrs
4 Measurement of horizontal and vertical angles. 03 hrs
5 Finding constants, heights and distances using tachometry. 03 hrs
6 Measurement of distances, bearings and area using total station. 03 hrs
7 Plane Table Surveying by intersection method. 03 hrs
Find an area of irregular figure using a conventional planimeter 03 hrs
8
and verify it using a digital planimeter.
9 Setting out a simple curve by Rankine’s method. 03 hrs
10 Setting out a simple foundation plan. 03 hrs
Projects
A survey camp of three days is to be arranged to execute the following projects for undergoing
the students through practical instructions in civil engineer's career with the actual field
exposure at an ideal site location .
Project I: Road project using Auto level for a minimum length of 500 m including
fixing of alignment, profile levelling, cross-sectioning at 20m interval,, plotting of ‘L’
1
section and ‘C’ section. (Two full imperial sheets, the first sheet with key plan and
‘L’ section and the second sheet covering any three typical Cross-sections)
Project II: Block Contouring project using Auto level for minimum 60 m × 60 m
2
area and generating contours by MS Excel. (Take contour interval as 0.2 meter)
Project III:Tachometric contouring project on a hilly area with at least two
3 instrument stations about 60 m to 100 m apart and generating contours by taking
contour intervals as 1 meter.
Assessment:

Teamwork
Including above practical work, projects and assignments, distribution of marks for Term Work
shall be as follows:
Practical Work- : 15 marks
Assignments - : 05 marks
Attendance- : 05 marks
Projects-
Field work : 15marks
Office work (Drawings) : 10marks
Total : 50marks

Page 65 of 77
● End Semester Practical/ Oral Examination

Practical Examination : 10 Marks

Oral Examination : 15 Marks.

Oral examination will be conducted after conduction of practical examination & it will be
based on term work & Practical examination

Reference Books:
1) Surveying and Levelling : R. Agor, Vol-I, 11th Edition, Khanna Publishers (ISBN 8174092358)
2) Surveying and Levelling :Kanetkar and Kulkarni,Vol-I, 24th Edition, Pune
VidyarthiGriha, Pune. (ISBN 8185825114)
3) Surveying and Levelling : Dr. B.C. Punmia, Vol.-I, 16th Edition, Vol -II 4th Edition,
Laxmi Publications (ISBN9788170088530)
4) Surveying and Levelling: N NBasak, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. (ISBN
9789332901537)
5) Surveying: Vol-I: Dr K.R. Arora, Standard Book House.
6) Surveying and Levelling (2nd Edition): R. Subramanian; Oxford Higher Education.
7) Surveying and Levelling (Vol.-I): S.K. Duggal, Tata Mc-Graw Hill
*****************

Page 66 of 77
 Semester- IV

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL 403 Building Materials & Concrete Technology 01
(Lab)

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Total
Duration of
Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average End Sem Exam
Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Objectives:
1) To determine physical and mechanical properties of materials used in the manufacturing of
concrete like cement and aggregates.
2) To test the physical attributes and mechanical strength of burnt clay bricks used in the
construction of structures.
3) To determine the various properties of fresh and hardened concrete with and without the
addition of admixtures.
4) To study the different basic non-destructive tests conducted in the laboratory or on site to
determine the durability and strength of existing concrete structures.
5) To utilize the knowledge of mix design in the manufacturing of concrete, in the laboratory.
6) To test the physical attributes and mechanical strength of timber and tiles used in the
construction of various components of the structure.
7) To understand the practical scenario of the commonly used building materials in terms of their
availability, cost and significance through market surveys.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

1) Develop collaborative skills to work in a team/group
2) Test physical properties of cement, aggregates and concrete.
3) Test various other building materials like tiles, bricks and timber
4) Evaluate the effects of admixtures on physical properties of concrete.
5) Design the concrete mix.
6) To bridge the gap between theoretical and market/industrial practices by market surveys.

Page 67 of 77
List of Experiments (first seven are compulsory)

Lab
Module Detailed Contents
Sessions/Hr
Physical properties of OPC: Physical test, Fineness, Standard 02/04
1
consistency, Soundness, Setting time, Compressive strength.
Physical Properties of Fine and Course Aggregates: Specific 02/04
gravity, bulk density, Moisture content, Water absorption,
2
flakiness index, elongation index, Fineness modulus, Silt content
and bulking of sand
3 Tests on burnt clay bricks 01/02
Effect of w/c ratio on workability (slump cone, compaction 02/04
4
factor, V-B test, flow table) and strength of concrete
01/02
Study of admixtures and their effect on workability and strength
5
of concrete.
Non-destructive testing of concrete: Rebound hammer and 01/02
6
ultrasonic pulse velocity
7 Concrete mix design in the laboratory 01/02
8 Test on tiles(optional) 01/02
Compression test on timber (Parallel/ perpendicular to the 01/02
9
grains). (optional)
10 Market survey on common building materials (optional) 01/02

Site Visit/ Industrial Visit:

The students shall visit the brick, paver blocks, concrete block, cement, glass and RMC industrial
plants. They shall prepare a report of the visit and the same shall be evaluated by the concerned
teacher.
Assessment:
The term work shall consist of:
• Report of experiments performed.
• Industrial visit report to at least any one of the above mentioned industrial plants.
• Although minimum numbers of market surveys and industrial visits are prescribed, the
students shall be encouraged to perform more number of experiments and site/ industrial visits.

Distribution of the Term Work Marks:

The marks of the term work shall be judiciously awarded for the various components of the term
work and depending upon the quality of the term work including industrial/ site visit report. The
final certification and acceptance of term work warrants the satisfactory performance of laboratory
work by the student, appropriate completion of the assignments. Broadly, the split of the marks for
term work shall be as given below. However, there can be further bifurcation in the marks under
any of the heads to account for any sub-head therein.
Individual Practical performance : 07 Marks
Assignments : 03 Marks
Reports of experiment : 05 Marks
Page 68 of 77
Site Visit/Industrial visit : 05 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks
Total : 25 marks

Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be resorted
tom75% - 80%: 03 Marks; 81% - 90%: 04 Marks; 91% onwards: 05 Marks.

End Semester Practical/Oral Examination

The oral examination shall be based on the entire syllabus and term work comprising of the report
of the experiments/ practical conducted by the students and a detail report of the industrial/ site
visit.

Recommended Books:
1) A Building Construction: S.C. Rangwala, Charotar Publications, Gujarat, India.
2) Building Construction: S.P. Arora, Dr.S.P. Bindra,DhanpatRai Publication, New Delhi.
3) Building Construction: Dr. B.C. Punmia, A.K.Jain, A.R.Jain,Laxmi Publication., New Delhi.
4) Concrete Technology Theory and Practice: M.S. Shetty, S.Chand Publication.
5) Concrete Technology: M.L. Gambhir, Tata McGraw Hill, NewDelhi.
6) Concrete Technology: A.M. Neville & J. J. Brooks., ELBS-Longman.
7) Concrete Technology: A.M. Neville & Isaac Pitman, London.
8) Concrete Technology: A. R. Shanthakumar, Oxford University Press.
9) Materials of Construction: D. N. Ghose, Tata McGraw Hill, Delhi.
10) Building Materials: S.K. Duggal, New Age International Publishers.
11) Concrete Technology: D. F. Orchardi, Wiley, 1962.
12) Relevant codes: BIS, ACI & BS.

Reference Books/Reference Materials:

1) Engineering Materials: S.R. Rangwala,Charotar Publications.
2) Architectural Materials science: D. Anapetor, Mir Publishers.
3) Introduction to Engineering Materials: B. K. Agrawal, Tata McGraw Hill, NewDelhi.
4) Engineering Materials: P. Surendra Singh,Vani Education Books, New Delhi.
5) Building Materials (Products, Properties and Systems): M.L. Gambhir and NehaJamwal,
McGraw Hill Publications.
6) Properties of concrete: Neville, Isaac Pitman, London.
7) NPTEL Lecture series on Building Materials and Concrete Technology.

*****************

Page 69 of 77
 Semester- IV

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL404 Fluid Mechanics – II (Lab) 01

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Total
TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course Objectives:

The students will be able to learn:

1) to verify the basic fluid mechanics concepts experimentally

2) the fluid flow pattern in pipes
3) to estimate the losses in pipe flow
4) the velocity distribution in pipes

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, learner will be able to:

1) Verify the Reynold’s experiment

2) Estimate the viscosity of fluid
3) Calculate the losses in pipes
4) Assess the flow pattern and velocity distribution in pipe flow
5) learn the water hammer phenomenon through demonstration
6) learn the wind tunnel testing through demonstration

List of Experiments (Minimum Six)

Module Detailed Contents Lab

Sessions/Hr
1 Study of different types of flow using Reynold’s apparatus 02 hrs
2 Determination of viscosity of fluid 02 hrs
Estimation of the head loss due to friction incurred by a fluid along a 04 hrs
3 pipeline (To find the friction factor for the given pipes of different
sizes)
To determine different losses in pipe fittings (Estimation of the minor 04 hrs
4
losses)
5 Laminar flow through pipes 02 hrs
6 Velocity distribution in circular pipes 04 hrs
7 Turbulent flow through pipe 02 hrs
8 Study of Water Hammer phenomenon 04 hrs
9 Study of wind tunnel 02 hrs

Page 70 of 77
Assessment:

⚫ Term Work
Including Laboratory Work and Assignments both, Distribution of marks for Term Work shall be
as follows:
Laboratory work- : 15 Marks
Assignments- : 05 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks

⚫ End Semester Oral Examination

`
Reference Books:
1) Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines: R. K. Rajput, S. Chand and Company
2) Hydraulics and Fluid mechanics: Dr. P.M. Modi and Dr. S.M. Seth, Standard Book House,
Delhi
3) Hydraulics Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines: S. Ramamrutham, DhanpatRai Publishing
Company (P) Ltd-New Delhi
4) Theory and Application of Fluid Mechanics: K. Subramanian, Tata McGraw hill publishing
company, New Delhi.
5) Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics: Dr. S.K. Ukarande, Ane’s Books Pvt. Ltd. (Revised Edition
2012), ISBN 97893 8116 2538
6) Fluid Mechanics and fluid pressure engineering: Dr. D.S. Kumar, F.K. Kataria and sons
7) Fluid Mechanics: R.K. Bansal Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd.
*****************

Page 71 of 77
 Semester- IV

Course Code Course Name Credits

Skill Based Lab Course-II
CEL405 Total Station and Geographical Information 1
System

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 2 - - 1 - 1

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Total
Duration of
Sem. TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average End Sem Exam
Exam
- - - - - 50 - - 50

Objectives:
1) To enable the learners, operate the Total Station and generate its output in terms of plans,
elevations and 3D views
2) To enable the learners, operate the Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) receivers and
retrieve the information
3) To enable the learners work on a Geographical Information System (GIS) platform for
assimilating geographical data

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

1) Operate a Total Station and traverse the field
2) Perform various operations like computing height of a structure, computing area of plot,
subdividing area, demarcating boundaries, etc. Using Total Station
3) Set out foundation plan using Total Station
4) Compute the point, line and area features using Global Navigation Satellite System
5) Plot various existing features in a geographic area on a GIS platform
6) Add attribute and perform various statistical operations in GIS

List of Experiments (Minimum Eight)

Module Detailed Contents Lab
Sessions/Hr
Introduction to concepts, fundamental features and working 02
1
principal of Total Station (TS)
2 Temporary settings of a TS in field and perform basic functions on 02

Page 72 of 77
 total station like traversing, area of open plot, height calculations,
etc.
Collect detailed features of a plot (comprising features such as 2-3 04
3 buildings, courtyards, security cabins, playgrounds, trees, gates,
poles, roads, drainage lines, etc.) using TS
Transfer data collected through TS on a convenient computer aided 02
4
drafting (CAD) software
Feeding a CAD plan in TS and setting out a foundation plan using 02
5
TS
Introduction to fundamental features of Global Navigation Satellite 02
6 System (GNSS) and collect point, line and polygon features through
a GNSS receiver
Computing latitudes, longitudes, altitudes of points, length of roads, 02
7
area of plots, etc. using a GNSS system
Basic introduction to compatibilities, utilities and attributes of 02
peculiar Geographical Information System (GIS) softwares
8
available in market w.r.t their various commands, features,
capabilities and functions.
Collecting ground points through GNSS and TS for integrating it 04
9 with spatial data obtained from a GIS platform like google earth,
openstreetnetwork, etc. and developing a model on a GIS software
Add various layers in term of attributes and perform various 04
10
statistical operations and queries in GIS

Assessment:
⚫ Term Work
Including Laboratory Work comprising of minimum 8 software generated sheets distribution of
marks for Term Work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work : 40 Marks (comprising of min 8 software generated sheets:
4 using TS and GNSS data in CADD tool and 4 using GIS tool)
Attendance : 10 Marks

*****************

Page 73 of 77
 Semester- IV

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEM 401 Mini Project -1B 1.5

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 03 - - 1.5 - 1.5

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Total
Duration of
Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average End Sem Exam
Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Objectives
1) To acquaint with the process of identifying the needs and converting it into the problem.
2) To familiarize the process of solving the problem in a group.
3) To acquaint with the process of applying basic engineering fundamentalsto attempt solutions
to the problems.
4) To inculcate the process of self-learning and research.

Outcome: Learner will be able to…

1) Identify problems based on societal /research needs.
2) Apply Knowledge and skill to solve societal problems in a group.
3) Develop interpersonal skills to work as member of a group or leader.
4) Draw the proper inferences from available results through theoretical/
experimental/simulations.
5) Analyse the impact of solutions in societal and environmental context for sustainable
development.
6) Use standard norms of engineering practices
7) Excel in written and oral communication.
8) Demonstrate capabilities of self-learning in a group, which leads to life long learning.
9) Demonstrate project management principles during project work.

Guidelines for Mini Project

1) Students shall form a group of 3 to 4 students, while forming a group shall not be allowed less
than three or more than four students, as it is a group activity.
2) Students should do survey and identify needs, which shall be converted into problem statement
for mini project in consultation with faculty supervisor/head of department/internal committee
of faculties.
3) Students hall submit implementation plan in the form of Gantt/PERT/CPM chart, which will
cover weekly activity of mini project.
4) A log book to be prepared by each group, wherein group can record weekly work progress,
guide/supervisor can verify and record notes/comments.
Page 74 of 77
5) Faculty supervisor may give inputs to students during mini project activity;however, focus
shall be on self-learning.
6) Students in a group shall understand problem effectively, propose multiple solution and select
best possible solution in consultation with guide/ supervisor.
7) Students shall convert the best solution into working model using various components of their
domain areas and demonstrate.
8) The solution to be validated with proper justification and report to be compiled in standard
format of University of Mumbai.
9) With the focus on the self-learning, innovation, addressing societal problems and
entrepreneurship quality development within the students through the Mini Projects, it is
preferable that a single project of appropriate level and quality to be carried out in two
semesters by all the groups of the students. i.e. Mini Project 1 in semester III and IV. Similarly,
Mini Project 2 in semesters V and VI.
10) However, based on the individual students or group capability, with the mentor’s
recommendations, if the proposed Mini Project adhering to the qualitative aspects mentioned
above gets completed in odd semester, then that group can be allowed to work on the extension
of the Mini Project with suitable improvements/modifications or a completely new project idea
in even semester. This policy can be adopted on case by case basis.

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project:

Term Work
• The review/ progress monitoring committee shall be constituted by head of departments of
each institute. The progress of mini project to be evaluated on continuous basis, minimum
two reviews in each semester.
• In continuous assessment focus shall also be on each individual student, assessment based on
individual’s contribution in group activity, their understanding and response to questions.
• Distribution of Term work marks for both semesters shall be as below;
o Marks awarded by guide/supervisor based on log book : 10
o Marks awarded by review committee : 10
o Quality of Project report : 05
o
Review/progress monitoring committee may consider following points for
assessment based on either one year or half year project as mentioned in
general guidelines.

One-year project:
• In first semester entire theoretical solution shall be ready, including components/system
selection and cost analysis. Two reviews will be conducted based on presentation given by
students group.
• First shall be for finalisation of problem
• Second shall be on finalisation of proposed solution of problem.
• In second semester expected work shall be procurement of component’s/systems, building of
working prototype, testing and validation of results based on work completed in an earlier
semester.
• First review is based on readiness of building working prototype to be conducted.

Page 75 of 77
• Second review shall be based on poster presentation cum demonstration of working model in
last month of the said semester.

Half-year project:
• In this case in one semester students’ group shall complete project in all aspects including,
o Identification of need/problem
o Proposed final solution
o Procurement of components/systems
o Building prototype and testing
• Two reviews will be conducted for continuous assessment,
o First shall be for finalisation of problem and proposed solution
o Second shall be for implementation and testing of solution.

Assessment criteria of Mini Project.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following criteria;

1) Quality of survey/ need identification

2) Clarity of Problem definition based on need.
3) Innovativeness in solutions
4) Feasibility of proposed problem solutions and selection of best solution
5) Cost effectiveness
6) Societal impact
7) Innovativeness
8) Cost effectiveness and Societal impact
9) Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements
10) Effective use of skill sets
11) Effective use of standard engineering norms
12) Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader
13) Clarity in written and oral communication

• In one year, project, first semester evaluation may be based on first six criteria’s and
remaining may be used for second semester evaluation of performance of students in mini
project.
• In case of half year project all criteria’s in generic may be considered for evaluation of
performance of students in mini project.
Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project Practical/Oral Examination:
• Report should be prepared as per the guidelines issued by the University of Mumbai.
• Mini Project shall be assessed through a presentation and demonstration of working model
by the student project group to a panel of Internal and External Examiners preferably from
industry or research organisations having experience of more than five years approved by
head of Institution.
• Students shall be motivated to publish a paper based on the work in Conferences/students
competitions.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following points;

Page 76 of 77
1) Quality of problem and Clarity
2) Innovativeness in solutions
3) Cost effectiveness and Societal impact
4) Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements
5) Effective use of skill sets
6) Effective use of standard engineering norms
7) Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader
8) Clarity in written and oral communication

*****************

Page 77 of 77
 Item No: 125
AC- 23/7/2020

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Bachelor of Engineering
in

Civil Engineering
Second Year with Effect from AY 2020-21
Third Year with Effect from AY 2021-22
Final Year with Effect from AY 2022-23

(REV- 2019 ‘C’ Scheme) from Academic Year 2019 – 20

Under

FACULTY OF SCIENCE &

TECHNOLOGY
(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year
2019–2020)
 Item No: -125
AC- 23/7/2020

UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus for Approval

Sr. No.
Heading Particulars

1 Title of the Course Second Year B.E. Civil Engineering

After Passing First Year Engineering as per the

2 Eligibility for Admission Ordinance 0.6242

3 Passing Marks 40%

Ordinances /
4 Ordinance 0.6242
Regulations ( if any)

5 No. of Years / Semesters 8 semesters

6 Level U.G.

7 Pattern Semester

8 Status New

To be implemented from
9 With effect from Academic Year: 2020-2021
Academic Year

Date

Dr. S. K. Ukarande Dr Anuradha Muzumdar

Associate Dean Dean
Faculty of Science and Technology Faculty of Science and Technology
University of Mumbai University of Mumbai
Page 2 of 77
 Preamble

To meet the challenge of ensuring excellence in engineering education, the issue of quality needs to be
addressed, debated and taken forward in a systematic manner. Accreditation is the principal means of
quality assurance in higher education. The major emphasis of accreditation process is to measure the
outcomes of the program that is being accredited. In line with this Faculty of Science and Technology
(in particular Engineering) of University of Mumbai has taken a lead in incorporating philosophy of
outcome based education in the process of curriculum development.
Faculty resolved that course objectives and course outcomes are to be clearly defined for each course,
so that all faculty members in affiliated institutes understand the depth and approach of course to be
taught, which will enhance learner’s learning process. Choice based Credit and grading system enables
a much-required shift in focus from teacher-centric to learner-centric education since the workload
estimated is based on the investment of time in learning and not in teaching. It also focuses on
continuous evaluation which will enhance the quality of education. Credit assignment for courses is
based on 15 weeks teaching learning process, however content of courses is to be taught in 13 weeks
and remaining 2 weeks to be utilized for revision, guest lectures, coverage of content beyond syllabus
etc.
There was a concern that the earlier revised curriculum more focused on providing information and
knowledge across various domains of the said program, which led to heavily loading of students in
terms of direct contact hours. In this regard, faculty of science and technology resolved that to minimize
the burden of contact hours, total credits of entire program will be of 170, wherein focus is not only on
providing knowledge but also on building skills, attitude and self learning. Therefore in the present
curriculum skill based laboratories and mini projects are made mandatory across all disciplines of
engineering in second and third year of programs, which will definitely facilitate self learning of
students. The overall credits and approach of curriculum proposed in the present revision is in line with
AICTE model curriculum.
The present curriculum will be implemented for Second Year of Engineering from the academic year
2020-21. Subsequently this will be carried forward for Third Year and Final Year Engineering in the
academic years 2021-22, 2022-23, respectively.

Dr. S. K. Ukarande Dr Anuradha Muzumdar

Associate Dean Dean
Faculty of Science and Technology Faculty of Science and Technology
University of Mumbai University of Mumbai

Page 3 of 77
Incorporation and Implementation of Online Contents from
NPTEL/ Swayam Platform

The curriculum revision is mainly focused on knowledge component, skill based activities and
project based activities. Self learning opportunities are provided to learners. In the revision process
this time in particular Revised syllabus of ‘C ‘ scheme wherever possible additional resource links
of platforms such as NPTEL, Swayam are appropriately provided. In an earlier revision of
curriculum in the year 2012 and 2016 in Revised scheme ‘A' and ‘B' respectively, efforts were
made to use online contents more appropriately as additional learning materials to enhance
learning of students.
In the current revision based on the recommendation of AICTE model curriculum overall credits
are reduced to 171, to provide opportunity of self learning to learner. Learners are now getting
sufficient time for self learning either through online courses or additional projects for enhancing
their knowledge and skill sets.
The Principals/ HoD’s/ Faculties of all the institute are required to motivate and encourage learners
to use additional online resources available on platforms such as NPTEL/ Swayam. Learners can
be advised to take up online courses, on successful completion they are required to submit
certification for the same. This will definitely help learners to facilitate their enhanced learning
based on their interest.

Dr. S. K. Ukarande Dr Anuradha Muzumdar

Associate Dean Dean
Faculty of Science and Technology Faculty of Science and Technology
University of Mumbai University of Mumbai

Page 4 of 77
 Preface
The engineering education in India is expanding and is set to increase manifold. The major
challenge in the current scenario is to ensure quality to the stakeholders along with expansion. To
meet this challenge, the issue of quality needs to be addressed, debated and taken forward in a
systematic manner. Accreditation is the principal means of quality assurance in higher education
and reflects the fact that in achieving recognition, the institution or program of study is committed
and open to external review to meet certain minimum specified standards. The major emphasis of
this accreditation process is to measure the outcomes of the program that is being accredited.
Program Outcomes (POs) are essentially a range of skills and knowledge that a student will have
at the time of graduation from the program. In line with this, Faculty of Technology of University
of Mumbai has taken a lead in incorporating the philosophy of outcome based education (OBE) in
the process of curriculum development from Rev-2012 onwards and continued to enhance the
curriculum further based on OBE in Rev-2016 and Rev-2019 “C” scheme.
As Chairman and Members of Board of Studies in Civil Engineering, University of Mumbai, we
are happy to state here that, the Program Educational Objectives (PEOs) for Undergraduate
Program were finalized in a brain storming sessions, which was attended by more than 40 members
from different affiliated Institutes of the University, who are either Heads of Departments or their
senior representatives from the Department of Civil Engineering. The PEOs finalized for the
undergraduate program in Civil Engineering are listed below;
1. To prepare the Learner with a sound foundation in mathematical, scientific and engineering
fundamentals
2. To motivate the Learner in the art of self-learning and to use modern tools for solving real life
problems
3. To prepare the Learner for a successful career in Indian and Multinational Organisations and
for excelling in post-gradute studies
4. To motivate learners for life-longing learning
5. To inculcate a professional and ethical attitude, good leadership qualities and commitment to
social responsibilities in the Learner’s thought process
In addition to the above listed PEOs, every institute is encouraged to add a few (2-3) more PEOs
suiting their institute vision and mission
Apart from the PEOs, for each course of the program, objectives and expected outcomes from a
learner’s point of view are also included in the curriculum to support the philosophy of OBE. We
strongly believe that even a small step taken in the right direction will definitely help in providing
quality education to the major stakeholders.

Board of Studies in Civil Engineering, University of Mumbai

1. Dr. S. K. Ukarande: Chairman
2. Dr. K. K. Sangle: Member
3. Dr. S. B. Charhate: Member
4. Dr. A. R. Kambekar: Member
5. Dr. R. B. Magar: Member
6. Dr. Seema Jagtap: Member

Page 5 of 77
 Second Year Civil Engineering
UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI
(With Effect from 2020-2021)
Semester – IV

Course Teaching Scheme

Course Name Credits Assigned
Code (Contact Hours)
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
CEC401 Engineering Mathematics - IV 3 -- 1 3 - 1 4

CEC402 Structural Analysis 4 -- - 4 - - 4

CEC403 Surveying 3 -- - 3 - - 3
CEC404 Building Materials & Concrete 3 -- - 3 - - 3
Technology
CEC405 Fluid Mechanics-II 3 - - 3 - - 3
CEL 401 Structural Analysis -- 2 - - 1 - 1
CEL 402 Surveying -- 3 - - 1.5 - 1.5
CEL 403 Building Material Concrete -- 2 - - 1 - 1
Technology
CEL 404 Fluid Mechanics-II -- 2 1 1
CEL 405 Skill Based lab Course -- 2 - - 1 - 1
CEM401 Mini Project – 1 B -- 3$ - - 1.5 - 1.5
Total 16 14 1 16 7 1 24

Examination Scheme

Exam
End
Internal Durati
Course Name Sem Term Prac.
Assessment on Total
Course Exam Work /Oral
(Hrs.)-
Code
Test Test Avg
I II .
CEC 401 Engineering Mathematics - IV 20 20 20 80 3 25 - 125
CEC 402 Structural Analysis 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
CEC 403 Surveying 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
CEC 404 Building Materials & 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
Concrete Technology
CEC 405 Fluid Mechanics-II 20 20 20 80 3 - - 100
CEL 401 Structural Analysis 25 25 50
CEL 402 Surveying 50 25 75
CEL 403 Building Materials & - - - - - 25 25 50
Concrete Technology
CEL 404 Fluid Mechanics-II - - - - - 25 25 50
CEL 405 Skill Based lab Course - - - - - 50 - 50
CEM401 Mini Project – 1 B - - - - - 25 25 50
Total 100 400 - 225 125 850
Semester- IV
Page 42 of 77
 Course Code Course Name Credits
CEC 401 Engineering Mathematics-IV 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - 01 03 - 01 04

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Duration of
Total
Averag Sem End Sem. TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II
e Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 03 hrs 25 - - 125

Pre-requisite:
• Engineering Mathematics-I,
• Engineering Mathematics-II,
• Engineering Mathematics-III,

Objectives:
1) To study the concept of Vector calculus & its applications in engineering.
2) To study Line and Contour integrals and expansion of complex valued function in a power
series.
3) To familiarize with the concepts of statistics for data analysis.
4) To acquaint with the concepts of probability, random variables with their distributions and
expectations.
5) To familiarize with the concepts of probability distributions and sampling theory with its
applications.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to….

1) Apply the concept of Vector calculus to evaluate line integrals, surface integrals using
Green’s theorem, Stoke’s theorem & Gauss Divergence theorem.
2) Use the concepts of Complex Integration for evaluating integrals, computing residues &
evaluate various contour integrals.
3) Apply the concept of Correlation, Regression and curve fitting to the engineering problems
in data science.
4) Illustrate understanding of the concepts of probability and expectation for getting the
spread of the data and distribution of probabilities.
5) Apply the concept of probability distribution to engineering problems& Testing hypothesis
of small samples using sampling theory
6) Apply the concepts of parametric and nonparametric tests for analysing practical problems.

Page 43 of 77
Module Detailed Contents Hrs.
Module : Vector Calculus
1.1 Solenoidal and irrotational (conservative) vector fields.
1.2 Line integrals – definition and problems. 07
1.3 Green’s theorem (without proof) in a plane, Stokes’ theorem (without Proof),
01 Gauss’ Divergence theorem (without proof) and problems (only evaluation).

Self Learning Topics: Identities connecting Gradient, Divergence and Curl, Angle
between surfaces. Verifications of Green’s theorem, Stoke’s theorem & Gauss-
Divergence theorem, related identities & deductions.
Module: Complex Integration
2.1 Line Integral, Cauchy’s Integral theorem for simple connected and multiply
connected regions (without proof), Cauchy’s Integral formula (without proof).
2.2 Taylor’s and Laurent’s series (without proof). 07
02
2.3 Definition of Singularity, Zeroes, poles of f(z), Residues, Cauchy’s Residue Theorem
(without proof)

Self-learning Topics: Application of Residue Theorem to evaluate real integrations.

Module: Statistical Techniques
3.1 Karl Pearson’s Coefficient of correlation (r) and related concepts with problems
3.2 Spearman’s Rank correlation coefficient (R) ( Repeated & non repeated ranks
problems)
03
3.3 Lines of regression 06
3.4 Fitting of first and second degree curves.

Self-learning Topics: Covariance, fitting of exponential curve.

Module: Probability Theory:
4.1 Conditional probability, Total Probability and Baye’s Theorem.
4.2 Discrete and Continuous random variables, Probability mass and density function, 06
Probability distribution for random variables,
04 4.3 Expectation, Variance, Co-variance, moments, Moment generating functions,
(Four moments about the origin &about the mean).

Self- learning Topics: Properties variance and covariance,

Module: Probability Distribution and Sampling Theory-I
5.1 Probability Distribution: Poisson and Normal distribution
5.2 Sampling distribution, Test of Hypothesis, Level of Significance, Critical 07
region, One-tailed, and two-tailed test, Degree of freedom.
05 5.3 Students’ t-distribution (Small sample). Test the significance of single sample mean
and two independent sample means and paired t- test)

Self -learning Topics: Test of significance of large samples, Proportion test, Survey
based project.
Module: Sampling theory-II 06
6.1 Chi-square test: Test of goodness of fit and independence of attributes (Contingency
table) including Yate’s Correction.
6.2 Analysis of variance: F-test (significant difference between variances of two
06
samples)

Self- learning Topics: ANOVA: One way classification, Two-way classification (short-
cut method).
Page 44 of 77
Term Work:
General Instructions:
1) Batch wise tutorials are to be conducted. The number of students per batch should be as
per University pattern for practical.
2) Students must be encouraged to write at least 6 class tutorials on entire syllabus.
3) A group of 4-6 students should be assigned a self-learning topic. Students should prepare
a presentation/problem solving of 10-15 minutes. This should be considered as mini project
in Engineering mathematics. This project should be graded for 10 marks depending on the
performance of the students.

The distribution of Term Work marks will be as follows –

1 Attendance (Theory and Tutorial) 05 marks
2 Class Tutorials on entire syllabus 10 marks
3 Mini project 10 marks

Assessment:
Internal Assessment for 20 marks: Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests First test based on
approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40%
but excluding contents covered in Test I). Duration of each test shall be one hour.
End Semester Examination: Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be
proportional to number of respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
• Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks
• Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
• Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module
3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
• Only Four questions need to be solved.

References:
1. Higher Engineering Mathematics, Dr. B. S. Grewal, Khanna Publication
2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Limited,
3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, R. K. Jain and S. R. K. Iyengar, Narosa publication,
4. Vector Analysis, Murray R. Spiegel, Schaum Series
5. Complex Variables and Applications, Brown and Churchill, McGraw-Hilleducation
6. Probability Statistics and Random Processes, T. Veerarajan, Mc. GrawHilleducation.

*****************

Page 45 of 77
 Semester-IV
Course Code Course Name Credits
CEC402 Structural Analysis 4
Contact Hours Credits Assigned
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4
Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Duration of Total
Test- Sem. End Sem. TW PR OR
Test-I Average
II Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 3 hrs - - - 100

Rationale

Different components of civil engineering structures are subjected to variousforce systems and
their combinations. For designing the components, these are analyzed for their response. The
structural systems are determinate or indeterminate in nature and so there are different analysis
methods.These will be learnt in this course. Subject knowledge of Engineering Mechanics and
Mechanics of solids is the prerequisite of this course.
Their application on solids and mechanisms, the action of force systems is studied and further
extended in this subject. Learner will learn to apply these to the analysis of various members of
structural systems such as beams, trusses, portal frames and arches. These analyses will further be
used while designing of Steel and RCC structures.

Objectives

1. To analyze for axial force in the Coplanar, perfect trusses and analysis of 3- Hinged arches.
2. To study the concept of Influence Line Diagrams for Reactions, SF and B M in beams and
axial forces in trusses and their application for rolling load systems.
3. To learn methods for evaluating rotation and displacement parameters in respect of frames
andtrusses using various methods. To understand static and kinematic indeterminacy of
structures.
4. To analyze the indeterminate structures using Flexibility methods and Using Clapeyron’s
Theorem..
5. To analyze the indeterminate structures such as beams & simple rigid jointed framesusing
direct stiffness method.
6. To analyze the indeterminate structures using Moment Distribution as Stiffness method
and Plastic analysis of structures.

Page 46 of 77
Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Modules / Contents Duration
Trusses and 3 hinged Arches (9)
1. Trusses: Analysis of Perfect Coplanar Trusses by Method of Joints (3) 6
1 Analysis of Perfect Coplanar Trusses by Method of sections.(3)
Three hinged elastic arches, Determination of normal thrust, radial 3
1
1. shear and bending moment for Symmetrical & Unsymmetrical parabolic
2 three hinged arches.(3)

Influence line diagrams and rolling loads (09)

Influence lines for Reactions, shear force and bending moment at a 6
section of cantilever, simply supported, overhanging beams without
internal hinges. (2)
2.
Rolling loads, Determination of S F and BM at a section, Value and
2 1
criteria for maximum shear force and bending moment, absolute
maximum shear force and bending moment under rolling loads (UDL
and series of point loads) for simply supported girder. (4)
2. I L D for Axial forces in members of Pin jointed trusses (3) 3
2
Determinate and Indeterminate structures (8)
Deflection of Statically determinate structures, methods based on energy 5
principles and Castigliano’s theorems to evaluate deflection in portal
3.
frames, bent up and arch type structures. Application of Unit Load
1
Method for calculating slope and deflection of a point on rigid jointed
3 frames and deflection of a point on Pin jointed truss.
Static and kinematic indeterminacies: Types of structures occurring in 3
practice, their classification, linear and non-linear behavior of
3.
materials, geometric non-linearity, static and kinematic determinacy and
2
indeterminacy of structure.

Analysis of indeterminate structures by Flexibility method (9)

Analysis of fixed beam. Application of Clapeyron’s theorem of three 4
4.1
moments to fixed beam and continuous beam.
4
Flexibility coefficients and their use in formulation of compatibility 5
4.2 equations. Application of flexibility method to propped cantilevers,
fixed beams & continuous beams, Simple rigid jointed frames.
Analysis of indeterminate structures by Stiffness method (8)
Direct stiffness method: 4
5.1 Stiffness coefficients for prismatic members and their use for
5
formulation of equilibrium equations.
Application of Direct stiffness method to indeterminate beams & simple 4
5.2
rigid jointed frames.
6 Moment distribution method and Plastic Analysis of structures. (9)

Page 47 of 77
 Moment distribution method: 5
Application to indeterminate beams & simple rigid jointed frames &
6.1
frame with inclined member but having only single translation degree of
freedom including the effect of support settlement.
Plastic analysis of structures: Introduction to plastic analysis, concept 4
of plastic hinge, plastic moment carrying capacity, shape factor. Static
6.2
and kinematic method of plastic analysis.Determination of collapse load
for single and multiple span beams.

Contribution to Outcome

On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1. Calculate axial forces in the Coplanartrusses by using Method of joints and method of
sections and also calculate radial shear, normal thrust and bending moment in parabolic 3-
Hinged arches.
2. Draw Influence Line Diagrams for axial forces in trusses, Reactions, SF and B M in beams
and find their values when rolling loads are passing over them..
3. Evaluate rotation and displacement at a joint of frames and deflection at any joint of truss
and will be able to compute static and kinematic indeterminacy of structure.
4. Apply Flexibility methods and make use of Clapeyron’s Theorem to analyze the
indeterminate structures.
5. Analyse the indeterminate structures such as beams & simple rigid jointed frames using
direct stiffness method.
6. Analyse the indeterminate structures using Moment Distribution as Stiffness method and
make plastic analysis.

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination (80 Marks):

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1) Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2) Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3) Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module
3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4) Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1. Basic Structural Analysis: C.S. Reddy, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi.
2. Mechanics of Structures: Vol-I: S. B. Junnarkar and H.J. Shah, Charotar Publishers, Anand.
3. Analysis of Structures: Vol. I and II, Vazirani and Ratwani
Page 48 of 77
 4. Strength of Materials: S. Ramamrutham, Dhanpatrai and Publishers, Delhi
5. Theory of Structures: S. Ramamrutham, Dhanpatrai and Sons, Delhi
6. Structural Analysis I: HemantPatil, YogeshPatil, Jignesh Patel, Synergy Knowledgeware,
Mumbai.
7. Strength of Materials: Rajput, S. Chand Publications, Delhi
8. Structural Analysis: Bhavikatti, Vikas publisher house Pvt, ltd.
9. Structural Analysis: DevdasMenon, Narosa Publishing House.
10. Basic Structural Analysis: K.U. Muthu, Azmi Ibrahim, M. Vijyanand,
11. MagantiJanadharnand. I.K.International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
12. Comprehensive Structural Analysis: Vol-I and II by Vaidyanathan R. and Perumal
R.LaxmiPublications.
13. Elementary Structural Analysis: Jindal
14. Structural Analysis: L.S. Negi and R.S. Jangid, Tata Mc-Graw Hill India
15. Fundamentals of Structural Analysis: Sujit Kumar Roy and SubrotaChakrabarty, S. Chand
Publications.
16. Structural Analysis: T.S. Thandavamoorthy, Oxford University Press.
17. Structural Analysis: Manmohan Das, Bharghab Mohan Pentice Hall International. .

Reference Books:
1. Structural Analysis: Hibbler, Pentice Hall International.
2. Structural Analysis: Chajes, ElBS London.
3. Theory of Structures: Timoshenko and Young, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi.
4. Structural Analysis: Kassimali, TWS Publications.
5. Element of Structural Analysis: Norris and Wilbur, McGraw Hill.
6. Structural Analysis: Laursen H.I, McGraw Hill Publishing Co.
7. Structural theorem and their application: B.G. Neal, Pergaman Press.
8. Fundamentals of Structural Analysis: K.M. Leet, C.M. Uang and A.M. Gilbert, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
9. Elementary theory of Structures: Hseih, Prentice Hall

*****************

Page 49 of 77
 Semester- IV

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC403 Surveying 03

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorials Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Duration of
Total
Sem. End Sem. TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average
Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 03 hrs - - - 100

Rationale

As it is always said “well begun is half done”. All civil engineering projects such as buildings,
roads, bridges, railways, airports, dams, water treatment plants, sewage treatment plants begin
with surveying. Knowledge of surveying is thus fundamental and very useful to all civil
engineers. In this course, the students are well informed about the principles and methods of
surveying. The students are made conversant with various instruments which are used in the field
to take measurements for preparation of drawings. The course introduces the advancements in
instruments and methods of surveying. The study deals with the methods of computing land
areas and volume of earthworks. The course also covers horizontal and vertical curves.

Objectives

The students will be able to learn:

1. The basic principles and classification of surveying.

2. Various methods of measurements in surveying.
3. The appropriate techniques of surveying and skills of collecting field data for preparing
drawings.
4. Advancements in instruments and methods of surveying.
5. The methods of computing areas and volumes using the site specific data for various
purposes.
6. The setting out techniques of curves.

Detailed Syllabus
Page 50 of 77
Module Course Modules/ Contents Periods
Introduction 5
1.1 Definition, principles, objectives, fundamental classification-plane and
geodetic.
1.2 Chaining, Ranging and offsetting: Definitions, Principles, Instruments
1 required, Obstacles, conventional signs and symbols.
1.3 Bearings – Different types, compass – prismatic, surveyor,
dip,declination and local attraction, compass traversing
Levelling and Contouring 8
2.1 Definitions, basic terms, types of instruments-dumpy level and Auto
level, principal axes of dumpy level, temporary and permanent
adjustments
2.2 Booking and reduction of levels, plane of collimation (HI) and rise-fall
methods, computation of missing data, distance to the visible
horizon,corrections due to curvature and refraction, reciprocal
2 levelling, Numerical problems
2.3 Differential levelling, profile levelling, fly levelling, check levelling,
precise levelling, sources of errors,difficulties in levelling work,
corrections and precautions work in levelling
2.4 Contouring: terms, contour, contouring, contour interval, horizontal
equivalent Direct and indirect methods of contouring, interpolation of
contours, uses of Contours and characteristics of contour lines.
Grade contour
Theodolite Surveying 8
3.1 Various parts and axes of transit, technical terms, temporary and
permanent adjustments of a transit, measurement of horizontal and
vertical angles, Methods of repetition and reiteration.
3.2 Different methods of running a theodolite traverse, Latitudes and
departures,rectangular coordinates,traverse adjustments by Bowditch’s,
3 transit and Modified transit rules, Gales Traverse Table, Numerical
Problems.
3.3 Miscellaneous use of theodolite for various works such as prolongation
of a straight line,setting out an angle, bearing measurements.Omitted
measurements, Problems in using theodolite traversing, errors in
theodolite traversing.
Indirect and Advanced Methods of Measurement 7
4.1 Tacheometry-Principle, Objective, Suitability and different methods of
tacheometry, Stadia formula, Radial contouring , numerical on stadia
4 method only
4.2 Electronic Distance Measurement: Working Principles, types,
applications in surveying
Total Station- Working Principles, applications in surveying
4.3 Introduction to GPS
Plane Table Surveying, Areas and Volumes 5
Page 51 of 77
 5.1 Definition, principle, accessories required for plane table surveying,
merits and demerits, temporary adjustments, Different methods of plane
table surveying
5 5.2 Areas: Area of an irregular figure by trapezoidal rule, average ordinate
rule,Simpson’s 1/3 rule, various coordinate methods.Planimeter: types
including digital planimeter, area of zero circle, uses of planimeter.
5.3 Volumes: Computation of volume by trapezoidal and prismoidal
formula,volume from spot levels, volume from contour plans.
Curves 6
Horizontal Curves-Definitions of different terms, necessity and types of
6.1 curves.Methods of setting out Simple circular curves- linear methods
and Angular methods (Numericals on simple circular curves only)
6 6.2 Vertical curves– Definitions, geometry and types. Tangent correction
and chord gradient methods.
Total 39

Contribution to Outcomes

After completion of the course, the learner will be able to:

1. 1.Apply the principles of surveying and field procedures to conduct the various surveys
2. Use various methods for taking linear and angular measurements
3. Collect, record and analyse the field data for preparing drawings.
4. Explain the advancements in instruments and methods
5. 5.Calculate the area of land and volume of earthwork
6. Set out curves

Internal Assessment (20 marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests:
First test based on approximately 40% of the contents and second test based on remaining
contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test Ⅰ)

End Semester Examination (80 marks):

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of

respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum
1. The question paper will consist of six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Question 1 will be compulsoryand should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature( for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module
3 then part (b) will be from any other module other than module 3 )
4. OnlyFour questions need to be solved.
Recommended Books:
1. Surveying and Levelling: R. Agor, Vol. -I, 11th Edition, Khanna Publishers
(ISBN8174092358)

Page 52 of 77
 2. Surveying and Levelling:Kanetkar and Kulkarni, Vol. -I, 24th Edition, Pune Vidyarthi
Griha, Pune. (ISBN 8185825114)
3. Surveying and Levelling:Dr. B.C. Punmia, Vol.-I, 16th Edition, Vol. -II 4th Edition, Laxmi
Publications (ISBN9788170088530)
4. Surveying and Levelling: N NBasak, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. (ISBN
9789332901537)

Reference Books:

1. Surveying: Volume -I: Dr K.R. Arora, Standard Book House.

2. Surveying and Levelling (2nd Edition): R. Subramanian; Oxford Higher Education.
3. Surveying and Levelling (Vol.-I): S.K. Duggal, Tata McGraw Hill
4. Textbook of Surveying, C Venkatramaiah, University Press, Hyderabad, Latest Edition
5. Fundamentals of Surveying, S.K. Roy, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi
6. Surveying for Engineers, John Uraine and Bill Price, Palgrave Macmillan
7. Surveying: Theory and Practice, James Anderson, Edward M. Mikhail, Tata Mcgraw Hill
*****************

Page 53 of 77
 Semester - IV

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC 404 Building Materials & Concrete Technology 03

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - 03 - - 03

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Duration of Total
Sem End Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average
Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 03 Hrs -- -- --- 100

Rationale

Materials are essential elements, constituent parts (or) substances which are used to raise a
building, but materials could not be turned into structures without a method of construction. This
course provides necessary knowledge about properties, uses of different types of building materials
and the selection of materials, its mix proportioning, mixing, placing, compacting and curing. This
course is intended for gaining useful knowledge with respect to facts, concepts, principles and
procedures related to building materials and concrete technology so that student can effectively
execute quality control during building construction work.
Objectives

1. To identify the good and significant materials to be used for the construction work and
their associated quality, durability, warrantees, and availability.
2. To study the manufacturing process, properties and use of different types of building
materials like stone, brick, glass, timber and the materials such as paints and varnishes
used for the treatment of surfaces so as to achieve good knowledge about the building
materials.
3. To acquire a thorough knowledge about the properties and significance of different
materials used for the manufacturing of concrete.
4. To study the properties, test conducted and significance of concrete in terms of properties
of fresh and hardened concrete.
5. To understand the concept and optimization of mix design of concrete for different
exposure conditions.
6. To enable the students to understand the mechanized and precise procedure of concrete
production in Ready Mix Plants. To understand the basic non-destructive tests conducted
on concrete to check the in place strength and durability of concrete.

Page 54 of 77
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Modules / Contents Periods

Introduction to building materials and concrete: 03
Introduction to building materials: Introduction, role of
1 1.1
materials in construction, classification of materials, economical
and durable materials.
1.2 Introduction to concrete: History of concrete, necessity,
limitations, merits and demerits.
Building Materials:
Stones: Classification and properties of building stones, relation
2.1
to their structural requirements, quarrying, dressing, seasoning and
preservative treatments.
Bricks and blocks: Burnt clay bricks: raw materials,
manufacturing processes, classification, properties, defects, tests
2.2 09
as per BIS codes. Bricks for special use: refractory bricks.
Concrete blocks, Paver block, Autoclaved Aerated Concrete
2 (AAC) blocks, Cellular Light Weight Concrete (CLC) blocks and
ceramic tiles: raw materials, manufacturing process and properties.
2.3 Glass: Properties, types, uses.
Timber: Types of natural wood and artificial wood, preservative
2.4 treatments, defects in timber, wood products and wood
composites.
2.5 Damp proofing, water proofing materials and Termite proofing.
2.6 Mortar: Types, ingredients, proportions and suitability.
2.7 Paints, Enamels and Varnishes: Composition.
Painting on: plastered surfaces, wood surfaces, meta l surfaces.
Effect of weather on: Enamels, distemper, white wash and colour
wash, varnish, French polish, Wax Polish.
2.8 Miscellaneous Materials: Gypsum, Plaster of Paris, Heat and
sound insulating materials.
Constituent of Concrete:
Fine and Coarse Aggregates: Classification, physical and
3.1 mechanical propertiesand their influence on the properties of
concrete, gradation, Alkali aggregate reaction. Properties of
3 09
manufacturing sand.
Cement (OPC): Grades, Manufacturing, Chemical composition,
3.2 Hydration of cement, Physical properties as per BIS code. Effects
of chemical constituents on the properties of cement.
Different types of cement: Chemical composition, properties as per
relevant IS codes and their applications.
3.3 Water: Desiredquality of water for concrete.
3.4 Lime:Types and their usages.
3.5 Admixtures: Definition and purposes, types of mineral and
Page 55 of 77
 chemical admixtures. Test on admixtures: chemistry and
compatibility with concrete.
Concrete:
4.1 Grades, manufacturing process, preparation of batch report, Duff
Abram’s W/C ratio law & its significance.
06
Properties of fresh and hardened concrete, factors affecting of
4 4.2
workability, vibration of concrete, Types of vibrators: Internal,
external, surface and table vibrators.
Durability: factors affecting durability, relation between durability
4.3
and permeability, laboratory tests on durability such as Permeability
test, Rapid chloride penetration test (RCPT).
Concrete Mix Design:
Definition and objectives, Types of mix as per IS:456, Mix design
5 5.1
for compressive strength and flexural strength in accordance with IS 08
10262 and IS 456.
Methods of Curing of concrete, Methods of determining
compressive Strength of accelerated-cured concrete test specimens
5.2
as per IS 9013, Calculation of ingredients of concrete for batching
as per concrete mix proportions for different grades.
Concreting Methods and Test
Ready Mixed Concrete: Advantages of RMC, Components and
6 6.1 04
Lay-out of RMC plant. Distribution and Transport, Handling and
Placing. Codes recommendations.
6.2 Non-Destructive Testing: Need, application and limitation,
Schmidt Rebound hammer test, Ultrasonic Pulse Velocity test.

Contribution to Outcome

On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1. To develop and implement the conceptual knowledge of building materials in the
construction industry.
2. Assess the properties of building stones and their classifications. Understand the concept
of various methods of manufacturing of bricks and different types of concrete blocks.
3. To expose students to various quality control aspects of civil engineering materials by
performing different lab tests on materials.
4. Identify the ingredients and properties of fresh and hardened concrete.
5. To interpret and design concrete mix for various grades for various exposure conditions.
6. To study the new technology for manufacturing, testing and quality of concrete.

Page 56 of 77
Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests

First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I).

End Semester Examination (80 Marks):

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks
2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module3)
4. Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1. A Building Construction: S.C. Rangwala, Charotar Publications, Gujarat, India.
2. Building Construction: S.P. Arora, Dr.S.P. Bindra,DhanpatRai Publication, New Delhi.
3. Building Construction: Dr. B.C. Punmia, A.K.Jain, A.R.Jain,Laxmi Publication., New Delhi.
4. Concrete Technology Theory and Practice: M.S. Shetty, S.Chand Publication.
5. Concrete Technology: M.L. Gambhir, Tata McGraw Hill, NewDelhi.
6. Concrete Technology: A.M. Neville & J. J. Brooks., ELBS-Longman.
7. Concrete Technology: A.M. Neville & Isaac Pitman, London.
8. Concrete Technology: A. R. Shanthakumar, Oxford University Press.
9. Materials of Construction: D. N. Ghose, Tata McGraw Hill, Delhi.
10. Building Materials: S.K. Duggal, New Age International Publishers.
11. Concrete Technology: D. F. Orchardi, Wiley, 1962.
12. Relevant codes: BIS, ACI & BS.

Reference Books/Reference Materials:

1. Engineering Materials: S.R. Rangwala,Charotar Publications.
2. Architectural Materials science: D. Anapetor, Mir Publishers.
3. Introduction to Engineering Materials: B. K. Agrawal, Tata McGraw Hill, NewDelhi.
4. Engineering Materials: P. Surendra Singh, Vani Education Books,New Delhi.
5. Building Materials (Products, Properties and Systems): M.L. Gambhir and
NehaJamwal,McGraw Hill Publications.
6. Properties of concrete: Neville, Isaac Pitman, London.
7. NPTEL Lecture series on Building Materials and Concrete Technology.
**************

Semester- IV

Page 57 of 77
 Course Code Course Name Credits
CEC405 Fluid Mechanics - II 03

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Duration of Total
Sem End Sem. TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average
Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 03 hrs - - - 100

Rationale

The course introduces the fluid flow science, problems and their applications in varied conditions.
The study deals with the characteristics of fluid flow in pipes namely compressible, laminar and
turbulent with their applications in detail.
Objectives

The students will be able to learn:

1. The knowledge of closed conduit flows, determine various losses through pipes, Pipe
network and Water hammer effect
2. Theory of Laminar flow and Turbulent flow,
3. Understand the concept of Boundary Layer theory, flow separation and forces around
submerged bodies
4. Application of moment of momentum principle on pipe bends and sprinklers
5. The importance of dimensionless numbers, dimensional analysis and similarities.
Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Modules / Contents Periods

Flow through pipes 14

Flow through pipes:

Loss of head through pipes, Darcy-Weisbach equation, Major and

1.1 minor losses. Hydraulic gradient line and Total energy gradient line,
pipes in series,equivalent pipes, pipes in parallel, flow through laterals,
1 flow through Branched pipes, three reservoir problem, siphon.
Pipe network and water hammer:
1.2 Hardy cross method, water hammer in Pipes-Gradual closure and
instantaneous closure of valve control measures

Page 58 of 77
 Flow through nozzles:
1.3 Power transmitted through nozzle, condition for maximum power
transmitted,diameter of nozzle for maximum transmission of power
Laminar Flow 05
2 Reynolds experiment, critical velocity, laminar flow through circular pipes,
flow between two parallel plates: stationary and moving.
Turbulent Flow 04

Causes of turbulence, shear stress in turbulent flow, Reynolds’s stresses,

3 Prandtl’s mixing length Theory, Hydro dynamically smooth and rough
boundaries, velocity distribution in smooth and rough pipes, Karman-
Prandtl’s velocity distribution equation.
Boundary Layer Theory 07

Development of boundary layer over flat surfaces. Boundary layer thickness,

4 energy thickness and momentum thickness, Boundary layer separation and
control. Introduction to flow around submerged body, drag and lift, terminal
velocity of body, Magnus Effect.
Dynamics of Fluid Flow 04
5 Momentum principle, Moment of momentum principle (applications: Pipe
bends and sprinklers).
Dimensional Analysis 05

Dimensional homogeneity, Buckingham’s π theorem, Rayleigh’s method,

6 dimensionless numbers and their significance, Model (or similarity) laws,
application of model laws: Reynolds’s model law, Froude’s model law,
Euler’s Model law, Weber’s Model law, Mach model law, scale effect in
models.
Total 39

Contribution to Outcome

Upon completion of the course, students shall have ability to:

1. Analyze flow through pipes, various losses through pipes, pipe network and power
transmission through nozzle
2. Explain the concept of Laminar flow and velocity distribution through parallel plates and
pipes
3. Explain the concept of Turbulent flow and velocity distribution in pipes
4. Describe boundary layer concept , boundary layer separation and flow around submerged
bodies
5. Apply Moment of Momentum Principle

Page 59 of 77
 6. Explain the importance of dimensionless numbers, dimensional analysis and similarity
behavior of model and prototype

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests:
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remainingcontents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination (80 Marks):

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four questions need to be solved.
Recommended Books:
1. Hydraulics and Fluid mechanics: Dr P.M. Modi and Dr. S.M. Seth, Standard book House,
Delhi
2. Theory and Application of Fluid Mechanics: K. Subramanya, Tata McGraw hill publishing
company
3. Fluid Mechanics: Dr. A.K Jain, Khanna Publishers.
4. Fluid Mechanics and fluid pressure engineering: Dr. D.S. Kumar, F.K. Kataria and sons
5. Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics: Dr. S. K. Ukarande, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd. (Revised
Edition, 2012), ISBN97893 8116 2538
6. Fluid Mechanics: R.K. Bansal Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd.
7. Fluid Mechanics and Machinery: C.S.P.Ojha, R. Berndtsson and P.N. Chandramouli.
Oxford HigherEducation.
Reference Books:
1. Fluid Mechanics: Frank M. White, Tata Mc-Graw-Hill International edition.
2. Fluid Mechanics: Streeter White Bed ford, Tata McGraw International edition.
3. Fluid Mechanics with engineering applications: R.L. Daugherty, J.B.Franzini,
E.J.,Finnemore, TataMcGraw Hill New Delhi.
4. Hydraulics: James F. Cruise, Vijay P. Singh and Mohsen M. Sherif, CENGAGE Learning
India Pvt. Ltd.,Delhi.
*****************

Page 60 of 77
 Semester- IV

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL401 Structural Analysis Tutorial 01
Contact Hours Credits Assigned
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Total
Duration of End
Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average Sem Exam
Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Objectives:
1. To analyse for axial force in the Coplanar, perfect trusses and analysis of 3- Hinged arches.
2. To study the concept of Influence Line Diagrams and rolling loads.
3. To learn methods for evaluating rotation and displacement of frames and trusses.
4. To analyse the indeterminate structures using Flexibility methods and Stiffness methods.
5. To understand Plastic analysis.
Outcomes:
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Calculate axial forces in the Coplanar trusses by using Method of joints and method of
sections and also calculate radial shear, normal thrust and bending moment in parabolic 3-
Hinged arches.
2. Draw Influence Line Diagrams for axial forces in trusses, Reactions, SF and B M in beams
and find their values when rolling loads are passing over them..
3. Evaluate rotation and displacement at a joint of frames and deflection at any joint of truss and
will be able to compute static and kinematic indeterminacy of structure.
4. Analyse the indeterminate structures such as beams & simple rigid jointed frames using
Flexibility methods and direct stiffness method.

List of Tutorials and Assignments

Week Content Hours
(Activity)
1st week Analysis of Trusses and Three hinged elastic arches 2
(Tutorial) (Numericals based on this Module will be solved in tutorial room.)

Page 61 of 77
2nd week 1) Analysis of Trusses and Three hinged elastic arches 2
(Assignments) 2) Solve set of questions given by the course instructor or
3) Write a report on use of arches in civil engineering or
4) Difference in behaviour of trusses and arches if used in bridges
or
5) Write a report on limitations of trusses /arches or
6) Report Famous Truss structures / arch structures in world or
7) 6 Write a report on use of trusses in Civil Engineering
rd
3 week Influence line diagrams and rolling loads 2
(Tutorial) (Numericals based on this Module will be solved in tutorial room.)
th
4 week Influence line diagrams and rolling loads 2
(Assignments) 1) Solve set of questions given by the course instructor or
2) Write a report on use of arches in civil engineering or
3) Design an experiment for ILD of reactions of beam. or
4) Design an experiment for ILD of axial forces of a multi-bay
truss. or
5) write a report on IRC and classes of rolling loads
th
5 week Determinate and Indeterminate structure 2
(Tutorial) (Numericals based on this Module will be solved in tutorial room.)
6 th week Determinate and Indeterminate structure 2
(Assignments) 1) Solve set of questions given by the course instructor or
2) Prepare a chart explaining static and kinematic indeterminacy or
3) Write a computer program in C++ or MS-excel or similar for
ILD of reactions. or
4) Write a computer program in C++ or MS-excel or similar for
ILD for axial forces in Truss members.
th
7 week Analysis of indeterminate structures by Flexibility method 2
(Tutorial) (Numerical based on this Module will be solved in tutorial room.)
8th week Analysis of indeterminate structures by Flexibility method 2
(Assignments) 1) Solve set of questions given by the course instructor or
2) Prepare a poster on Flexibility and Stiffness approach or
3) Solve a set of 4-5 questions given by the course instructor on
Flexibility methods and validate the same using relevant
Structural Analysis or design software.

9th week Analysis of indeterminate structures by Direct stiffness method 2

(Tutorial) (Numericals based on this Module will be solved in tutorial room).
10th week Analysis of indeterminate structures by Direct stiffness method 2
(Assignments) 1) Solve set of questions given by the course instructor or
2) Write a report on Stiffness methods in civil engineering or
3) Prepare a poster on Clapeyron’s theorem for continuous beam.or
4) Solve a set of 4-5 questions given by the course instructor on
Direct stiffness method and validate the same using relevant
Structural Analysis or design software.

Page 62 of 77
 11th week Moment distribution method, Plastic analysis of structures 2
(Tutorial) (Numerical based on this Module will be solved in tutorial room.)
12th week Moment distribution method, Plastic analysis of structures 2
1) Solve set of questions given by the course instructor or
(Assignments) 2) Write a report on Plastic analysis of structures or
3) Solve a set of 4-5 questions given by the course instructor on
Moment distribution method and validate the same using
relevant Structural Analysis or design software.
th
13 week Viva-Voce Examination 2

• Assessment:

Term Work: Term work will include Tutorial work and Assignments both, Distribution of marks
for Term Work shall be as follows:
Tutorial work- : 15 Marks
Assignments- : 10 Marks
Total Term work : 25 Marks
Attendance : Apply multiplying Factor 0.5 to 1.0 to the above total.

End Semester Oral Examination

Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

*****************

Page 63 of 77
 Semester- IV

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL402 Surveying(Lab) 1.5

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 03 - - 1.5 - 1.5

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Total
Duration of
Test- Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Average End Sem Exam
II Exam
- - - - - 50 - 25 75
@ For the course “Surveying (Lab)” the oral examination shall be conducted in conjunction with
the practical conduction.

Course Objectives:

The students will be able to learn:

1) Various surveying instruments, their least counts, various parts and suitable uses.
2) Methods of measurements in the field.
3) Skills for collecting, recording and analysing the field data.
4) Advanced instruments and methods.
5) First hand practical experience by receiving field exposure to collect site specific data.
6) Setting out techniques.

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, learner will be able to:

1) Operate and use the surveying instruments according to the accuracy and suitability.
2) Measure linear and angular dimensions in horizontal and vertical planes.
3) Collect, record and analyse the field data systematically.
4) Prepare plans of the existing features on the ground, sections and contours.
5) Compute the area of land and the volume of earthwork.
6) Set out curves and foundation plans.

Page 64 of 77
List of practical’s and projects:

Perform minimum six practical’s out of 01 to 10 and all the projects are mandatory
Modul Detailed Contents Lab
e Sessions/Hr

1 Chain and cross staff surveying. 03 hrs

Measuring bearings of a closed traverse with prismatic compass 03 hrs
2
and computation of interior angles.
3 Simple and compound levelling 03 hrs
4 Measurement of horizontal and vertical angles. 03 hrs
5 Finding constants, heights and distances using tachometry. 03 hrs
6 Measurement of distances, bearings and area using total station. 03 hrs
7 Plane Table Surveying by intersection method. 03 hrs
Find an area of irregular figure using a conventional planimeter 03 hrs
8
and verify it using a digital planimeter.
9 Setting out a simple curve by Rankine’s method. 03 hrs
10 Setting out a simple foundation plan. 03 hrs
Projects
A survey camp of three days is to be arranged to execute the following projects for undergoing
the students through practical instructions in civil engineer's career with the actual field
exposure at an ideal site location .
Project I: Road project using Auto level for a minimum length of 500 m including
fixing of alignment, profile levelling, cross-sectioning at 20m interval,, plotting of ‘L’
1
section and ‘C’ section. (Two full imperial sheets, the first sheet with key plan and
‘L’ section and the second sheet covering any three typical Cross-sections)
Project II: Block Contouring project using Auto level for minimum 60 m × 60 m
2
area and generating contours by MS Excel. (Take contour interval as 0.2 meter)
Project III:Tachometric contouring project on a hilly area with at least two
3 instrument stations about 60 m to 100 m apart and generating contours by taking
contour intervals as 1 meter.
Assessment:

Teamwork
Including above practical work, projects and assignments, distribution of marks for Term Work
shall be as follows:
Practical Work- : 15 marks
Assignments - : 05 marks
Attendance- : 05 marks
Projects-
Field work : 15marks
Office work (Drawings) : 10marks
Total : 50marks

Page 65 of 77
● End Semester Practical/ Oral Examination

Practical Examination : 10 Marks

Oral Examination : 15 Marks.

Oral examination will be conducted after conduction of practical examination & it will be
based on term work & Practical examination

Reference Books:
1) Surveying and Levelling : R. Agor, Vol-I, 11th Edition, Khanna Publishers (ISBN 8174092358)
2) Surveying and Levelling :Kanetkar and Kulkarni,Vol-I, 24th Edition, Pune
VidyarthiGriha, Pune. (ISBN 8185825114)
3) Surveying and Levelling : Dr. B.C. Punmia, Vol.-I, 16th Edition, Vol -II 4th Edition,
Laxmi Publications (ISBN9788170088530)
4) Surveying and Levelling: N NBasak, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. (ISBN
9789332901537)
5) Surveying: Vol-I: Dr K.R. Arora, Standard Book House.
6) Surveying and Levelling (2nd Edition): R. Subramanian; Oxford Higher Education.
7) Surveying and Levelling (Vol.-I): S.K. Duggal, Tata Mc-Graw Hill
*****************

Page 66 of 77
 Semester- IV

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL 403 Building Materials & Concrete Technology 01
(Lab)

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Total
Duration of
Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average End Sem Exam
Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Objectives:
1) To determine physical and mechanical properties of materials used in the manufacturing of
concrete like cement and aggregates.
2) To test the physical attributes and mechanical strength of burnt clay bricks used in the
construction of structures.
3) To determine the various properties of fresh and hardened concrete with and without the
addition of admixtures.
4) To study the different basic non-destructive tests conducted in the laboratory or on site to
determine the durability and strength of existing concrete structures.
5) To utilize the knowledge of mix design in the manufacturing of concrete, in the laboratory.
6) To test the physical attributes and mechanical strength of timber and tiles used in the
construction of various components of the structure.
7) To understand the practical scenario of the commonly used building materials in terms of their
availability, cost and significance through market surveys.

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

1) Develop collaborative skills to work in a team/group
2) Test physical properties of cement, aggregates and concrete.
3) Test various other building materials like tiles, bricks and timber
4) Evaluate the effects of admixtures on physical properties of concrete.
5) Design the concrete mix.
6) To bridge the gap between theoretical and market/industrial practices by market surveys.

Page 67 of 77
List of Experiments (first seven are compulsory)

Lab
Module Detailed Contents
Sessions/Hr
Physical properties of OPC: Physical test, Fineness, Standard 02/04
1
consistency, Soundness, Setting time, Compressive strength.
Physical Properties of Fine and Course Aggregates: Specific 02/04
gravity, bulk density, Moisture content, Water absorption,
2
flakiness index, elongation index, Fineness modulus, Silt content
and bulking of sand
3 Tests on burnt clay bricks 01/02
Effect of w/c ratio on workability (slump cone, compaction 02/04
4
factor, V-B test, flow table) and strength of concrete
01/02
Study of admixtures and their effect on workability and strength
5
of concrete.
Non-destructive testing of concrete: Rebound hammer and 01/02
6
ultrasonic pulse velocity
7 Concrete mix design in the laboratory 01/02
8 Test on tiles(optional) 01/02
Compression test on timber (Parallel/ perpendicular to the 01/02
9
grains). (optional)
10 Market survey on common building materials (optional) 01/02

Site Visit/ Industrial Visit:

The students shall visit the brick, paver blocks, concrete block, cement, glass and RMC industrial
plants. They shall prepare a report of the visit and the same shall be evaluated by the concerned
teacher.
Assessment:
The term work shall consist of:
• Report of experiments performed.
• Industrial visit report to at least any one of the above mentioned industrial plants.
• Although minimum numbers of market surveys and industrial visits are prescribed, the
students shall be encouraged to perform more number of experiments and site/ industrial visits.

Distribution of the Term Work Marks:

The marks of the term work shall be judiciously awarded for the various components of the term
work and depending upon the quality of the term work including industrial/ site visit report. The
final certification and acceptance of term work warrants the satisfactory performance of laboratory
work by the student, appropriate completion of the assignments. Broadly, the split of the marks for
term work shall be as given below. However, there can be further bifurcation in the marks under
any of the heads to account for any sub-head therein.
Individual Practical performance : 07 Marks
Assignments : 03 Marks
Reports of experiment : 05 Marks
Page 68 of 77
Site Visit/Industrial visit : 05 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks
Total : 25 marks

Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be resorted
tom75% - 80%: 03 Marks; 81% - 90%: 04 Marks; 91% onwards: 05 Marks.

End Semester Practical/Oral Examination

The oral examination shall be based on the entire syllabus and term work comprising of the report
of the experiments/ practical conducted by the students and a detail report of the industrial/ site
visit.

Recommended Books:
1) A Building Construction: S.C. Rangwala, Charotar Publications, Gujarat, India.
2) Building Construction: S.P. Arora, Dr.S.P. Bindra,DhanpatRai Publication, New Delhi.
3) Building Construction: Dr. B.C. Punmia, A.K.Jain, A.R.Jain,Laxmi Publication., New Delhi.
4) Concrete Technology Theory and Practice: M.S. Shetty, S.Chand Publication.
5) Concrete Technology: M.L. Gambhir, Tata McGraw Hill, NewDelhi.
6) Concrete Technology: A.M. Neville & J. J. Brooks., ELBS-Longman.
7) Concrete Technology: A.M. Neville & Isaac Pitman, London.
8) Concrete Technology: A. R. Shanthakumar, Oxford University Press.
9) Materials of Construction: D. N. Ghose, Tata McGraw Hill, Delhi.
10) Building Materials: S.K. Duggal, New Age International Publishers.
11) Concrete Technology: D. F. Orchardi, Wiley, 1962.
12) Relevant codes: BIS, ACI & BS.

Reference Books/Reference Materials:

1) Engineering Materials: S.R. Rangwala,Charotar Publications.
2) Architectural Materials science: D. Anapetor, Mir Publishers.
3) Introduction to Engineering Materials: B. K. Agrawal, Tata McGraw Hill, NewDelhi.
4) Engineering Materials: P. Surendra Singh,Vani Education Books, New Delhi.
5) Building Materials (Products, Properties and Systems): M.L. Gambhir and NehaJamwal,
McGraw Hill Publications.
6) Properties of concrete: Neville, Isaac Pitman, London.
7) NPTEL Lecture series on Building Materials and Concrete Technology.

*****************

Page 69 of 77
 Semester- IV

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL404 Fluid Mechanics – II (Lab) 01

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Total
TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course Objectives:

The students will be able to learn:

1) to verify the basic fluid mechanics concepts experimentally

2) the fluid flow pattern in pipes
3) to estimate the losses in pipe flow
4) the velocity distribution in pipes

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, learner will be able to:

1) Verify the Reynold’s experiment

2) Estimate the viscosity of fluid
3) Calculate the losses in pipes
4) Assess the flow pattern and velocity distribution in pipe flow
5) learn the water hammer phenomenon through demonstration
6) learn the wind tunnel testing through demonstration

List of Experiments (Minimum Six)

Module Detailed Contents Lab

Sessions/Hr
1 Study of different types of flow using Reynold’s apparatus 02 hrs
2 Determination of viscosity of fluid 02 hrs
Estimation of the head loss due to friction incurred by a fluid along a 04 hrs
3 pipeline (To find the friction factor for the given pipes of different
sizes)
To determine different losses in pipe fittings (Estimation of the minor 04 hrs
4
losses)
5 Laminar flow through pipes 02 hrs
6 Velocity distribution in circular pipes 04 hrs
7 Turbulent flow through pipe 02 hrs
8 Study of Water Hammer phenomenon 04 hrs
9 Study of wind tunnel 02 hrs

Page 70 of 77
Assessment:

⚫ Term Work
Including Laboratory Work and Assignments both, Distribution of marks for Term Work shall be
as follows:
Laboratory work- : 15 Marks
Assignments- : 05 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks

⚫ End Semester Oral Examination

`
Reference Books:
1) Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines: R. K. Rajput, S. Chand and Company
2) Hydraulics and Fluid mechanics: Dr. P.M. Modi and Dr. S.M. Seth, Standard Book House,
Delhi
3) Hydraulics Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines: S. Ramamrutham, DhanpatRai Publishing
Company (P) Ltd-New Delhi
4) Theory and Application of Fluid Mechanics: K. Subramanian, Tata McGraw hill publishing
company, New Delhi.
5) Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics: Dr. S.K. Ukarande, Ane’s Books Pvt. Ltd. (Revised Edition
2012), ISBN 97893 8116 2538
6) Fluid Mechanics and fluid pressure engineering: Dr. D.S. Kumar, F.K. Kataria and sons
7) Fluid Mechanics: R.K. Bansal Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd.
*****************

Page 71 of 77
 Semester- IV

Course Code Course Name Credits

Skill Based Lab Course-II
CEL405 Total Station and Geographical Information 1
System

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 2 - - 1 - 1

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Total
Duration of
Sem. TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average End Sem Exam
Exam
- - - - - 50 - - 50

Objectives:
1) To enable the learners, operate the Total Station and generate its output in terms of plans,
elevations and 3D views
2) To enable the learners, operate the Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) receivers and
retrieve the information
3) To enable the learners work on a Geographical Information System (GIS) platform for
assimilating geographical data

Outcomes: Learner will be able to…

1) Operate a Total Station and traverse the field
2) Perform various operations like computing height of a structure, computing area of plot,
subdividing area, demarcating boundaries, etc. Using Total Station
3) Set out foundation plan using Total Station
4) Compute the point, line and area features using Global Navigation Satellite System
5) Plot various existing features in a geographic area on a GIS platform
6) Add attribute and perform various statistical operations in GIS

List of Experiments (Minimum Eight)

Module Detailed Contents Lab
Sessions/Hr
Introduction to concepts, fundamental features and working 02
1
principal of Total Station (TS)
2 Temporary settings of a TS in field and perform basic functions on 02

Page 72 of 77
 total station like traversing, area of open plot, height calculations,
etc.
Collect detailed features of a plot (comprising features such as 2-3 04
3 buildings, courtyards, security cabins, playgrounds, trees, gates,
poles, roads, drainage lines, etc.) using TS
Transfer data collected through TS on a convenient computer aided 02
4
drafting (CAD) software
Feeding a CAD plan in TS and setting out a foundation plan using 02
5
TS
Introduction to fundamental features of Global Navigation Satellite 02
6 System (GNSS) and collect point, line and polygon features through
a GNSS receiver
Computing latitudes, longitudes, altitudes of points, length of roads, 02
7
area of plots, etc. using a GNSS system
Basic introduction to compatibilities, utilities and attributes of 02
peculiar Geographical Information System (GIS) softwares
8
available in market w.r.t their various commands, features,
capabilities and functions.
Collecting ground points through GNSS and TS for integrating it 04
9 with spatial data obtained from a GIS platform like google earth,
openstreetnetwork, etc. and developing a model on a GIS software
Add various layers in term of attributes and perform various 04
10
statistical operations and queries in GIS

Assessment:
⚫ Term Work
Including Laboratory Work comprising of minimum 8 software generated sheets distribution of
marks for Term Work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work : 40 Marks (comprising of min 8 software generated sheets:
4 using TS and GNSS data in CADD tool and 4 using GIS tool)
Attendance : 10 Marks

*****************

Page 73 of 77
 Semester- IV

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEM 401 Mini Project -1B 1.5

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 03 - - 1.5 - 1.5

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End Total
Duration of
Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average End Sem Exam
Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Objectives
1) To acquaint with the process of identifying the needs and converting it into the problem.
2) To familiarize the process of solving the problem in a group.
3) To acquaint with the process of applying basic engineering fundamentalsto attempt solutions
to the problems.
4) To inculcate the process of self-learning and research.

Outcome: Learner will be able to…

1) Identify problems based on societal /research needs.
2) Apply Knowledge and skill to solve societal problems in a group.
3) Develop interpersonal skills to work as member of a group or leader.
4) Draw the proper inferences from available results through theoretical/
experimental/simulations.
5) Analyse the impact of solutions in societal and environmental context for sustainable
development.
6) Use standard norms of engineering practices
7) Excel in written and oral communication.
8) Demonstrate capabilities of self-learning in a group, which leads to life long learning.
9) Demonstrate project management principles during project work.

Guidelines for Mini Project

1) Students shall form a group of 3 to 4 students, while forming a group shall not be allowed less
than three or more than four students, as it is a group activity.
2) Students should do survey and identify needs, which shall be converted into problem statement
for mini project in consultation with faculty supervisor/head of department/internal committee
of faculties.
3) Students hall submit implementation plan in the form of Gantt/PERT/CPM chart, which will
cover weekly activity of mini project.
4) A log book to be prepared by each group, wherein group can record weekly work progress,
guide/supervisor can verify and record notes/comments.
Page 74 of 77
5) Faculty supervisor may give inputs to students during mini project activity;however, focus
shall be on self-learning.
6) Students in a group shall understand problem effectively, propose multiple solution and select
best possible solution in consultation with guide/ supervisor.
7) Students shall convert the best solution into working model using various components of their
domain areas and demonstrate.
8) The solution to be validated with proper justification and report to be compiled in standard
format of University of Mumbai.
9) With the focus on the self-learning, innovation, addressing societal problems and
entrepreneurship quality development within the students through the Mini Projects, it is
preferable that a single project of appropriate level and quality to be carried out in two
semesters by all the groups of the students. i.e. Mini Project 1 in semester III and IV. Similarly,
Mini Project 2 in semesters V and VI.
10) However, based on the individual students or group capability, with the mentor’s
recommendations, if the proposed Mini Project adhering to the qualitative aspects mentioned
above gets completed in odd semester, then that group can be allowed to work on the extension
of the Mini Project with suitable improvements/modifications or a completely new project idea
in even semester. This policy can be adopted on case by case basis.

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project:

Term Work
• The review/ progress monitoring committee shall be constituted by head of departments of
each institute. The progress of mini project to be evaluated on continuous basis, minimum
two reviews in each semester.
• In continuous assessment focus shall also be on each individual student, assessment based on
individual’s contribution in group activity, their understanding and response to questions.
• Distribution of Term work marks for both semesters shall be as below;
o Marks awarded by guide/supervisor based on log book : 10
o Marks awarded by review committee : 10
o Quality of Project report : 05
o
Review/progress monitoring committee may consider following points for
assessment based on either one year or half year project as mentioned in
general guidelines.

One-year project:
• In first semester entire theoretical solution shall be ready, including components/system
selection and cost analysis. Two reviews will be conducted based on presentation given by
students group.
• First shall be for finalisation of problem
• Second shall be on finalisation of proposed solution of problem.
• In second semester expected work shall be procurement of component’s/systems, building of
working prototype, testing and validation of results based on work completed in an earlier
semester.
• First review is based on readiness of building working prototype to be conducted.

Page 75 of 77
• Second review shall be based on poster presentation cum demonstration of working model in
last month of the said semester.

Half-year project:
• In this case in one semester students’ group shall complete project in all aspects including,
o Identification of need/problem
o Proposed final solution
o Procurement of components/systems
o Building prototype and testing
• Two reviews will be conducted for continuous assessment,
o First shall be for finalisation of problem and proposed solution
o Second shall be for implementation and testing of solution.

Assessment criteria of Mini Project.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following criteria;

1) Quality of survey/ need identification

2) Clarity of Problem definition based on need.
3) Innovativeness in solutions
4) Feasibility of proposed problem solutions and selection of best solution
5) Cost effectiveness
6) Societal impact
7) Innovativeness
8) Cost effectiveness and Societal impact
9) Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements
10) Effective use of skill sets
11) Effective use of standard engineering norms
12) Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader
13) Clarity in written and oral communication

• In one year, project, first semester evaluation may be based on first six criteria’s and
remaining may be used for second semester evaluation of performance of students in mini
project.
• In case of half year project all criteria’s in generic may be considered for evaluation of
performance of students in mini project.
Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project Practical/Oral Examination:
• Report should be prepared as per the guidelines issued by the University of Mumbai.
• Mini Project shall be assessed through a presentation and demonstration of working model
by the student project group to a panel of Internal and External Examiners preferably from
industry or research organisations having experience of more than five years approved by
head of Institution.
• Students shall be motivated to publish a paper based on the work in Conferences/students
competitions.

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following points;

Page 76 of 77
1) Quality of problem and Clarity
2) Innovativeness in solutions
3) Cost effectiveness and Societal impact
4) Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements
5) Effective use of skill sets
6) Effective use of standard engineering norms
7) Contribution of an individual’s as member or leader
8) Clarity in written and oral communication

*****************

Page 77 of 77
AC-29/06/2021
Item No.-6.2
 Syllabus for Approval

Title of the Course : Third Year in Bachelor of Civil Engineering

After Passing First Year Engineering as per the

Eligibility for Admission :
Ordinance 0.6242

Passing Marks : 40%

Ordinances / Regulations (if any) : Ordinance 0.6242

No. of Years / Semesters : 8 semesters

Level : Under Graduation

Pattern : Semester

Status : New

To be implemented from
: With effect from Academic Year: 2021-2022
Academic Year

Dr. S. K. Ukarande Dr Anuradha Muzumdar

Associate Dean Dean
Faculty of Science and Technology, Faculty of Science and Technology,
University of Mumbai, Mumbai University of Mumbai, Mumbai
 Preamble

To meet the challenge of ensuring excellence in engineering education, the issue of quality needs to be
addressed, debated and taken forward in a systematic manner. Accreditation is the principal means of
quality assurance in higher education. The major emphasis of accreditation process is to measure the
outcomes of the program that is being accredited. In line with this Faculty of Science and Technology
(in particular Engineering) of University of Mumbai has taken a lead in incorporating philosophy of
outcome based education in the process of curriculum development.

Faculty resolved that course objectives and course outcomes are to be clearly defined for each course,
so that all faculty members in affiliated institutes understand the depth and approach of course to be
taught, which will enhance learner’s learning process. Choice based Credit and grading system enables
a much-required shift in focus from teacher-centric to learner-centric education since the workload
estimated is based on the investment of time in learning and not in teaching. It also focuses on
continuous evaluation which will enhance the quality of education. Credit assignment for courses is
based on 15 weeks teaching learning process, however content of courses is to be taught in 13 weeks
and remaining 2 weeks to be utilized for revision, guest lectures, coverage of content beyond syllabus
etc.

There was a concern that the earlier revised curriculum more focused on providing information and
knowledge across various domains of the said program, which led to heavily loading of students in
terms of direct contact hours. In this regard, faculty of science and technology resolved that to minimize
the burden of contact hours, total credits of entire program will be of 170, wherein focus is not only on
providing knowledge but also on building skills, attitude and self learning. Therefore in the present
curriculum skill based laboratories and mini projects are made mandatory across all disciplines of
engineering in second and third year of programs, which will definitely facilitate self learning of
students. The overall credits and approach of curriculum proposed in the present revision is in line with
AICTE model curriculum.

The present curriculum will be implemented for Third Year of Engineering from the Academic year
2021-22. Subsequently this will be carried forward for Final Year Engineering in the academic years
2022-23.

Dr. S. K. Ukarande Dr Anuradha Muzumdar

Associate Dean Dean
Faculty of Science and Technology, Faculty of Science and Technology,
University of Mumbai, Mumbai University of Mumbai, Mumbai
 Incorporation and Implementation of Online Contents from
NPTEL/ Swayam Platform

The curriculum revision is mainly focused on knowledge component, skill-based activities and project-
based activities. Self-learning opportunities are provided to learners. In the revision process this time
in particular Revised syllabus of ‘C’ scheme wherever possible additional re source links of platforms
such as NPTEL, Swayam are appropriately provided. In an earlier revision of curriculum in the year
2012 and 2016 in Revised scheme ‘A' and ‘B' respectively, efforts were made to use online contents
more appropriately as additional learning materials to enhance learning of students.

In the current revision based on the recommendation of AICTE model curriculum overall credits are
reduced to 171, to provide opportunity of self -learning to learner. Learners are now getting sufficient
time for self-learning either through online courses or additional projects for enhancing their knowledge
and skill sets.

The Principals/ HoD’s/ Faculties of all the institute are required to motivate and encourage learners to
use additional online resources available on platforms such as NPTEL/ Swayam. Learners can be
advised to take up online courses, on successful completion they are required to submit certification for
the same. This will definitely help learners to facilitate their enhanced learning based on their interest.

Dr. S. K. Ukarande Dr Anuradha Muzumdar

Associate Dean Dean
Faculty of Science and Technology, Faculty of Science and Technology,
University of Mumbai, Mumbai University of Mumbai, Mumbai
 Preface

The engineering education in India is expanding and is set to increase manifold. The major challenge
in the current scenario is to ensure quality to the stakeholders along with expansion. To meet this
challenge, the issue of quality needs to be addressed, debated and taken forward in a systematic manner.
Accreditation is the principal means of quality assurance in higher education and reflects the fact that
in achieving recognition, the institution or program of study is committed and open to external review
to meet certain minimum specified standards. The major emphasis of this accreditation process is to
measure the outcomes of the program that is being accredited. Program Outcomes (POs) are essentially
a range of skills and knowledge that a student will have at the time of graduation from the program. In
line with this, Faculty of Technology of University of Mumbai has taken a lead in incorporating the
philosophy of outcome-based education (OBE) in the process of curriculum development from Rev-
2012 onwards and continued to enhance the curriculum further based on OBE in Rev -2016 and Rev-
2019 “C” scheme.
As Chairman and Members of Board of Studies in Civil Engineering, University of Mumbai, we are
happy to state here that, the Program Educational Objectives (PEOs) for Undergraduate Program were
finalized in a brain storming session, which was attended by more than 40 members from different
affiliated Institutes of the University, who are either Heads of Departments or their senior
representatives from the Department of Civil Engineering. The PEOs finalized for the undergraduate
program in Civil Engineering are listed below;
1. To prepare the Learner with a sound foundation in mathematical, scientific and engineering
fundamentals
2. To motivate the Learner in the art of self-learning and to use modern tools for solving real life
problems
3. To prepare the Learner for a successful career in Indian and Multinational Organisations and
for excelling in post-graduate studies
4. To motivate learners for life-long learning
5. To inculcate a professional and ethical attitude, good leadership qualities and commitment to
social responsibilities in the Learner’s thought process
In addition to the above listed PEOs, every institute is encouraged to add a few (2 -3) more PEOs suiting
their institute vision and mission
Apart from the PEOs, for each course of the program, objectives and expected outcomes from a
learner’s point of view are also included in the curriculum to support the philosophy of OBE. We
strongly believe that even a small step taken in the right direction will definitely help in providing
quality education to the major stakeholders.

Board of Studies in Civil Engineering

University of Mumbai

Dr. S. K. Ukarande Chairman Dr. V. Jothiprakash Member

Dr. D.D. Sarode Member Dr. K. K. Sangle Member
Dr. S. B. Charhate Member Dr. D. G. Regulawar Member
Dr. Milind Waikar Member Dr. A. R. Kambekar Member

Dr. R.B. Magar Member Dr. Seema Jagtap Member

 Undergraduate Program Structure for Third year Civil Engineering
University of Mumbai
(With Effect from A.Y. 2021-2022)
Semester - V

Course Teaching Scheme Credit Assigned

Course Name (Contact Hours)
Code
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
Theory of Reinforced Concrete
CEC501 03 - - 03 - - 03
Structures
CEC502 Applied Hydraulics 03 - - 03 - - 03
CEC503 Geotechnical Engineering-I 03 - - 03 - - 03
CEC504 Transportation Engineering 04 - - 04 - - 04
Department Level Optional
CEDLO501X 03 - - 03 - - 03
Course-1
Theory of Reinforced Concrete
CEL501 - 02 - - 01 - 01
Structures
CEL502 Applied Hydraulics - 02 - - 01 - 01
CEL503 Geotechnical Engineering-I - 02 - - 01 - 01
CEL504 Transportation Engineering - 02 - - 01 - 01
Professional Communication
CEL505
and Ethics
- 02 * +2 - - 02 - 02

CEM501 Mini Project – 2A - 04 $ - - 02 - 02

Total 16 16 - 16 08 - 24

Examination Scheme
Internal
End Exam
Course Assessment Term Pract
Course Name Sem Duration Total
Code Test Test Work /Oral
Avg. Exam (Hrs.)
- I – II
Theory of Reinforced
CEC501 20 20 20 80 03 - - 100
Concrete Structures
CEC502 Applied Hydraulics 20 20 20 80 03 - - 100
CEC503 Geotechnical Engineering-I 20 20 20 80 03 - - 100
CEC504 Transportation Engineering 20 20 20 80 03 - - 100
CEDLO501 Department Level Optional
20 20 20 80 03 - - 100
X Course -1
Theory of Reinforced
CEL501 - - - - - 25 25 50
Concrete Structures
CEL502 Applied Hydraulics - - - - - 25 25 50
CEL503 Geotechnical Engineering-I - - - - - 25 25 50
CEL504 Transportation Engineering - - - - - 25 25 50
Professional
CEL505 - - - - - 25 25 50
Communication and Ethics
CEM501 Mini Project – 2A - - - - - 25 25 50
Total 100 400 - 150 150 800
* Theory class to be conducted for full class
$ indicates work load of Learner (Not Faculty), for Mini Project
 Undergraduate Program Structure for Third year Civil Engineering
University of Mumbai
(With Effect from A.Y. 2021-2022)
Semester - V

Department Level Optional Course – 1

Course Code
Sr. No. Department Level Optional Course – 1
CEDLO501X
1 CEDLO5011 Modern Surveying Instruments and Techniques

2 CEDLO5012 Building Services & Repairs

3 CEDLO5013 Sustainable Building Materials

4 CEDLO5014 Advanced Structural Mechanics

5 CEDLO5015 Air and Noise Pollution & Control

6 CEDLO5016 Transportation Planning & Economics

7 CEDLO5017 Advanced Concrete Technology

 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC501 Theory of Reinforced Concrete Structures 03

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration of Total
End Sem Term
End Sem Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

Working Stress Method (WSM) makes use of the concept of modular ratio based on the higher
factor of safety in evaluating the stresses in two different materials of the RCC i.e., steel and
concrete. The Limit State Method (LSM) is based on the statistical probability which provides
the rational solution to the design problems. The philosophy which lies behind, LSM uses
multiple safety factors format which attempts to provide adequate safety at the ultimate load
as well as adequate serviceability at service load by considering all possible limit states. The
subject involves the application of working stress method and limit state method in the analysis
and design of various elements of the civil engineering structures.
Objectives
1 To develop clear understanding of design philosophy amongst the students for the design
of reinforced concrete structure using working stress method (WSM) and limit state
method (LSM).
2 To study various clauses of IS: 456-2000 and their significance in the RCC design.
3 To apply various concepts of LSM in the analysis and design of beams, slabs and columns.
4 To study the concept of Serviceability and Durability for deflection and crack width
calculation in RCC structures.
5 To develop the concept of design using design charts and curves for columns subjected to
axial load and moment.
6 To study the concept of reinforced concrete footing design subjected to axial load and
moment.
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Working Stress Method:

Concept of reinforced concrete, Working Stress Method
(WSM) of design for reinforced concrete, permissible stresses
1.1
as per IS:456-2000; stress- strain curve of concrete and steel,
1 characteristics of concrete and steel reinforcement. 06
Concept of balanced, under reinforced and over reinforced
1.2
sections.
Analysis and design of singly reinforced and doubly reinforced
1.3
rectangular beams for Flexure.
Limit State Method:
2.1 Introduction to limit state method of design as per IS:456-2000.
2 Concepts of probability and reliability, characteristic load, 03
characteristic strength, partial safety factors for loads and
2.2
materials, introduction to various limit states of collapse and
serviceability.
Limit State of Collapse: Flexure, Shear, Bond and Torsion:
Design of singly and doubly reinforced Rectangular and
3 3.1 12
Flanged sections for flexure, shear and bond.
3.2 Design of beams subjected to bending, shear and torsion.
Design of Slabs using Limit state method:
4 4.1 Design of simply supported one-way slabs as per IS:456-2000. 04
4.2 Design of simply supported two-way slabs as per IS:456-2000.
Limit State of Collapse – Compression:
Limit state of collapse: compression for short and slender
5.1
column.
5 Introduction to Members subjected to combined axial and 08
5.2
uniaxial as well as biaxial bending.
Development of interactive curves and their use in column
5.3
design.
Design of Foundations:
Design of Isolated square and rectangular footings subjected to
6 6.1 06
axial load and moment.
Introduction to basic concepts of combined rectangular pad
6.2
footing, slab beam type footing and Raft foundation.
Total 39
Contribution to Outcome

On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1. Understand the fundamentals of WSM and LSM.
2. Apply various clauses specified in IS: 456-2000 for designing structural members with
safety and economy.
3. Understand the use of readymade design charts and curves from Special Publications
of Bureau of Indian Standards.
4. Analyze and design various reinforced concrete elements such as beam, slab, column,
footings using the concept of Limit State Method.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining
contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1. Use of IS:456-2000 shall be allowed in the examination.
2. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
3. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
5. Four questions need to be solved in total.

Recommended Books:
1. Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures: Dayaratnam, P; Oxford and IBH.
2. Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete: Jain A. K, Nemchand and Bros., Roorkee
3. Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete: Shah and Karve, Structure Publications,
Pune.
4. Ultimate Strength Design for Structural Concrete: Arthur, P. D. and Ramakrishnan, V.,
Wheeler and Co. Pvt. Ltd.
5. Reinforced Concrete: H.J. Shah, Charotar Publishers, Anand.
6. Fundamentals of Reinforced Concrete: Sinha & Roy, S. Chand and Co. Ltd.
7. Illustrated Reinforced Concrete Design: Dr. V. L. Shah and Dr. S. R. Karve, Structure
Publications, Pune.
8. Reinforced Concrete Design: Wang, C. K., Salmon, C. G., and Pincheira, J. A, John
Wiley (2007), 7th Edition.
9. Reinforced Concrete Fundamentals: Ferguson, P. M., Breen, J. E., and Jirsa, J. O.,
John Wiley & Sons (1988) 5th Edition.
Reference Books:
Design of RCC structural Elements (RCC Vol-I): Bhavikatti, S. S., New Age
1.
International Publications.
2. Reinforced Concrete: Syal and Goel; Wheeler Publishers.
Reinforced Concrete Design: Pillai, S.U. and Menon, Devdas, Tata Mc-Graw Hill
3.
Publishing House, New Delhi.
Reinforced Concrete Design by S.N. Sinha, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Publishing House, New
4.
Delhi
5. Theory of Reinforced concrete structures by N. Subramanian, Oxford University Press.
RCC Design (WSM and LSM): Punmia, B. C., Jain, A. K., and Jain, Arun, K., Laxmi
6.
Publications.
Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete (as per IS: 456-2000): Punmia, B. C., Jain,
7.
A. K., and Jain, Arun, K., Laxmi Publications.
8. Relevant IS Codes: BIS Publications, New Delhi.
 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC502 Applied Hydraulics 03

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Total
Duration of
End Sem Term Pract. Oral
End Sem
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

The knowledge of this course is essential to understand facts, concepts of impact of jets,
Miscellaneous Hydraulic Machinery. Further it helps to understand the design aspects,
components, function and uses of centrifugal pump, turbines. It also helps to study the concept
of uniform Flow Through Open Channels, Non-Uniform Flow Through Open Channels.

Objectives

The students will be able to learn:

1 To introduce the concept of impact of jets.
2 To study hydraulic machines like centrifugal pumps and turbines.
3 To study various Miscellaneous Hydraulic Machinery.
4 To study the uniform flow through open channels and design of most economical section.

5 To study the non-uniform flow through open channels.

 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Impact of Jets
1 Impulse momentum principle, Jet striking flat plates, stationary and 07
moving vertical, inclined plates, hinged plates, curved vanes, series of
plates and vanes mounted on wheel, concept of velocity triangles.
Hydraulic Turbines
General layout of hydro-electric plant, heads, efficiencies of turbine,
2 classification, concept of velocity triangles working of Impulse 08
Turbine (Pelton Wheel), Reaction Turbine, Francis Turbine, Kaplan
Turbine, draft tube theory, specific speed, unit quantities,
Characteristic curves, Cavitation.
Centrifugal Pumps
3 Work done, heads, efficiencies, Minimum speed: series parallel 04
operation, Multistage pumps, concept of velocity triangles, specific
speed, model testing, priming, characteristic curves, NPSH, cavitation.
Miscellaneous Hydraulic Machinery
4 03
Hydraulic Ram, Press, Accumulator, Intensifier, Crane and Lift.
Uniform Flow Through Open Channels
Uniform Flow: Flow through open channel: Definition, types of
channels, Prismatic, non-prismatic channels, Types of flows in
5 channels, Uniform flow: steady flow and unsteady flow, laminar and 07
turbulent flow, subcritical flow, supercritical flow, Chezy’s formula,
Manning’s formula, hydraulically efficient channel cross-sections
(most economical sections).
Non-Uniform Flow Through Open Channels
Concept of Specific energy and specific energy curve, Dimensionless
specific energy discharge curve, applications of specific energy and
6 Momentum principle to open channel flow, specific force. Gradually 10
varied flow, equation for gradually varied flow, back water curve and
afflux, Introduction to surface profiles, Hydraulic jump and standing
wave.
Total 39
 Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Describe impact of jet on stationary, moving, hinged and series of plates also solve the
numerical based on forces acting on it.
2 Distinguish various types of turbines, Characteristic curves and its components.
3 Analyze Centrifugal pumps by incorporating velocity triangle diagrams.
4 Know the working mechanism of various Hydraulic machines.
5 Identify the hydraulic behaviour of open channel flow and design the most economical
section of channels.
6 Explain mathematical relationships for hydraulic jumps, surges, and critical, uniform,
and gradually-varying flows.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only four questions need to be solved in total.

Recommended Books:
1 Hydraulics and Fluid mechanics: Dr. P.M. Modi and Dr. S.M. Seth, Standard Book
House, Delhi.
2 Theory and Application of Fluid Mechanics: K. Subramanian, Tata McGraw hill
publishing company, New Delhi.
3 Fluid Mechanics: Dr. A.K Jain, Khanna Publishers.
4 Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics: Dr. S.K. Ukarande, Ane’s Books Pvt. Ltd. (Revised
Edition 2012), ISBN 97893 8116 2538.
5 Fluid Mechanics and fluid pressure engineering: Dr. D.S. Kumar, F.K. Kataria and
sons.
6 Fluid Mechanics: R.K. Bansal Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd.
7 Flow through open channels, K.G. Ranga Raju. (1993) : New Delhi : Tata
McGrawHill, c1993.
8 Flow Through Open Channels. Rajesh Srivastava (2007): Oxford University Press,
2007, pbk, 432 p, ISBN: 0195690385.
Reference Books:
1 Fluid Mechanics: Frank M. White, Tata Mc-Graw Hill International Edition.
2 Fluid Mechanics: Streeter White Bedford, Tata Mc-Graw International Edition.
Fluid Mechanics with Engineering Applications: R.L. Daugherty, J.B. Franzini, E.J.
3
Finnemore, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, New Delhi.
Hydraulics: James F. Cruise, Vijay P. Singh and Mohsen M. Sherif, CENGAGE
4
Learning India (Pvt.) Ltd.
Introduction to Fluid Mechanics: Edward J. Shaughnessy, Jr, Ira M. Katz, James P.
5
Schaffer. Oxford Higher Education.
6 Open channel Hydraulics: Chow, V.T., McGraw Hill International, New York.
7 Open Channel Flow: Henderson F.M., McGraw Hill International, New York.
 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC503 Geotechnical Engineering-I 03

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Total
Duration of
End Sem Term Pract. Oral
End Sem
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

Around all civil engineering structures are supported by soil and rock. Rock is rarely occurring
and hence, mostly the supporting medium is soil. The stability of structure depends on the
stability of supporting medium. Therefore, geotechnical analysis is required to be carried out.
Geotechnical analysis depends on the basic understanding of physical properties of soil which
are useful for determining the strength, compressibility, drainage characteristics etc. Soil
mechanics is the basic tool for geotechnical engineering, which is the specialized section of
civil engineering. Soil is also used as a construction material to build various civil structures,
viz., dams, embankment etc. Thus, it is very essential to understand various concepts involved
in this course of Geotechnical Engineering-I.
Objectives
To study origin and mode of formation of soil as well as functional relationships among
1
different unit weights, volumetric ratios, and water content.
2 To study clay mineralogy and plasticity characteristics of soils.
3 To comprehend particle size distribution and classification of soils as per IS code .
4 To study permeability and seepage flow of water through the soil.
5 To understand the concept of total stress, neutral stress and effective stress in soil.
To understand compaction characteristics of soils as well as the techniques of soil
6 exploration, assessing the subsoil conditions and engineering properties of various soil
strata.
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Introduction to Geotechnical Engineering, Basic Definitions &
Relationships
Definitions and scope of Geotechnical Engineering: rocks, soil,
1.1 origin & mode of formation and types of soil obtained, soil
mechanics, rock mechanics, geotechnical engineering.
Soil phase systems, volumetric ratios: void ratio, porosity,
1.2
degree of saturation, air voids, air content.
1 Weight-volume relationship: different unit weights, water 07
1.3 content, specific gravity of soil solids, mass and absolute
specific gravity.
Functional relationships among different unit weights,
1.4
volumetric ratios, and water content.
1.5 Relative density, relative compaction.
Different methods to determine water content, specific gravity
1.6
and unit weight of soil.
Clay Mineralogy and Plasticity Characteristics of Soils
Explanation about clay minerals, e.g., Montmorillonite, Illite
2.1 and Kaolinite; formation of clay minerals and their role in
plastic behavior of soil.
2 Definition of plasticity of soil, consistency of soil, definition & 06
2.2
determination of liquid limit, plastic limit, shrinkage limit.
Definitions of shrinkage parameters, plasticity index, liquidity
index, consistency index, flow index, toughness index, activity,
2.3
sensitivity and thixotropy of soil. Importance of consistency
limits.
Particle Size Distribution and Classification of Soils
Wet & dry sieve analysis, Sedimentation analysis: Stoke’s law,
3.1 Hydrometer method of analysis, Limitation of sedimentation
analysis.
3 Particle size distribution curve/ gradation curve and its uses. 06
3.2
Introduction to cohesive and cohesionless soil.
Necessity of soil classification, Indian standard particle size
3.3 classification, Indian standard soil classification system as per
IS: 1498 -1970, boundary classification.
Permeability of Soils & Seepage Analysis
Types of soil water, definition of hydraulic head, hydraulic
4.1 gradient, Darcy’s law, validity of Darcy’s law, permeability of
soil.
4 Determination of coefficient of permeability of soil in lab using 08
constant head and variable head methods, factors affecting
4.2 permeability of soil, effect of permeability on various properties
of soil, determination of in-situ permeability with pumping out
and pumping in tests.
 4.3 Permeability of stratified soil deposits.
Definition of seepage and its importance for the analysis &
design of hydraulic structures, graphical representation of
4.4 seepage by flow net diagram, definition of flow line,
equipotential line, flow channel, flow field, characteristics of
flow net, use of flow net, phreatic line.
4.5 Factor of safety against piping failure.
Effective Stress Principle
Definition of geostatic stresses, total stress, neutral stress/ pore
5 5.1 05
water pressure, effective stress.
Effect of water table fluctuations, surcharge, capillary action,
5.2
seepage pressure on effective stress; quick sand condition.
Compaction of Soil & Soil Exploration
Theory of compaction, determination of optimum moisture
6.1 content (OMC) & maximum dry density (MDD) in laboratory
by conducting the light and heavy compaction tests.
Factors affecting the compaction, effect of compaction on
6.2 properties of soil, soil structure, placement water content,
6 relative compaction, Proctor needle method for compaction. 07
Necessity of soil exploration, methods of soil investigation,
methods of boring, disturbed and undisturbed soil samples, soil
6.3
sampling and samplers, number and spacing of bore holes,
depth of bore holes.
6.4 Penetrometer tests: SPT, SCPT and DCPT.
6.5 Representation of data with borehole logs.
Total 39

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Explain the basic concepts of the physical and engineering properties of soil and derive
the relationships among various unit weights & other parameters.
2 Comprehend clay mineralogy and plasticity behavior of clay.
3 Analyze grain size distribution of soil and classify the soil as per IS code.
4 Evaluate the coefficient of permeability of different types of soils and draw the flow
net diagram to estimate seepage discharge.
5 Compute the effective stress and pore water pressure inside the soil mass under
different geotechnical conditions.
6 Evaluate the compaction parameters in laboratory and field as well as understand the
necessity and methods of soil exploration.
Internal Assessment 20 Marks
Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
3
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only four questions need to be solved in total.

Recommended Books:
Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics: Gopal Ranjan, A S R Rao; New Age International
1
Publishers.
Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering: V. N. S. Murthy; CBS Publishers &
2
Distributors
Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering: K. R. Arora; Standard Publishers and
3
Distributors, New Delhi.
Soil Mechanics and Foundations: B. C. Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain, Arun Kumar Jain;
4
Laxmi Publications (P) LTD., New Delhi
5 Geotechnical Engineering: C. Venkatramaiah; New Age International Private Limited
6 Fundamentals of Soil Engineering: D. W. Taylor; John Wiley & Sons.

Reference Books:
An Introduction to Geotechnical Engineering: Robert D. Holtz, William D. Kovacs;
1
Prentice-Hall, New Jersey
2 Soil Mechanics: R. F. Craig; Spon Press, Taylor and Fransis Group
3 Soil Mechanics: T. W. Lambe, R. V. Whitman; John Wiley & Sons
4 Relevant Indian Standard Specifications Codes, BIS Publications, New Delhi
Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice: Karl Terzaghi, Ralph B Peck, Gholamreza
5
Mesri; John Wiley & Sons
 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC504 Transportation Engineering 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
04 - - 04 - - 04

Theory Term
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Total
Duration of
End Sem Term Pract. Oral
End Sem
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

An efficient transportation system is essential for sustainable economic development of the

country and plays a significant role in promoting national and global integration. An efficient
Transportation system helps in increasing productivity and enhances competitiveness of the
economy. Hence, the transport sector is considered as an important component of the economy
and a common tool used for development. Three basic modes of transportation include land,
water and air. The course deals with understanding of basics of different modes of
transportation (Highways, railways, airways and waterways). The highways owing to its
flexibility in catering door-to- door service is one of the important modes. This course deals
with the investigation, planning, design, construction and maintenance of highways in addition
to traffic planning, operation and control.
Objectives
1 To understand the technical aspects of Railways, Airways and Waterways.
2 To carry out Planning and design of geometric elements of Highways.
To study various traffic studies and to understand elements of Traffic Engineering for
3
efficient planning and control.
To study Requirements of Highway materials and to design Rigid and flexible pavements
4
using IRC codes.
To study methods of construction of Rigid and Flexible pavements, use of soil
5
stabilization and drainage to highways.
To design the overlay on basis of pavement evaluation and failure identification on rigid
6 and flexible pavements.
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Introduction to Transportation Systems
Introduction to Transportation Engineering, Comparison of
1.1 various modes of transportation (Roadways, Railways, Airways
and Waterways).
Introduction to Railway Engineering: Cross sectional elements
of railway track (Foundation, Ballast, Sleepers and Rail),
1 1.2 10
Introduction to turnout, Super elevation design, Negative Super
elevation, Construction and Maintenance of Railway track.
Introduction to Airport Engineering: Elements of Airport, Site
1.3 selection of Airport, Design of Runway length, Taxiway and
Exit Taxiway design.
Introduction to Waterways: Definition of Docks, Harbor and
1.4
Ports. Elements and types of Docks, Harbor and Port.
Planning and Geometric Design of Highways
Classification of roads based on various criteria, Road
development plans, agencies related to highway development,
2.1
Highway alignment (basic requirement and factors governing),
hill roads, Surveys for highway location.
Terrain Classification, Vehicular Characteristics, Cross section
2.2 elements of highways (width of carriage way, shoulders,
2 medians, width of road way, right of way, camber & its profile). 10
Design speed, sight distance, perception time, break reaction
2.3 time, analysis of safe sight distance, analysis of overtaking sight
distance, intersection sight distance.
Horizontal curves: design of super elevation, its provisions,
2.4 minimum radius of horizontal curves, widening of pavement,
transition curves.
Gradients: different types, maximum, minimum, ruling
2.5
exceptional, grade compensation on curves.
Traffic Engineering
Introduction to various traffic studies such as speed study,
volume study, parking study, accident study, O&D study etc.
Speed study: methods to determine speed, types of speed (Spot
speed, Design speed, Upper & lower limit speeds, Mean -
3.1
Median and Modal speed);
3 Traffic Volume study (flow): Definition, AADT, ADT, Design 10
volume, methods of determining traffic volume.
Traffic density: Definition, importance.
Introduction to Relationship between Speed, density and
3.2 volume. Capacity: Q-K-V curve, Different types and factors
affecting capacity, Concept of PCU and LOS.
Introduction to traffic control devices Traffic signs, signals (no
3.3
design), road marking.
 Different types of Intersections-At-grade and Grade Separated;
3.4
Grade separated interchanges; rotary intersection.
Pavement Material and Design
Types of pavements, comparison of flexible and rigid
pavements, Requirements of pavement materials,
Soil: requirement of soils as subgrade material, CBR test.
Aggregate: Requirements of aggregate as Pavement material,
Tests on aggregate with specified values.
4.1
Bitumen: Requirements of bitumen as pavement material test
on bitumen with specified values, variants of bitumen
(Modified bitumen) and its uses.
4 Introduction to Bituminous mix design using Marshall Stability 12
test.
Flexible pavement design: Concepts related to flexible
pavement design such as tyre pressure, contact pressure, ESWL,
4.2
VDF and LDF. IRC approach for design (IRC: 37- 2001, IRC:
37- 2012), also IRC SP 72-2007/2015 and IRC 77 2008.
Rigid pavement design: Modulus of subgrade reaction,
equivalent radius of resisting section, radius of relative stiffness,
4.3 stresses on rigid pavement, combine loading temperature
stress.; Design of rigid pavements (IRC: 58- 2002; IRC: 58-
2011, IRC: 58- 2015. IRC: SP- 62-2004, IRC: SP- 62-2014)
Pavement Construction, Soil Stabilization and Drainage
Construction of different types of roads: water bound macadam
(WBM) road, WMM, bituminous pavements, cement concrete
5.1 pavement. And joint (As per IRC, MORTH specifications)
jointed reinforced, continuously reinforced; fiber reinforced;
roller compacted concrete pavements.
5 Soil Stabilization: Significance, Principle of soil stabilization, 05
5.2 different methods of soil Stabilization, use of Geosynthetics in
highways and allied structures.
Highway drainage: Necessity/ Significance, mode of ingress of
water in highway structure, Different methods of drainage-
5.3
surface and subsurface drainage inkling for the roads in hilly
areas.
Pavement Evaluation, Failures and Maintenance
Evaluation of pavement, Structural and functional evaluation,
methods of structural evaluation (working of Benkelman beam,
6.1
FWD, LWD), methods of functional evaluation (working of
6 Bump indicator, profilometric systems) 05
Distress / failure in Rigid and flexible pavement, reasons and
6.2
measures.
Strengthening of existing pavement, Overlay and its types,
6.3
design of overlay (Benkelman beam method)
Total 52
 Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Compare various modes of transportation and understand basic technical aspects of
railways, airways and waterways.
2 Understand different road plans, requirements of alignments and Design horizontal and
vertical geometrical elements of highways.
3 Carry out different traffic studies and analyze basic parameters of traffic engineering
for efficient planning and control of traffic.
4 Design the flexible and rigid pavement as per relevant IRC codes.
5 Construct different types of pavements, use of soil stabilization and planning of
highway drainage.
6 Carry out structural and functional evaluation of pavement, identify the failures and
design the overlay.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
3
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only four questions need to be solved in total.

Recommended Books:
A Course of Railway Engineering: Saxena, S. C. and Arora, S. P.; Dhanpat Rai Sons,
1
New Delhi.
Airport Planning Design: Khanna, S.K., Arora, M.G.and Jain, J.J.;Nemchand Bros.,
2
Roorkee.
3 Docks and Harbour Engineering: Bindra, S. P.; Dhanpat Rai and Sons,New Delhi.
Highway Engineering: Khanna, S.K. and Justo, C. E. G.; Nem Chand and Bros.,
4
Roorkee.
Principles, Practice and Design of Highway Engineering (Including Airport
5
Engineering)” Sharma, S.K.; S. Chand and Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
Highway Material and Pavement Testing: Dr. S. K. Khanna, Dr. C. E. G. Justo and Dr.
6
A. Veeraragavan. Nem Chand and Bros., Roorkee, India.
Reference Books:
1 Indian Railway Track: Agarwal, M. M., Suchdeva Press New Delhi.
2 Planning Design of Airport: Horonjeff Mckelrey, Tata Mc-Graw Hill India Publishing
House, New Delhi.
3 Design and Construction of Ports and Marine Structures: Quinn, A. D., Tata Mc-Graw
Hill India Publishing House.
4 Transportation Engineering and Planning: C.S. Papacostas and P.D. Prevedouros;
Prentice Hall India Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
5 Principles of Transportation Engineering: Chakrabory, Partha and Das, Animesh;
Prentice Hall India Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
6 Transportation Engineering: Khisty, C.J. and Lall, Kent, B.; Prentice Hall India
Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
7 Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning: Kadiyali, L.R., Khanna Publishers, Delhi.
8 Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering: Kadiyali, L. R.; Khanna Publsihers,
Delhi.
9 Relevant specifications of MORTH and relevant IRC codes.
 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

Department Level Optional Course - 1
CEDLO5011 03
Modern Surveying Instruments and Techniques

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Total
Duration of
End Sem Term Pract. Oral
End Sem
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

Revolutionary changes have taken place in the last few years in surveying instruments and
techniques that are used for measuring level differences, distances, angles, areas, volumes, etc.
This has become possible due to the advent of electronics in the surveying instruments. With
rapid advancements in the technology and availability of cheaper and innovative electronic
components, these instruments have become affordable and user friendly.
This course outlines the advancements in instruments and techniques such as digital levels,
electronic distance measuring instruments, electronic theodolites, total stations, GPS, GIS,
Remote Sensing, drone survey, aerial photogrammetry and hydrographic survey. It also makes
the learner industry-ready with respect to the applications of the modern tools in data capturing
and further in mapping using appropriate software.
Objectives
Understand the working principles and methodologies of modern surveying instruments
1
and compare with conventional instruments.
Exhibit the concepts of Global Positioning System, Geographical Information system
2
and remote sensing techniques.
3 Demonstrate the importance of Aerial photogrammetry in surveying works,
4 Develop recent methods of maintaining land records,
5 Study the art of delineating the levels underwater bodies.
Highlight the modern techniques in the field of surveying and mapping using various
6 softwares.
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Introduction to Modern Surveying Instruments:

Principles governing modern instruments and comparison with
1.1
the conventional instruments.
1 E.D.M. Electromagnetic spectrum, Electromagnetic distance 06
measurement, Instruments – Digital planimeter, Auto Level,
1.2
Laser Level, Electronic Digital Theodolite, Total Station, Scan
station, Smart Station (Total station with GPS).
Geoinformatics
Global Positioning System- Global Positioning System –
working principle and methods, Different Approaches to use
2.1
GPS and their accuracies, Advantages of GPS in Navigation,
Survey, Planning and Mapping.
Geographical Information System -Introduction, Definition,
Objectives, Components (people, procedure, hardware,
software & data) & functions (input, manipulation,
management, query & analysis and visualization) of GIS.
2 2.2 12
Coordinate systems and projections, Geo-referencing, GIS data
– spatial (Raster & vector) & spatial data. Introduction to
vector and raster data analysis such as network analysis, overlay
analysis etc. for vector, DEM, Management of a spatial data.
Remote Sensing introduction, Definition, Necessity,
Importance and use; Basic concepts in Remote Sensing, Basic
Laws of electromagnetic radiation, Atmospheric effects on
2.3
radiation, Interaction of EM energy with matter, Resolution in
remote sensing, Satellite remote sensing, Problems confronting
remote sensing system. Ideal and Real remote sensing systems.
Aerial Photogrammetry
Introduction, principle and uses of Aerial photographs,
3 3.1 Definitions, of different terms, Scale of vertical and tilted 06
photograph (simple problems), Ground Coordinates.
Relief Displacements, Ground control, Procedure of aerial
3.2
survey, overlaps and mosaics, Stereoscopes
Cadastral Surveying
Cadastral Surveying: Contemporary Techniques of maintaining
4.1
4 survey records, 7-12 Extracts, Form-8 (Namuna-8). 04
Role of Survey Department, Role of revenue department.
4.2 Soft/digitized formats of land records, Comparison with
conventional record keeping
Hydrographic Surveying
5 Hydrographic Surveying: Objects, Applications, establishing 04
5.1 controls, Shore line survey, Sounding, sounding equipment,
Methods of locating soundings – conventional and using GPS.
 Reduction of soundings, Plotting of soundings, Nautical sextant
5.2
and its use, Tides and tide gauges, determination of MSL.
Applications of Modern Survey Techniques and Map Preparation
Using Software
6 Applications of Total Station, GIS, GPS, Remote sensing, 07
6.1
LIDAR, Drones in Civil Engineering.
6.2 Introduction of GRAM++, Q-GIS, Map Info etc.
Total 39

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Compare modern surveying instruments with conventional instruments.
2 Elucidate the utility of geoinformatics in surveying data collection and analysis.
3 Explain the utility of Aerial photogrammetry in surveying works.
4 Highlight the improvement in land record keeping and governance using modern tools.
5 Describe the procedure of hydrographic surveying and mapping.
6 Apply modern surveying tools to solve complex problems and demonstrate essential
skills for working on surveying software.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only four questions need to be solved in total.
Recommended Books:
1 Agor R, Advanced Surveying, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi (ISBN9788174909053).
Kanetkar, T.P. and Kulkarni, S.V., Surveying and Levelling Vol. II, Pune Vidhyarthi
2
Gruh Publication (ISBN9782508807185).
Arora, K.R., Surveying Vol. III, Standard Book House. New Delhi
3
(ISBN9788189401276).
Basudeb Bhatta, Remote Sensing and GIS, Third Edition, Oxford University Press, New
4
Delhi. ISBN: 9780199496648
B. C. Punmia, Ashok K Jain, Arun K Jain, Advance Surveying, Laxmi Publications
5
(ISBN 9788170088530)
R. Subramanian, Surveying and levelling, Oxford University Press, New Delhi
6
(ISBN9780198085423)
P.Dong , Q.Chen, Lidar Remote Sensing and applications ,CRC Press (ISBN
7
9781138747241)

Reference Books:
Basudeb Bhatta, Remote Sensing and GIS, Third Edition, Oxford University Press, New
1
Delhi. ISBN: 9780199496648
T.M Lillesand, R.W Kiefer, and J.W Chipman, Remote sensing and Image
2
interpretation, 5th edition, John Wiley and Sons, India; ISBN: 978-1-118-34328-9
Kaplan E.D and Hegarty C.J., Understanding GPS: principles and applications, Artech
3
House (ISBN978-1-63081-058-0)
Wolf P.R. and Dewitt B.A., Elements of Photogrammetry, McGraw Hill,(ISBN 978-
4
0072924541)
5 DeMers M.N., Fundamentals of GIS, John Wiley (ISBN978-0470129067)
Gibson P.J., Introductory Remote Sensing: Principles and Concepts, Routledge (ISBN0
6
415 18962 4).
 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

Department Level Optional Course - 1
CEDLO5012 03
Building Services and Repairs

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Total
Duration of
End Sem Term Pract. Oral
End Sem
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

The building services are based on engineering operations of buildings & the built
environment. Building services are responsible for the environment in which we live & work.
Building service systems are complex. They are typically a major source of cost & potential
problems in building service conditions. Fundamental knowledge of how mechanical,
electrical, plumbing & other systems work & interact is important to the construction
professionals. This course provides an introduction to building service systems which include
the study of design, interfaces & specifications of various building services in buildings. For
an existing building, it is necessary to be in a good condition to perform the intended functions.
Adequate maintenance extends the building life & ensures the safety of occupants. Most of the
structures are getting old & are in the dire need of the repair and maintenance. Hence, there is
a huge employment potential in conformity with the field of repair and maintenance. This
course, therefore, finds its place in the curriculum such that the pupils can acquire the
competency in this area. The course deals with the different building services, health
monitoring of buildings, their maintenance, repair materials and repair methodologies.
Objectives
1 To understand the concepts of mechanical systems in buildings such as lifts, escalators,
HVAC systems, pumps & their applications.
2 To understand design concepts of electrical system, safety and illumination
fundamentals.
3 To get familiar with the plumbing system and services in buildings related to water
supply, drainage, gas supply and firefighting installations.
4 To learn about causes of distress of concrete structures and learn various instrumental
testing methods for Condition assessment & evaluation of structure and assess the
extent of repairs.
5 To acquire the knowledge of repair materials and repair methodologies for
rehabilitation of RCC structures.
6 To learn implementing repair process and to follow safety during construction work.

Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Building services: Mechanical systems.

Lifts/elevators, escalators, conveyors: their components,
1.1
capacity and principles of working, common problems.(3L)
1 Motors, Generators, Pumps, HVAC Systems - Heating systems, 06
Cooling Systems, Packaged HVAC, types, capacity,
1.2
components and their principles of working, common
problems.(3L)
Building services: Electrical systems & Illumination in Buildings
Electrical grids and supply system: Layout of substations
Transformers & switch gears, Main & distribution boards,
electrical systems in buildings, Single / Three phase supply, ISI
specifications, electrical load, electrical layout plan in a
2.1 building, Types of wires, wiring system & their choice, Solar
energy, CCTV, LAN.
Protective devices in electrical installation: Earthing for safety,
Types of Earthing, fuses, circuit breakers, lightening
arrester.(4L)
2 Principles of Illumination Design: Visual task, Factors affecting 07
visual task, Luminous flux, candela, solid angle illumination,
utilization factor.
Modern theory of light &color: Synthesis of Light, Additive &
Subtractive synthesis of colour, classification of lighting,
2.2 artificial lights sources, spectral energy distribution, luminous
efficiency, color temperature, colour rendering.
Level of illumination: Lighting for stores, offices, school,
hospitals and house lighting, elementary idea of special features
required and minimum level of illumination required in
buildings.(3L)
Building services: Plumbing Systems in Building
Water Distribution system: Material for service pipes, service
3 connection, size of service pipe, Water meter, valves and 06
3.1
storage tanks, water requirement for domestic use and
firefighting.(2L)
 Drainage system: Pipe and traps, system of plumbing, house
drainage plans, Chambers- gradient and spacing, manholes,
3.2
septic tanks and soak pit, Introduction to rain water harvesting
system.(2L)
Other plumbing systems: Fire safety, fire-fighting installations,
3.3
types and purpose, piped gas supply systems, AC ducting.(2L)
Deterioration of Concrete Structures & Condition assessment
Durability & Causes of deterioration of concrete structures:
effects of climate, moisture, temperature, chemical, wear,
erosion & loading on serviceability & durability. Design errors
4.1
& construction errors, causes of seepage & leakage in concrete
structures, formation of cracks including those due to
corrosion.(2L)
4 Condition Survey, Evaluation & Damage Assessment: 06
Structural audit and bye laws. Diagnostic methods & analysis.
Destructive, semi-destructive and non-destructive methods:
core test, carbonation test, chloride test, petrography, corrosion
4.2
analysis, cover meter test, rebound hammer test, ultrasonic
pulse velocity test, and crack measurement techniques,
Concrete endoscopy & thermal imaging, pull- off test & pull-
out test.(4L)
Repair Materials & Methodologies For Repairs
Repair analysis, Repair materials: and their desired properties,
Polymer modified mortar/ concrete, micro concrete, bonding
chemicals, protective materials and their properties for moisture
barrier systems, water-proofing of concrete structures, Systems
5.1
like integral, crystalline, coatings, membranes, joints sealants,
5 crack repair fillers, corrosion resistant steels, Pre-packed zinc 08
sacrificial anode, Snap-On zinc mesh anode CP system,
corrosion inhibitors, rust solvents.(4L)
Repair methodologies: Crack and patch repair, Injection
grouting, surface coatings, column jacketing, guniting,
5.2
shotcrete, Ferroconcrete, FRP, Carbon fiber wrapping, methods
of rebar corrosion protection, cathodic protection.(4L)
Repair Process Implementation and Safety During Repairs
Legal Documentation and Records: Estimates of repair work,
procedure and flow chart for repairs, Bill of quantities,
6.1
6 Tendering, Work order, Agreement and Contract, Measurement 06
book, bills, security deposits, role of PMC.(3L)
Safety during Repairs: Causes of accidents, safety signs,
6.2 barricading, insurance, Temporary Support structures such as,
formwork, shuttering, centering, staging and scaffolding.(3L)
Total 39
 Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Apply the knowledge of working & installation of mechanical utility services in
buildings.
2 Understand the electrical supply lines, materials, safety devices and illumination
systems used in buildings.
3 Investigate and learn operations and adopt appropriate materials in plumbing systems
& integrate the same into the building projects.
4 Assess the structural health of the buildings & adopt repair strategy to the damaged
structures.
5 Implement the right methods and materials for repairing the concrete structures and
also decide the sequence of operations.
6 Create and understand proper documentation process and adopt practices for safety for
protection of men and materials on the repair site.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only four questions need to be solved in total.

Recommended Books:
1 Heat Pumps and Electric Heating: E. R. Ambrose, John and Wiley and Sons, Inc., New
York, 1968
2 Handbook for Building Engineers in Metric Systems, NBC, New Delhi, 1968.
3 Philips Lighting in Architectural Design, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1964.
4 The Lighting of Buildings: R. G. Hopkinson and J. D. Kay, Faber and Faber, London,
1969.
5 National Building Code.
6 Building Construction: Dr. B. C. Punmia, Ashok K Jain, A.K Jain
7 Construction Engineering and Management: S. Seetharaman, Umesh Publications,
Delhi.
8 Water supply and Sanitory Installations: A. C. Panchdhari, New Age International
Publication, Delhi
9 Concrete Repair and Maintenance: Peter H. Emmons and Gajanan M. Sabnis,
Galgotia Publication
10 Repairs and Rehabilitation-Compilation from Indian Concrete Journal-ACC
Publication.
Building Services and Repairs: Dr. A. S. Radke, Tech Knowledge Publications

Reference Books:
1 Guide to Concrete Repair and Protection, HB84-2006, A joint publication of Australia
Concrete Repair Association, CSIRO and Standards Australia
2 CPWD hand book on Repairs and Rehabilitation of RCC buildings published by DG
(Works), CPWD, Government of India (Nirman Bhawan),
http://www.cpwd.gov.in/handbook.pdf.
3 Guide to Concrete Repair, Glenn Smoak, US Department of the Interior Bureau of
Reclamation, Technical Service Center, http://books.google.co.in.
4 Management of Deteriorating Concrete Structures: George Somerville, Taylor and
Francis publication
5 Concrete Building Pathology: Susan Macdonald, Blackwell Publishing.
6 Testing of Concrete in Structures: John H. Bungey, Stephen G. Millard and Michael G.
Grantham, Taylor and Francis Publication.
7 Durability of concrete and Cement Composites: Page, C.L.and Page, M.M., Woodhead
Publishers
8 Fire Safety in Building: V. K. Jain, New Age International Publication, Delhi
9 MEP systems & Repairs of Buildings: A.S. Radke, Published by Synergy
Knowledgeware.
 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

Department Level Optional Course - 1
CEDLO5013 03
Sustainable Building Materials

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Total
Duration of
End Sem Term Pract. Oral
End Sem
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

Meeting the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to
meet their needs is considered to be the simplest and effective sustainable development. The
greatest threats to the sustainable development on earth are: population growth and
urbanization, energy use and global warming, excessive waste generation and the subsequent
pollution and limited supply of resources. Concrete is the primary construction material in the
world. Construction industry consumes 40 percent of the total energy and about one half of
world’s major resources. Hence, it is imperative to regulate the use of materials and energy in
this industry. The largest environmental impact of the concrete industry comes from the cement
manufacturing process that leads to relatively high greenhouse gas emissions. Minimizing the
quantity of cement in a concrete mix has many potential benefits. Thus, the use of industrial
byproducts such as fly ash, silica fume as cementitious materials in concrete structures can lead
to significant reduction CO2 emissions and consumption of energy and raw materials. Green
and intelligent buildings also have been evolved for sustainability of the construction industry.
This course provides knowledge of different sustainable building materials and technologies in
construction industry.
Objectives
1 To have more awareness among students about sustainability.
2 To understand environmental issues due to building materials and the energy
consumption in manufacturing building materials.
3 To study the alternative masonry unit and mortar for sustainable practices.
4 To know the importance of cement reduction and replacements for a sustainable
development.
5 To understand the alternative building technologies which are followed in
construction.
6 To have cognizance of alternative roofing systems in practice.

Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Sustainability
Introduction: Need and concept of sustainability, Social
1.1
Environmental and economic sustainability concepts,
Sustainable development, Nexus between technology and
1.2 Development, Challenges for sustainable development
1 Fundamentals of sustainability. 07
Global Environmental issue: Resource degradation, ozone layer
Depletion Climate change, Carbon cycle, Factors affecting
1.3
Carbon credits and carbon trading, carbon foot Print, Carbon
sequestration-carbon capture and storage (CCS).
1.4 Environment legislation in India-water act and air act
Energy In Building Materials
Embodied energy and life cycle energy, Calculation of
2.1 embodied energy in wall, Environmental issues concerned to
building materials, Global warming and construction industry.
Environment friendly and cost-effective building technologies.
2 2.2 06
Requirements for building of different climatic regions.
Traditional building methods and vernacular architecture Green
2.3 buildings, Intelligent buildings, green materials, green building
ratings-IGBC & LEED.
2.4 Renewable and nonrenewable energy sources.
Elements of Structural Masonry
Characteristics of building blocks for walls, Stones and Laterite
blocks, Bricks, Fly ash bricks and hollow clay blocks, Concrete
3.1
Blocks, Stabilized blocks: mud blocks, steam cured blocks, Fal-
3 G Blocks stone masonry block. 06
Masonry Mortars: Mortars, Cementitious materials: Lime,
OPC, PPC, Masonry cement, Lime pozzolana (LP)cement.
3.2 Sand: natural and manufactured, Classification of mortar as per
BIS, Types of mortar, Properties and requirements of mortar,
Selection of mortar.
Cementitious and Supplementary Cementitious Materials and
their Characterization:
4 06
Lime, Lime pozzolana cements, Pozzolana: Surkhi, Fly ash, IS
4.1
(3812) (Type C and F), GGBFS, Silica Fumes, Metakaolin,
 RHA, Composite cements and its types, IS (16415:2015),
Magnesia based cements, Calcium sulfo- cement, Alkali
activated, cement (Type 1 and Type II), Geopolymers.
Composition, Properties and uses.
Membrane curing: wax and resin based, self-curing compound:
4.2 Polymer and polyethylene glycol, Water reducing admixtures,
use of treated domestic effluent (TDE) for mixing and curing
Alternate Building Technologies
Fiber reinforced cement composites: Matrix materials,
5.1
reinforcing Materials, Applications
Fiber reinforced polymer composites: Matrix materials, types of
5 5.2 07
polymers used and applications
Ferrocement and ferroconcrete building components: Materials,
5.3
Construction methods, Mechanical properties, Applications.
5.4 Nanotechnology for sustainable construction.
Alternate Building Materials and Roofing Systems
Building materials from agro and industrial waste: Typical
agro- waste and biomass resources, Use of industrial waste: Fly
6.1
ash, Blast furnace slag, Iron ore tailings, Gold mine tailings
Granite and marble polishing fines, demolished building waste
6 Concepts in roofing alternatives, Types of roof, Roof as a 07
6.2 structural system, Cost reduction through construction process
efficiency
Filler slab roofs, Composite beam and panel roofs, construction
6.3
Details and roof assembly.
Masonry domes and vaults: Relevance, analysis and design,
6.4
Barrel vault.
Total 39

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Explain sustainable practices by utilizing engineering practices.
2 Able to understand different types of environmental problems and their sustainable
solution.
3 Suggest appropriate type of masonry unit and mortar for civil engineering
constructions.
4 Analyze different alternative building materials for construction.
5 To suggest suitable alternative building technologies for sustainable development.
6 To propose different roofing systems and use of waste materials in construction
industry.
Internal Assessment 20 Marks
Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only four questions need to be solved in total.

Recommended Books:
1 Alternative Building Materials and Technologies by KS Jagadish, BV Venkatraman
Reddy and KS Nanjunda Rao, New Age International publications.
2 Sustainability Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case studies by Allen D.T, and
Shonnard D.R , Prentice Hall.
3 Sustainability Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case studies by Bradley A.S;
Adebayo A.O, and Mario P., Cengage learning
4 Sustainability of construction materials by Jamal M Khatib, Woodhead publishing
limited.
5 Renewable energy sources by Twidell J.W and Weir A.D, English Language Book
Society (ELBS)

Reference Books:
1 ECBC Code 2007, Bureau of Energy Efficiency, New Delhi Bureau of Energy
efficiency Publications—Rating system, TERI Publications – GRIHA Rating system.
2 Structural Masonry by Arnold W Hendry, Macmillan Publishers
3 Systems Analysis for Sustainable Engineering: Theory and Application by Ni bin
Chang, Mc Graw Hill Professional
4 NPTEL course on sustainable materials and green building
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105/102/105102195
5 Relevant codes
 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

Department Level Optional Course - 1
CEDLO5014 03
Advanced Structural Mechanics

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total

03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration of Total
End Sem Term Pract. Oral
End Sem
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

The structures are subjected to various types of loading/ forces. These are axial force, shear force,
bending moment, torsion etc. This course enables the students with the knowledge in conformity
with analysis of behaviour of structural members under different types of loading. The course
facilitates in imparting theoretical concepts and physical understanding, which in turn will help
in solving structural mechanics problems, mostly involving beams & thin -walled structures
under different loading conditions.
Objectives
1 To understand the concept of unsymmetrical bending, shear centre and spring & evaluate
the stress due to unsymmetrical bending, shear centre for symmetrical & un - symmetrical
thin-walled sections.
2 To study the concepts and behavior of beams curved in elevation & to evaluate the stress.
3 To study the concepts and behavior of beams curved in plan subjected to different types
of loadings.
4 To understand the concept &behavior of beams resting on elastic foundation.
5 To understand the concept of different theories of failure in regards of materials.
6 To study the behavior of deep beams using different theories available for the analysis of
different sections.
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Unsymmetrical Bending, Shear Centre and Springs

Product of inertia, principal moment of inertia, flexural stresses
1.1 due to bending in two planes for symmetrical sections, bending
1 of unsymmetrical sections. 07
Shear Centre for symmetrical & unsymmetrical (about both
1.2
axes) thin-walled open sections.
1.3 Helical springs, flat spiral springs, laminated springs.
Beams Curved in Elevation
Bending of beams with large initial curvature, loaded in their
2 2.1 07
plane of curvature.
Application to analysis of hooks, circular closed rings, chain
2.2
links with straight length & semi-circular ends.
Beams Curved In Plan
Analysis of Beams Curved in Plan such as cantilever circular
3.1 arc, semicircular beams fixed at two ends and subjected to
3 central concentrated load. 05
Simply supported semicircular beam subjected to UDL
3.2 supported on three equally spaced columns, Analysis of circular
ring beam.
Beams on Elastic Foundation
Analysis of beams of infinite length subjected to concentrated
4 4.1 force/moment & semi-infinite length subjected to concentrated 07
load/moment at one end.
Semi-infinite beam hinged at one end (origin) & subjected to
4.2
UDL throughout.
Theories of Failure
Maximum principal stress theory, Maximum principal strain
5 5.1 07
theory, Maximum shear stress theory.
5.2 Maximum total strain energy theory.
Analysis of Deep Beams
6.1 Determination of deflection.
6 Determination of shear correction factor for various sections: 06
6.2 rectangular solid & hollow section, circular solid & hollow
section & I-section
Total 39
 Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Understand the concept of unsymmetrical bending, shear centre for thin -walled open
sections and springs.
2 Analyze hooks, circular closed rings, chain links with straight length & semi-circular
ends using the concept of beam curved in elevation.
3 Analyze the beam curved in plan for different support conditions.
4 Study the behavior of beam resting on elastic foundation with various loading
conditions.
5 Understand the concept of different theories of failure in different sections.
6 Determine deflection of deep beams, shear correction factor for different sections like
solid & hollow sections.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only four questions need to be solved in total.

Recommended Books:
1 Mechanics of Materials: Popov, E.P. Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.
2 Advanced Mechanics of Materials: Arthur P. Boresi and Omar M. Sidebottom, Wiley
and Sons.
3 Strength of Material Part I and Part II: Timoshenko, McGraw Hill, New York.
4 Mechanics of Solids: Shames, I and Pitarresi, J. M., Preentice Hall, New Delhi.
5 Strength of Materials: Subramanian, Oxford University Press.
6 Advanced Mechanics of Solids, L.S. Srinath, Tata McGraw Hill,20
7 Strength of Materials: R. K. Rajput, S. Chand and Co. Ltd.

Reference Books:
1 Mechanics of Materials: Beer, F.P., E. Russell Jhonston and John T. DeWolf, TMH,
New Delhi.
2 Beams on Elastic Foundation: Heteny M.
3 Mechanics of Materials: James Gere, M., Thomson Brooks.
4 Reinforced Concrete Deep Beams: F.K. KONG, Taylor & Francis Books, Inc.
 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

Department Level Optional Course - 1
CEDLO5015 03
Air and Noise Pollution and Control

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Total
Duration of
End Sem Term Pract. Oral
End Sem
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

Air pollution is caused by solid and liquid particles and certain gases that are suspended in the
air. These particles and gases can come from car and truck exhaust, factories, dust, pollen, mold
spores, volcanoes and wildfires, possibly causing diseases, death to humans, damage to living
organisms. Noise pollution impacts millions of people on a daily basis. The most common
health problem it causes is Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL). Exposure to loud noise can
also cause high blood pressure, heart disease, sleep disturbances, and stress. This subject is
intended to make students aware about the noise and air pollution, various sources which
contribute in degradation of air quality, assessing the air quality through air quality index, and
various air and noise pollution control methods and equipment used by industries.
Objectives

The students will be able to learn:

1 Understanding of basic concepts of air and noise pollution.
Study of air pollution episodes. Reasoning of the entire episode, identification of the
2
parameters, conditions, mechanisms.
3 Study of sampling types and methods for ambient air and stack.
4 Study of macro and micro meteorology for understanding the dispersion of pollutants.
5 Simple and complex modeling for point source, line source and area source.
6 Study of pollution control methods, mechanism and devices, laws.
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Introduction to Air Pollution: Definition, Air pollutants and its

classification and sources of generation. Emission Inventory.
1 Indoor air pollution. Measurement of air pollution. Air pollution in 05
India and other countries. Air Quality Index. Numerical on conversion
of units of pollutants.
Environmental Effects of Air Pollution: Effects of air pollutants on
2 human beings, plants, animals, properties and visibility. Exposure to 06
air pollution. Numerical problems based on COH, CoHb
Measurement and Control technology of Air Pollutants: methods to
measure ambient air pollution and stack emissions, high volume
sampler, wind rose diagram.
Control Technology: Control Devices Principles, operations and
types, simple hoods and ducts. Settling chambers, cyclones,
3 10
electrostatic precipitators (ESP), Filters, scrubbers, absorption towers
and incinerators. Collection efficiencies for laminar and turbulent
flows for settling chambers, particle cut size for cyclone, ESP Concept
of frictional and overall efficiencies. Design criteria for filters,
scrubbers, absorption towers and incinerators.
Meteorological process and air quality monitoring: Large scale wind
circulation geotropic wind, gradient wind, cyclone, anticyclone,
planetary boundary layer. Lapse rate, stability conditions, wind
velocity profile, maximum mixing depth, topographic effects. Plum
patterns, plum dispersion, Gaussian model for predicting
4 10
concentration, downwind from a single source, diffusion coefficients,
Turner’s stability categories and graphs for dispersion estimates.
Maximum ground level concentration, inversion effects, distance
touching ground modification of Gaussian model to predict particulate
dispersion, plume rise, modified Holland equation for small source.
Current Issues on Air Pollution and Global -Legal Aspects, air
5 pollution laws, Indian standards- emission and air quality standards 04
Greenhouse effect/ Global warming, Ozone Pollution, Acid Rain.
Noise Pollution: definition and introduction, the effects of noise,
characteristics of sound and its measurement, levels of noise and
6 04
problems, noise rating system, noise level standards, sources of noise
and their noise levels, noise abatement and control.
Total 39
 Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Identify air and noise pollution problems and interpret criteria for air and noise quality
data.
2 Recognize various environmental transformation processes of pollutants under extreme
weather condition.
3 Interpret meteorological data and develop capability to assessment of project proposal.
4 Knowledge to analyze quality of air in the form of air quality index and dispersion
modeling.
5 Relate and analyze the pollution regulation on its scientific basis.
6 Justify the use of pollution control equipment and their design.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only four questions need to be solved in total.
5 There can be an internal choice in various sub-questions/ questions in order to
accommodate the questions on all the topics/ sub-topics.

Recommended Books:
1 Air Pollution: Rao. M. N. and Rao, H. V. N., Tata McGraw Hill Publication, New
Delhi.
2 Environmental Pollution Control Engineering: Rao C.S., New Age International
Publishers.
3 Noise Pollution: Agarwal S.K., APH Publishing Corporation.
4 Noise Pollution and Control Strategy: Singal S.P., Alpha Science International LTD.
5 Sewage disposal and Air pollution engineering: Garg, S.K., Khanna pbl.
Reference Books:
1 Air Pollution: Part A- Analysis and Part B-Prevention and Control: Ledbetter, J. O.,
Make Dekker Inc., New York.
2 Air Pollution: Wark and Warner, Harper and Row, New York.
3 Air Pollution Vol.1: Tripathi, A. K., Ashish Publication House, New Delhi.
4 Air Pollution Handbook: Magill, P. L.et al., McGraw Hill publication.
5 Air and Noise Pollution Control: Volume 1: Wang,L.K. and Pereira, N.C., Humana
6 Textbook of Noise Pollution and its Control: Bhatia S. C., Atlantic Publishers and
Distributors, New Delhi.
7 Industrial Air Pollution Handbook: Parker, A., Tata McGraw Hills Publication.
8 Air Pollution: Henry Capeskins, McGraw Hill publication.
9 Environmental Noise Pollution: Noise Mapping, Public Health, and Policy,Enda
Murphy and Eoin King.
10 Air Pollution: Wark and Warner, Harper and Row, New York.
11 Government of India’s Publication of laws related to air pollution, Maharashtra
Pollution Control Board’s (MPCB) Publication of standards. IndianStandards relevant
to Air Pollution Monitoring, Definitions, Standards.
12 Air Pollution Control Theory: Martin Crawford, McGraw Hill publication.
 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

Department Level Optional Course - 1
CEDLO5016 03
Transportation Planning and Economics

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Total
Duration of
End Sem Term Pract. Oral
End Sem
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

The ultimate aim of Transport planning is to generate alternatives for improving Transportation
system to meet future demand and selecting the best alternative after proper evaluation. The
Course concentrates on Transportation system planning, Public Transportation Planning,
Parking planning, and economic analysis of Transportation projects. Basic purpose of
transportation planning is focusing on what's the most efficient movement for people and goods
around the world. Improving access to an area not only reduces congestion, but the accessibility
attracts new residents and businesses ultimately helping economic development.
Objectives
1 To understand various urban development policies in India and to learn different planning
surveys.
2 To analyze and plan future traffic flow using four stage modelling.

3 To understand the implementation of land use transport model in Urban area.

4 To carry out economic analyses for different transportation infrastructure projects.

5 To understand and plan Urban public Transportation system.

6 To plan and design Parking system for residential, commercial and other projects.
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Urban Transportation Planning

Problems & factors in Transportation Planning, Development
1.1 of Transportation Systems in India, Growth of Transport -
Trends in Traffic - Imbalances in Transport System.
1 Urban growth mechanism – Urban morphology - Urbanization 04
1.2 & travel demand - Urban development planning policy – NUTP
- Urban transport projects - Urban transport problems in India
Urban travel patterns - Study area delineation- Zoning -
1.3 Planning surveys - Urban activity system, Trip based and
activity-based approach - Four stage travel demand modelling.
Four Stage Modelling
Trip generation analysis: trip classification, multiple regression
2.1
analysis, category analysis
Trip distribution analysis: introduction, methods of trip
2.2 distribution, uniform and average factor method, Fratar method,
2 Furness method, the gravity model, opportunities model. 10
Modal split analysis: introduction, Modal split analysis modal
2.3
split models.
Traffic Assignment: purpose of traffic assignment,
Assignment techniques: All or nothing assignment, Multiple
2.4
route assignment, Capacity restraint assignment, Diversion
Curves.
Land Use Transport Modelling
Urban system components - Urban spatial structure –
3 3.1 05
Accessibility - Location theory.
Land use models - Land use transport models, Lowry & Garin
3.2
– Lowry models.
Transportation Economics
Economic evaluation of highway schemes, need for economic
4.1
4 evaluation, cost and benefits of transportation projects 10
Basic principles of economic evaluation, Net present value
4.2 method, benefit/cost ratio method, internal rate of return
method. Vehicle operating costs.
Urban Public Transport Planning
Growth history – Urban growth & public transport needs -
5.1 Modes of public transport and comparison - Public transport
5 travel characteristics 05
Technology of bus, rail, rapid transit systems, and basic
5.2 operating elements. Transit characteristics - Fleet size and
capacity estimation.
6 Parking Planning and Design 05
 Types of Parking’s, Methods of surveys, Parking inventories,
6.1
Parking Design
Planning of parking for residential and commercial buildings
6.2
including shopping complex, malls and multiplex.
Total 39

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Understand various Urban transport related terms and policies along with methods to
carry out planning surveys.
2 Carry out trip generation, trip distribution, modal split and traffic assignment for
planning of urban transport system.
3 Apply land use transport models at Urban area.
4 Carry out economic analysis of different Transport related Infrastructure projects by
analyzing costs and benefits related to projects using NPV, IRR and B/C ratio method.
5 Estimate capacity of different public transportation modes in Urban area and to plan
and schedule the same based on fleet size.
6 Plan and design Parking facility at Urban area.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only four questions need to be solved in total.
Recommended Books:
1 Kadiyali, L.R., Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning, Khanna Publishers, New
Delhi, 2002.
2 IRC: SP: 30-1993., Manual on Economic Evaluation of Highway Projects in India.
3 Sarkar P K., Maitri V.,Economics in Highway and Transportation Planning, Standard
Publisher, New Delhi, 2010.
4 K.S. Ramegauda, Urban and Regional Planning, Mysore University Publication.
5 Ceder, A.,Public Transit Planning and Operation: Theory, Modeling and Practice, B-H
Elsevier Ltd., MA, 2007.
6 IRC:SP:12-2015, Guidelines for Parking Facilities in Urban Roads

Reference Books:
Khisty C J., Lall B.Kent, Transportation Engineering – An Introduction, Prentice-Hall,
1
NJ, 2005
2 Ortuzar, J. D., Willumsen, L.G., Modeling Transport, John Wiley & Sons, 1994
Papacostas C.S. and Prevedouros, P.D., Transportation Engineering & Planning, PHI,
3
New Delhi,2002
Hutchinson B.G., Principles of Urban Transportation System Planning, Mc-Graw Hill,
4
1974.
 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

Department Level Optional Course – 1
CEDLO5017 03
Advanced Concrete Technology

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Theory Term
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Total
Duration of
End Sem Term Pract. Oral
End Sem
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

Basic concept of concrete technology is essential for civil engineering students to execute the
civil engineering projects as per the standard laid down time to time. Advancements in concrete
technology is the backbone of infrastructure of civil engineering field. This course provides
necessary knowledge about various concreting operations and testing operations during and
after construction. This course is intended for gaining knowledge about the properties of
materials, especially concrete and to maintain quality in construction projects. This course will
also provide knowledge to the students about the criteria to be remembered during the selection
of materials, its mix proportioning, mixing, placing, compacting, curing and finishing.
Objectives
1 To understand the various properties and tests of materials used in concrete along with
the rheology of fresh concrete.
2 To study the different procedures for testing hardened concrete, its compositions and
quality of in place concrete.
3 To understand the concept of durability and cracking in concrete. To also understand
the significance and parameters of concreting under extreme environment and
conditions.
4 To understand the concept and optimization of the mix design of concrete by various
codes.
5 To study the various constituents, properties, significance and applications of special
concrete.
6 To study the quality of concrete and check the acceptance criteria.
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Constituents and Properties Of Concrete
Introduction of cement and water: Chemical composition of
OPC, hydration, chemistry of cement, cement testing, water
1.1
requirement for hydration, water quality for concrete and water
quality test.
Aggregates: Types of aggregate (natural, synthetic, recycled),
required characteristics of aggregates for concrete, introduction
1.2
to gradation of aggregates, standard grading curve and gap
grading.
Chemical admixture: Introduction to accelerators, retarders,
1.3 plasticizers, super plasticizers, viscosity modifying admixtures,
1 water proofers, miscellaneous admixtures. 08
Mineral admixture: Introduction, composition of mineral
admixture, fly ash and its type, silica fume, ground granulated
1.4
blast furnace slag and others. Effects of mineral admixture on
fresh and hardened concrete properties.
Properties of fresh concrete: Introduction to properties of fresh
1.5 concrete, w/c ratio, w/b ratio, gel space ratio, maturity concept,
aggregate cement bond strength, pumping of concrete.
Rheological models of fresh concrete: Introduction, simple
flow test, rheological models and test methods, factors
1.6
affecting rheological properties of concrete and effect of
rheological properties on different types of concrete.
Testing of Concrete
Introduction to testing of hardened concrete - compression,
2.1 tension, and flexure. Methods of testing (destructive, semi
destructive, non-destructive).
Properties of hardened concrete: Factors influencing strength,
2 importance of end effects in compression testing, tensile 05
2.2
strength of concrete (split and flexural), relationship between
compressive and tensile strength.
Advanced non-destructive evaluation: Ground penetration
radar, probe test penetration, pull out/off, break off method,
2.3
stress wave propagation method, electrical / magnetic methods,
infrared thermography, and core test.
Durability of Concrete
Introduction to durability and permeability: Transport
mechanism of fluids and gases in concrete, role of w/c and
3.1
admixture on durability. Design of durability using
performance specification.
3 Corrosion and carbonation: Introduction to corrosion of 10
reinforcement in concrete, factors influencing corrosion,
3.2 damages preventive measures of corrosion, tests for existing
structures and remedial measures of corrosion, introduction and
measurement of depth of carbonation.
3.3 Concrete structures in special environment: Frost action, fire or
 high temperature, chemical attack and aggressive environment
(sulphate attack, chloride attack, acid attack in sewers, sea water
attack), alkali aggregate reaction (alkali silica and carbonate
reaction).
Concreting under extreme weather: Hot and cold weather
3.4
concreting, underwater concreting.
Concrete Mixture Design
Design of concrete mixes by IS 10262 (latest edition) Method –
4.1 with and without fly ash, super plasticizer, effect of pumping of
concrete on mixture design.
Design of concrete mixes by American Concrete Institute (ACI)
4.2
4 Method – Air and non-air entrained concrete. 07
Design of concrete mixes by Department of Environment (DoE)
4.3
Method.
4.4 Design of concrete mixes by Road note 4 Method.
Design of high strength concrete mixes using ACI 211.4R - 93
4.5
Method.
Special Concretes
Light weight concrete and ultra-light weight concrete: Types
and properties of light weight aggregates, factors influencing
the strength and density of light weight aggregate concrete,
5.1
properties of light weight aggregate concrete.
Introduction to other light weight concrete – Cellular and
foamed concrete. (01).
High performance concrete: Methods for achieving high
5.2 performance concrete, requirements for high performance
characteristics, material selection, advantages and applications.
Self-compacting concrete (SCC): Materials for SCC,
comparison of traditional and SCC constituents, requirements
5 5.3 06
for SCC, initial mix compositions, production and placing of
SCC, fresh concrete tests for SCC.
Fiber Reinforced Concrete (FRC): Study of different fibers
(metallic fiber, polymeric fibers, carbon fibers, glass fibers,
naturally occurring fibers) in concrete with respect to volume
5.4 fraction, orientation and aspect ratio, physical and mechanical
properties - steel and polypropylene fiber reinf orced concrete.
Applications of steel and polypropylene fibers reinforced
concrete.
Introduction to other special concrete – Vacuum concrete, waste
5.5 material-based concrete, shotcrete, roller compacted, mass
concrete.
Quality Control (QC)

6 6.1 Introduction: Statistical QC, quality factors, control charts. 03

Acceptance criteria according to Indian standards: Strength of
6.2
concrete (site and laboratory)
Total 39
 Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 To use the various concrete materials and demonstrate the fresh properties of concrete.
2 To perform different testing methods of concrete.
To describe the durability of concrete and apply the knowledge of durability in extreme
3
weather concreting.
4 To design the concrete mix for field application by different methods.
5 To explain the various properties of special concrete.
6 To discuss the quality of concrete and explain the acceptance criteria.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only four questions need to be solved in total.

Recommended Books:
1 Concrete Technology: A. R. Shanthakumar, Oxford University Press, New Delhi,
2007.
2 Concrete Technology Theory and Practice: Shetty M.S., S. Chand.
3 Properties of concrete: Neville, Isaac Pitman, London.
4 Concrete Technology: Gambhir M.L., Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
5 Concrete Technology: Neville A.M. & Brooks. J. J., ELBS-Longman, Pearson
Education Ltd.
6 Relevant I.S. codes: Bureau of Indian standard and ACI code.
7 Design of concrete mixes by N Krishna Raju (Latest Edition), CBS Publishers and
Distributers Pvt. Ltd.
Reference Books:
1 Fibre Reinforced Cementitious Composites: Arnon Bentur and Sidney Mindess,
Modern Concrete Technology Series, Tylor and Francis.
2 Concrete- Microstructures, Properties and Materials: P. Kumar Mehta and Paulo J. M.
Monteiro, Indian Edition, Indian Concrete Institute, Chennai, 1999
3 Special Publication of ACI on Polymer concrete and FRC.
4 Concrete Technology: D.F. Orchardi, Wiley, 1962.
5 www.theconcreteportal.com
 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL501 Theory of Reinforced Concrete Structures (Lab) 01

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration Total
End Sem Term
Test- of End Pract. Oral
Test-I Average Exam Work
II Sem Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course Objectives:
1 To develop a clear understanding of design philosophy amongst the students for the
design of reinforced concrete structures using working stress method (WSM) and limit
state method (LSM).
2 To study various clauses of IS: 456-2000 and their significance in the RCC design.
3 To apply various concepts of LSM in the analysis and design of beams, slabs and
columns.
4 To study the concept of Serviceability and Durability for deflection and crack width
calculation in RCC structures.
5 To develop the concept of design using design charts and curves for columns
subjected to axial load and moment.
6 To study the concept of reinforced concrete footing design subjected to axial load and
moment.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learner will be able to:
1 Understand the fundamentals of WSM and LSM.
2 Apply various clauses specified in IS: 456-2000 for designing structural members with
safety and economy.
3 Understand the use of readymade design charts and curves from Special Publications
of Bureau of Indian Standards.
4 Analyze and design various reinforced concrete elements such as beam, slab, column,
footings using the concept of Limit State Method.
List of Tutorials and Assignments
Week
Detailed Content Hours
(Activity)
Analysis and Design of Singly and Doubly Reinforced RCC beam
1 st Week
using WSM 02
(Tutorial)
(Numericals Based on this module will be solved in tutorial class)
Analysis and Design of Singly and Doubly reinforced RCC beam
using WSM or any one activity from below:
Solve set of Questions given by the course instructor.
2 nd Week
Write a report on provisions in IS 456 2000 related to the design 02
(Assignment)
of beams
A comparative study consisting of advantages and disadvantages
of WSM and LSM
Analysis and Design of Singly and Doubly Reinforced RCC beam
3 rd Week
using LSM. 02
(Tutorial)
(Numericals Based on this module will be solved in tutorial class)
Analysis and Design of Singly and Doubly Reinforced RCC beam
using LSM. Or any one activity from below:
4 th Week
Solve set of Questions given by the course instructor. 02
(Assignment)
Study of IS 456 2000 provisions on Limit state of collapse:
Flexure.
Analysis and Design of Flanged beams for Flexure using LSM.
5 th Week
Design of RCC beams in shear, bond, and torsion. 02
(Tutorial)
(Numericals Based on this module will be solved in tutorial class)
Analysis and Design of Flanged beams for Flexure using LSM. Or
any one activity from below:
th
6 Week Design of RCC beams in shear, bond, and torsion.
02
(Assignment) Solve set of Questions given by the course instructor.
Study of IS 456 2000 provisions on Limit state of collapse- Shear,
Bond and Torsion.
Design of Simply supported One-way and Two-way slabs as per
7 th Week
IS: 456-2000 02
(Tutorial)
(Numericals Based on this module will be solved in tutorial class)
Design of Simply supported One-way and Two-way slabs as per
th
8 Week IS: 456-2000. Or any one activity from below:
02
(Assignment) Solve set of Questions given by the course instructor.
Study of IS: 456-2000 provisions on Design of RCC slabs.
Analysis and Design of Columns loaded Axially, Uni-axially, and
9 th Week
Bi-axially, using LSM. 02
(Tutorial)
(Numericals Based on this module will be solved in tutorial class)
Analysis and Design of Columns loaded Axially, Uni-axially, and
Bi-axially, using LSM. or any one activity from below:
10 th Week
Solve set of Questions given by the course instructor. 02
(Assignment)
Studying the development of interactive curves and their use in
column design.
 Study of IS: 456-2000 Provisions for Limit State of Collapse –
Compression
Design of Isolated square and rectangular footings subjected to
11 th Week
axial load and moment. 02
(Tutorial)
(Numericals Based on this module will be solved in tutorial class)
Design of Isolated Square and rectangular footings subjected to
axial load and moment. or any one activity from below:
Solve set of Questions given by the course instructor.
12 th Week
Study of IS: 456-2000 provisions related to design of RCC 02
(Assignment)
foundations.
Report or presentation on Significance and Design of different
types of RCC Foundations by various groups of students.
13 th Week Viva – Voce Examination 02

Assessment:
• Term Work
Including Laboratory Work and Assignments both, Distribution of marks for Term Work shall
be as follows:
Laboratory Work : 10 Marks
Assignments : 10 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks
Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be
resorted to: 75%- 80%: 03 Marks; 81%- 90%: 04 Marks; 91% onwards: 05 Marks.

• End Semester Oral Examination

Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.
• Recommended books:
Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures: Dayaratnam, P; Oxford and IBH.
Limit State Design ofReinforced Concrete: Jain A. K, Nemchand and Bros., Roorkee
Limit State Design ofReinforced Concrete: Shah and Karve, Structure Publications, Pune.
Ultimate Strength Design for Structural Concrete: Arthur, P. D. and Ramakrishnan, V., Wheeler
and Co. Pvt. Ltd.
Reinforced Concrete: H.J. Shah, Charotar Publishers, Anand.
Fundamentals of Reinforced Concrete: Sinha & Roy, S. Chand and Co. Ltd.
Illustrated Reinforced Concrete Design: Dr. V. L. Shah and Dr. S. R. Karve, Structure
Publications, Pune.
Reinforced Concrete Design: Wang, C. K., Salmon, C. G., and Pincheira, J. A, John Wiley
(2007), 7th Edition.
Reinforced Concrete Fundamentals: Ferguson, P. M., Breen, J. E., and Jirsa, J. O., John Wiley
& Sons (1988) 5th Edition.
 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL502 Applied Hydraulics (Lab) 01

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration Total
End Sem Term
Test- of End Pract. Oral
Test-I Average Exam Work
II Sem Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course Objectives:
1 To describe the concepts of fluid dynamics and its applications.
2 To exemplify the fundamentals of impulse momentum principle and explain the
working of various hydraulic machines.
3 To classify the uniform and non-uniform flow in open channel.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learner will be able to:
1 Evaluate the efficiencies and discuss the working of various pumps and turbines.
2 Apply impulse momentum principle to hydraulic machines.
3 Determine the rate of flow through open channel.
4 Generate and evaluate Gradually varied flow (GVF) and Rapid varied Flow (RVF) in
open channel flow.
5 Compute the Chezy’s Constant through tilting flume.
List of Experiments (Minimum Six)
Lab Session /
Module Detailed Content
Hr.
1 Impact of jet, flat plate, inclined plate, curved vanes. 02
2 Performance of Pelton turbine. 02
3 Performance of Francis Turbine. 02
4 Performance of Kaplan Turbine. 02
5 Performance of Centrifugal pumps. 02
6 Chezy’s roughness factor. 02
7 Specific energy. 02
8 Hydraulic Jump. 02
9 Calibration of Broad crested weir/Venturi flume. 02

Assessment:
• Term Work
The term work shall comprise of the neatly written report based on the afore -mentioned
experiments and assignments. The assignments shall comprise of the minimum 20 problems
covering the entire syllabus divided properly module wise. The marks of the term work shall be
judiciously awarded for the various components of the term work and depending upon the quality
of the term work. The final certification and acceptance of term work warrants the satisfactory
performance of laboratory work by the student, appropriate completion of the assignments.
Distribution of marks for Term Work shall be as follows:
Laboratory Work : 10 Marks
Assignments : 10 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks
Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be
resorted to: 75%- 80%: 03 Marks; 81%- 90%: 04 Marks; 91% onwards: 05 Marks.

• End Semester Oral Examination

Pair of Internal and External Examiner should conduct oral examination.
Reference Books:
1 Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines: R. K. Rajput, S. Chand and Company.
Hydraulics and Fluid mechanics: Dr. P.M. Modi and Dr. S.M. Seth, Standard Book House,
2
Delhi.
Hydraulics Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines: S. Ramamrutham, Dhanpat Rai
3
Publishing Company (P) Ltd-New Delhi.
Theory and Application of Fluid Mechanics: K. Subramanian, Tata McGraw hill publishing
4
company, New Delhi.
Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics: Dr. S.K. Ukarande, Ane’s Books Pvt. Ltd. (Revised
5
Edition 2012), ISBN 97893 8116 2538.
6 Fluid Mechanics and fluid pressure engineering: Dr. D.S. Kumar, F.K. Kataria and sons.
7 Fluid Mechanics: R.K. Bansal Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd.
 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL503 Geotechnical Engineering – I (Lab) 01

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration Total
End Sem Term
Test- of End Pract. Oral
Test-I Average Exam Work
II Sem Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course Objectives:
Determination of moisture content, specific gravity of soil solids and in -situ field
1
density of soils as well as field identification of fine-grained soils
To determine the grain size distribution of soils and consistency or Atterberg limits of
2
fine-grained soils
3 To determine coefficient of permeability of soils in laboratory
4 To determine compaction characteristics of soils in laboratory
5 To determine the density index (relative density) of cohesionless soil
6 To determine field SPT ‘N’ value by Standard Penetration Test

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learner will be able to:
1 Determine the physical and engineering properties of soil
2 Determine the plasticity characteristics of soil
3 Carry out sieve analysis of soil, plot grain size distribution curve and determine the IS
classification of soil
4 Determine coefficient of permeability of soils
5 Determine the compaction characteristics of soils
6 Compute the field SPT ‘N’ value and prepare the bore log
List of Experiments (Minimum ten)
Lab Session /
Module Detailed Content
Hr.
Determination of natural moisture content of soil using oven drying
method
Following other methods to find moisture content shall be explained
briefly:
a) Pycnometer method
1 02
b) Sand bath method
c) Alcohol method
d) Torsional balance method
e) Moisture meter
f) Radio activity method
Specific gravity of soil grains by density bottle method or
2 02
Pycnometer method
3 Field density using core cutter method 02
4 Field density using sand replacement method 02
5 Field identification of fine-grained soils 02
Grain size distribution of coarse-grained portions (gravel and
6 02
sand) of soil by sieve analysis
Grain size distribution of fine portions (silt and clay) of the soil by
7 02
Hydrometer analysis
Determination of liquid (Casagrande method), plastic and shrinkage
8 02
limits
9 Determination of liquid limit by cone penetrometer method 02
Determination of co-efficient of permeability using constant head
10 02
method
Determination of co-efficient of permeability using falling head
11 02
method
12 Compaction test, IS light compaction test/ Standard Proctor test 02
13 Compaction test, IS heavy compaction test/ Modified Proctor test 02
14 Relative density (or, density index) test 02
15 Standard penetration test 02

Assessment:
• Term Work
a) The term work shall be comprised of the neatly written reports based on the experiments
performed in the laboratory, assignments, attendance and case study.
b) The assignments shall be given covering the entire syllabus in such a way that the students
would attempt at least two problems on each module/ sub-module.
c) Students (5 students max. in a group) should perform a case study on Forensic Investigation
for Geotechnical Failures/or, Geo environmental Engineering and must submit a report or power
point presentation on the same. The questions related to this conce pt shall not be asked in the
theory examination. However, it shall be treated as a part of term work submission.
Distribution of Term-work Marks
The marks of the term work shall be judiciously awarded depending upon the quality of the
laboratory works, assignments, attendance and case study. The final certification acceptance of
term work warrants the satisfactory and appropriate completion of laboratory work, assignments
and case study with the minimum passing marks by the students. The following weightage of
marks shall be given for different components of the term-work.:
Laboratory Work : 12 Marks
Case study : 03 Marks
Assignments : 05 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks
Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be
resorted to: 75%- 80%: 03 Marks; 81%- 90%: 04 Marks; 91% onwards: 05 Marks.

• End Semester Oral Examination

The oral examination shall be based upon the entire theory and laboratory syllabus.

Reference Books:
1 SCI/SCOPUS Indexed Refereed International Journals (For Case Studies)
2 Relevant Indian Standard Specifications Codes, BIS Publications, New Delhi.
3 Departmental Laboratory Manual
4 Standard Geotechnical Engineering Handbook
5 NPTEL Video lectures on Practical.
 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL504 Transportation Engineering (Lab) 01

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration Total
End Sem Term
Test- of End Pract. Oral
Test-I Average Exam Work
II Sem Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course Objective:
1 To determine Penetration grade and Viscosity grade of bitumen.
2 To find the Softening point and Ductility value of bitumen.
3 To determine Impact, Abrasion and Crushing value of aggregate.
4 To carry out shape test on aggregates.
5 To carry out Classified volume study and plot speed profile at mid-block section.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learner will be able to:
1 Classify Bitumen on basis of Penetration and Viscosity grade.
2 Select Bitumen as per suitability on basis of Softening point and Ductility value.
3 Determine suitability of aggregate on basis of Impact value, Abrasion value and
Crushing value.
4 Differentiate Elongated and Flaky aggregates on basis of Shape test.

5 Carry out Classified volume study at mid-block section of road.

6 Plot speed profile curve (S-Curve) at mid-block section.
List of Experiments (Minimum Eight)
Lab Session /
Module Detailed Content
Hr.
1 Penetration Test on Bitumen. 02
2 Viscosity Test on Bitumen. 02
3 Softening Point Test on Bitumen 02
4 Ductility Test on Bitumen 02
5 Determination of Aggregate Impact Value 02
6 Determination of Aggregate Crushing Value 02
7 Determination of Abrasion Value of Road Aggregate 02
8 Shape Test of Aggregate 02
9 Classified Volume count at mid-block section 02
10 Speed profile study at mid-block section 02

Assessment:
• Term Work
Including Laboratory Work Survey project report and Assignments, Distribution of marks for
Term Work shall be as follows:
Laboratory Work and Traffic Survey : 10 Marks
Assignments : 10 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks
Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be
resorted to: 75%- 80%: 03 Marks; 81%- 90%: 04 Marks; 91% onwards: 05 Marks.

• End Semester Oral Examination

Oral exam will be based on experiments performed, traffic survey carried out and theory syllabus.

Reference Books:
1 Highway Engineering: Khanna, S.K. and Justo, C. E. G.;Nem Chand and Bros., Roorkee.
Principles, Practice and Design of Highway Engineering (Including Airport Engineering)”
2
Sharma, S.K.; S. Chand and Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
Highway Material and Pavement Testing: Dr. S. K. Khanna, Dr. C. E. G. Justo and Dr. A.
3
Veeraragavan. Nem Chand and Bros., Roorkee, India.
4 Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning: Kadiyali, L.R., Khanna Publishers, Delhi
Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering: Kadiyali, L. R.; Khanna Publsihers,
5
Delhi.
6 Relevant specifications of MORTH and relevant IRC codes.
 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL505 Professional Communication and Ethics 02

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
--- 02 * +02 - - 02 - 02

Theory Term
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Total
Duration of
End Sem Term Pract. Oral
End Sem
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course Rationale
This curriculum is designed to build up a professional and ethical approach, effective oral and
written communication with enhanced soft skills. Through practical sessions, it augments
student's interactive competence and confidence to respond appropriately and creatively to the
implied challenges of the global Industrial and Corporate requirements. It furth er inculcates
the social responsibility of engineers as technical citizens .
Course Objectives
1 Discern and develop an effective style of writing important technical/business documents.
2 Investigate possible resources and plan a successful job campaign.
Understand the dynamics of professional communication in the form of group discussions,
3
meetings, etc. required for career enhancement.
4 Develop creative and impactful presentation skills.
5 Analyze personal traits, interests, values, aptitudes and skills.
6 Understand the importance of integrity and develop a personal code of ethics.

Course Outcomes
Learner will be able to
Plan and prepare effective business/ technical documents which will in turn provide solid
1
foundation for their future managerial roles.
2 Strategize their personal and professional skills to build a professional image and meet
the demands of the industry.
3 Emerge successful in group discussions, meetings and result-oriented agreeable solutions
in group communication situations.
4 Deliver persuasive and professional presentations.
5 Develop creative thinking and interpersonal skills required for effective professional
communication.
6 Apply codes of ethical conduct, personal integrity and norms of organizational
behaviour.
Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Advanced Technical Writing: Project/ Problem Based Learning
(PBL)
Purpose and Classification of Reports, Classification on the
basis of:
Subject Matter (Technology, Accounting, Finance, Marketing,
1.1
etc.); Time Interval (Periodic, One-time, Special); Function
(Informational, Analytical, etc.); Physical Factors
(Memorandum, Letter, Short & Long)
Parts of a Long Formal Report Prefatory Parts (Front Matter),
1.2
Report Proper (Main Body), Appended Parts (Back Matter)
Language and Style of Reports: Tense, Person & Voice of
Reports, Numbering Style of Chapters, Sections, Figures,
1 1.3 06
Tables and Equations, Referencing Styles in APA & MLA
Format, Proofreading through Plagiarism Checkers
Definition, Purpose & Types of Proposals: Solicited (in
1.4 conformance with RFP) & Unsolicited Proposals, Types (Short
and Long proposals)
Parts of a Proposal Elements: Scope and Limitations,
1.5
Conclusion
Technical Paper Writing: Parts of a Technical Paper
(Abstract, Introduction, Research Methods, Findings and
1.6 Analysis, Discussion, Limitations, Future Scope and
References), Language and Formatting, Referencing in IEEE
Format
Employment Skills
Cover Letter & Resume: Parts and Content of a Cover Letter,
Difference between Bio-data, Resume & CV, Essential Parts of
2.1
a Resume, Types of Resume (Chronological, Functional &
Combination)
Statement of Purpose: Importance of SOP, Tips for Writing an
2.2
Effective SOP
2 2.3 Verbal Aptitude Test: Modelled on CAT, GRE, GMAT exams 06
Group Discussions: Purpose of a GD, Parameters of
2.4 Evaluating a GD, Types of GDs (Normal, Case-based & Role
Plays), GD Etiquettes
Personal Interviews: Planning and Preparation, Types of
Questions, Types of Interviews (Structured, Stress, Behavioral,
2.5
Problem Solving & Case-based), Modes of Interviews: Face-to-
face (One-to one and Panel) Telephonic, Virtual
 Business Meetings
Conducting Business Meetings: Types of Meetings, Roles and
3 3.1 Responsibilities of Chairperson, Secretary and Members, 02
Meeting Etiquette
3.2 Documentation: Notice, Agenda, Minutes
Technical/ Business Presentations
Effective Presentation Strategies: Defining Purpose,
Analysing Audience, Location and Event, Gathering, Selecting
4 4.1 & Arranging Material, structuring a Presentation, Making 02
Effective Slides, Types of Presentations Aids, Closing a
Presentation, Platform Skills
Group Presentations: Sharing Responsibility in a Team,
4.2
Building the contents and visuals together, Transition Phases
Interpersonal Skills
Interpersonal Skills: Emotional Intelligence, Leadership &
5 5.1 Motivation, Conflict Management & Negotiation, Time 08
Management, Assertiveness, Decision Making
Start-up Skills: Financial Literacy, Risk Assessment, Data
5.2
Analysis (e.g., Consumer Behaviour, Market Trends, etc.)
Corporate Ethics
Intellectual Property Rights: Copyrights, Trademarks,
6 6.1 Patents, Industrial Designs, Geographical Indications, 02
Integrated Circuits, Trade Secrets (Undisclosed Information)
6.2 Case Studies: Cases related to Business/ Corporate Ethics
Total 26

List of Assignments for Term Work

In the form of Short Notes, Questionnaire/ MCQ Test, Role Play, Case Study, Quiz, etc.
1 Cover Letter and Resume
2 Short Proposal
3 Meeting Documentation
4 Writing a Technical Paper/ Analysing a Published Technical Paper
5 Writing a SOP
6 IPR
7 Interpersonal Skills
8 Aptitude test (Verbal Ability)
Note:
• The Main Body of the project/book report should contain minimum 25 pages
(excluding Front and Back matter).
• The group size for the final report presentation should not be less than 5 students and
not to exceed more than 7 students.
• There will be an end–semester presentation based on the book report.
Assessment:
• Term Work
Term work shall consist of minimum 8 experiments.
Assignments : 10 Marks
Presentation Slides : 05 Marks
Book Report (Hard Copy) : 05 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks
Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be
resorted to: 75%- 80%: 03 Marks; 81%- 90%: 04 Marks; 91% onwards: 05 Marks.
The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of
laboratory work and minimum passing in the term work.

• Internal Oral
Oral Examination will be based on a GD & the Project/Book Report presentation
Group Discussion : 10 Marks
Individual Presentation : 10 Marks
Group Dynamics : 05 Marks

Recommended Books:
1 Arms, V. M. (2005). Humanities for the engineering curriculum: With selected
chapters from Olsen/ Huckin: Technical writing and professional communication,
second edition. Boston, MA: McGraw-Hill.
2 Bovée, C. L., &Thill, J. V. (2021). Business communication today. Upper Saddle
River, NJ: Pearson.
3 Butterfield, J. (2017). Verbal communication: Soft skills for a digital workplace.
Boston, MA: Cengage Learning.
4 Masters, L. A., Wallace, H. R., & Harwood, L. (2011). Personal development for life
and work. Mason: South-Western Cengage Learning.
5 Robbins, S. P., Judge, T. A., & Campbell, T. T. (2017). Organizational behaviour.
Harlow, England: Pearson.
6 Meenakshi Raman, Sangeeta Sharma (2004) Technical Communication, Principles and
Practice. Oxford University Press
7 Archana Ram (2018) Place Mentor, Tests of Aptitude for Placement Readiness.
Oxford University Press
8 Sanjay Kumar & Pushp Lata (2018). Communication Skills a workbook, New Delhi:
Oxford University Press.
 Semester-V

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEM501 Mini Project -2A 2

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 04 - - 2 - 2

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration
Total
End Sem of End Term
Test- Pract. Oral
Test-I Average Exam Sem Work
II Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Rationale
From primitive habitats of early years to modern buildings, the civil engineering industry's
growth has been needing based and society centric. Civil engineers deal with many challenges
on daily basis that most people do not have any idea. Mumbai University proposed Mini projects
in the syllabus so that the budding civil engineers can connect with the world outside their books
and have the idea of future course. The Mini project should actually provide solution to a typical
problem after a brainstorming and in a stipulated period. The competitions ahead will give
students the experience of the civil engineering industry's real-world problems and make students
brainstorm ideas, learn, and explore the civil engineering industry.
Course Objectives:
1 To recognize societal problems and convert them into a problem statement by
understanding of facts and ideas in a group activity.
2 To deal with new problems and situations by applying acquired knowledge, facts,
techniques and rules in a different way.
3 To examine and break information into parts, by analyzing motives or causes.
4 To learn evaluating information, validity of ideas and work based on a set of
criteria.
5 To create solutions by compiling information together in a different way.
6 To design model by combining elements in a new pattern or proposing new
solutions.
 Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learner will be able to:
Identify problems based on societal /research needs and formulate a solution
1
strategy.
2 Apply fundamentals to develop solutions to solve societal problems in a group
Analyze the specific need, formulate the problem and deduce the interdisciplinary
3
approaches, software-based solutions and computer applications.
Develop systematic flow chart, evaluate inter disciplinary practices, devices,
4
available software, estimate and recommend possible solutions.
Draw the proper inferences from available results through theoretical/ experimental/
5
simulations and assemble physical systems.
6 Create devises or design a computer program or develop computer application.

• Guidelines for Mini Project -2A

Expected outcome is hardware based, “A Working Model.”
Students shall form a group of 3 to 4 students, while forming a group shall not be allowed
less than three or more than four students, as it is a group activity.
Students should find ‘List of Mini project – 2A problems’ in University web portal
www.mu.ac.in, and in consultation with faculty supervisor/ head of department/ internal
committee of faculties select the title.
Students shall submit implementation plan in the form of Gant/ PERT/ CPM chart, which
will cover weekly activity of mini project.
A log book to be prepared by each group, wherein group can record weekly work progress,
guide/ supervisor can verify and record notes/ comments.
Faculty supervisor may give inputs to students during mini project activity; however, focus
shall be on self-learning.
Students in a group shall understand problem effectively, propose multiple solution and
select best possible solution in consultation with guide/ supervisor.
Students shall convert the best solution into working model using various components of
their domain areas and demonstrate.
The solution to be validated with proper justification and report to be compiled in standard
format of University of Mumbai.
With the focus on the self -learning, innovation, addressing societal problems and
entrepreneurship quality development within the students through the Mini Projects, it is
preferable that Students come out with original solution.
However, based on the individual students or group capability, with the mentor’s
recommendations, if the proposed Mini Project adhering to the qualitative aspects mentioned
above gets completed in odd semester, then that group can be allowed to work on the
extension of the Mini Project with suitable improvements/ modifications or a completely
new project idea in even semester. This policy can be adopted on case-by-case basis.
 List of approved problems for Mini Project -2A:
Construction of Model showing New application of alternative materials and byproducts
H501:
of different industries for Durability and sustainability.
Construction of Model/ device for Smart Traffic Management System Using Internet of
H502:
Things
H503: IOT based smart device for traffic signal monitoring system using vehicle Count.
Mini Project on Construction of Model showing New application of use of Fly Ash in
H504:
Civil Engineering works.
Mini Project on specimen of Modified Concrete Pavements (using unconventional,
H505:
recycled or waste product)
H506: Novel device for Base isolation system for multistoried building
H507: Mini project on specimen of light transmitting concrete.
H508: Model of Novel Seismic isolation devices for bridge structures.
H509: Novel Applications of Bamboo as a building material specimen.
H510: Development of device using sensors for deflection of girders. Beams, slabs or bridges.
H511: Development of device using sensors for detection of fracture in Railway tracks.
H512: Mini project on specimen of Bubble deck slab.
Construction of specimen of GFRG panels as walls in buildings instead of conventional
H513:
walls.
Construction of specimen of Agro waste reinforced panels as walls in buildings instead
H514:
of conventional walls.
Construction of specimen of unconventional panels as walls in buildings instead of
H515:
conventional walls.
H516: Construction of specimen of Ferro cement Slab as a replacement to RCC slab.
H517: Construction of specimen of No Fines Concrete or porous Concrete and its applications.
H518: Construction of Model of Novel Soil Stability technique to prevent landslides.
H519: Construction of Model of a dwelling unit (house) in rural area.
H520: Typical design of Model for construction of toilets in rural India.
H521: Construction of Model for Typical applications of Ferro concrete.
H522: Construction of Model of road paths with locally sourced materials in villages.
H523: Construction of Model showing Typical application of Prestressed concrete.
H524: Construction of Model showing Typical application of fiber reinforced concrete.

(This is tentative list, this list will be continuously updated by contributions

from faculty, industry and alumni.)
Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project:
• Term Work
The review/ progress monitoring committee shall be constituted by head of departments of each
institute. The progress of mini project to be evaluated on continuous basis, minimum two reviews
in each semester.
In continuous assessment focus shall also be on each individual student, assessment based on
individual’s contribution in group activity, their understanding and response to questions.
Distribution of Term work marks for both semesters shall be as below:
Marks awarded by guide/supervisor based on log book : 10 Marks
Marks awarded by review committee : 10 Marks
Quality of Project report : 5 Marks
Review/progress monitoring committee may consider following points for assessment based on
either one year or half year project as mentioned in general guidelines.

• One-year project:
Only if a project is very demanding it will be considered for ‘One Year Project’. Subject to
approval by the Head of the department.
Outcome shall be a ‘Hardware and a software based’ solution
There shall also a ‘technical paper’ to be presented in conference/published in journal (UGC
approved) or student’s competition.
In first semester entire theoretical solution shall be ready, including components/system
selection and cost analysis. Two reviews will be conducted based on presentation given by
students group.
First shall be for finalization of problem
Second shall be on finalization of proposed solution of problem.
In second semester expected work shall be procurement of component’s/systems, building
of working prototype, testing and validation of results based on work completed in an earlier
semester.
First review is based on readiness of building working prototype to be conducted.
Second review shall be based on poster presentation cum demonstration of working model
in last month of the said semester.

• Half-year project:
In this case in one semester students’ group shall complete project in all aspects including
Identification of need/problem
Proposed final solution
Procurement of components/systems
Building prototype and testing
Two reviews will be conducted for continuous assessment,
First shall be for finalization of problem and proposed solution.
Second shall be for implementation and testing of solution.
• Assessment criteria of Mini Project:
Mini Project shall be assessed based on following criteria:
Quality of survey/ need identification
Clarity of Problem definition based on need.
Innovativeness in solutions
Feasibility of proposed problem solutions and selection of best solution
Cost effectiveness
Societal impact
Innovativeness
Cost effectiveness and Societal impact
Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements
Effective use of skill sets
Effective use of standard engineering norms
Contribution of an individual as member or leader
Clarity in written and oral communication
In one year, project, first semester evaluation may be based on first six criteria and remaining
may be used for second semester evaluation of performance of students in mini project.
In case of half year project all criteria in generic may be considered for evaluation of
performance of students in mini project.

• Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project Practical/Oral Examination:

Report should be prepared as per the guidelines issued by the University of Mumbai.
Mini Project shall be assessed through a presentation and demonstration of working model
by the student project group to a panel of Internal and External Examiners preferably from
industry or research organizations having experience of more than five years and approved
by head of Institution.
Students shall be motivated to publish a paper based on the work in Conferences/students
competitions.
• Mini Project shall be assessed based on following points:
Quality of problem and Clarity
Innovativeness in solutions
Cost effectiveness and Societal impact
Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements
Effective use of skill sets
Effective use of standard engineering norms
Contribution of an individuals as member or leader
Clarity in written and oral communication
AC-29/06/2021
Item No.-6.2
 Syllabus for Approval

Title of the Course : Third Year in Bachelor of Civil Engineering

After Passing First Year Engineering as per the

Eligibility for Admission :
Ordinance 0.6242

Passing Marks : 40%

Ordinances / Regulations (if any) : Ordinance 0.6242

No. of Years / Semesters : 8 semesters

Level : Under Graduation

Pattern : Semester

Status : New

To be implemented from
: With effect from Academic Year: 2021-2022
Academic Year

Dr. S. K. Ukarande Dr Anuradha Muzumdar

Associate Dean Dean
Faculty of Science and Technology, Faculty of Science and Technology,
University of Mumbai, Mumbai University of Mumbai, Mumbai
 Preamble

To meet the challenge of ensuring excellence in engineering education, the issue of quality needs to be
addressed, debated and taken forward in a systematic manner. Accreditation is the principal means of
quality assurance in higher education. The major emphasis of accreditation process is to measure the
outcomes of the program that is being accredited. In line with this Faculty of Science and Technology
(in particular Engineering) of University of Mumbai has taken a lead in incorporating philosophy of
outcome based education in the process of curriculum development.

Faculty resolved that course objectives and course outcomes are to be clearly defined for each course,
so that all faculty members in affiliated institutes understand the depth and approach of course to be
taught, which will enhance learner’s learning process. Choice based Credit and grading system enables
a much-required shift in focus from teacher-centric to learner-centric education since the workload
estimated is based on the investment of time in learning and not in teaching. It also focuses on
continuous evaluation which will enhance the quality of education. Credit assignment for courses is
based on 15 weeks teaching learning process, however content of courses is to be taught in 13 weeks
and remaining 2 weeks to be utilized for revision, guest lectures, coverage of content beyond syllabus
etc.

There was a concern that the earlier revised curriculum more focused on providing information and
knowledge across various domains of the said program, which led to heavily loading of students in
terms of direct contact hours. In this regard, faculty of science and technology resolved that to minimize
the burden of contact hours, total credits of entire program will be of 170, wherein focus is not only on
providing knowledge but also on building skills, attitude and self learning. Therefore in the present
curriculum skill based laboratories and mini projects are made mandatory across all disciplines of
engineering in second and third year of programs, which will definitely facilitate self learning of
students. The overall credits and approach of curriculum proposed in the present revision is in line with
AICTE model curriculum.

The present curriculum will be implemented for Third Year of Engineering from the Academic year
2021-22. Subsequently this will be carried forward for Final Year Engineering in the academic years
2022-23.

Dr. S. K. Ukarande Dr Anuradha Muzumdar

Associate Dean Dean
Faculty of Science and Technology, Faculty of Science and Technology,
University of Mumbai, Mumbai University of Mumbai, Mumbai
 Incorporation and Implementation of Online Contents from
NPTEL/ Swayam Platform

The curriculum revision is mainly focused on knowledge component, skill-based activities and project-
based activities. Self-learning opportunities are provided to learners. In the revision process this time
in particular Revised syllabus of ‘C’ scheme wherever possible additional re source links of platforms
such as NPTEL, Swayam are appropriately provided. In an earlier revision of curriculum in the year
2012 and 2016 in Revised scheme ‘A' and ‘B' respectively, efforts were made to use online contents
more appropriately as additional learning materials to enhance learning of students.

In the current revision based on the recommendation of AICTE model curriculum overall credits are
reduced to 171, to provide opportunity of self -learning to learner. Learners are now getting sufficient
time for self-learning either through online courses or additional projects for enhancing their knowledge
and skill sets.

The Principals/ HoD’s/ Faculties of all the institute are required to motivate and encourage learners to
use additional online resources available on platforms such as NPTEL/ Swayam. Learners can be
advised to take up online courses, on successful completion they are required to submit certification for
the same. This will definitely help learners to facilitate their enhanced learning based on their interest.

Dr. S. K. Ukarande Dr Anuradha Muzumdar

Associate Dean Dean
Faculty of Science and Technology, Faculty of Science and Technology,
University of Mumbai, Mumbai University of Mumbai, Mumbai
 Preface

The engineering education in India is expanding and is set to increase manifold. The major challenge
in the current scenario is to ensure quality to the stakeholders along with expansion. To meet this
challenge, the issue of quality needs to be addressed, debated and taken forward in a systematic manner.
Accreditation is the principal means of quality assurance in higher education and reflects the fact that
in achieving recognition, the institution or program of study is committed and open to external review
to meet certain minimum specified standards. The major emphasis of this accreditation process is to
measure the outcomes of the program that is being accredited. Program Outcomes (POs) are essentially
a range of skills and knowledge that a student will have at the time of graduation from the program. In
line with this, Faculty of Technology of University of Mumbai has taken a lead in incorporating the
philosophy of outcome-based education (OBE) in the process of curriculum development from Rev-
2012 onwards and continued to enhance the curriculum further based on OBE in Rev -2016 and Rev-
2019 “C” scheme.
As Chairman and Members of Board of Studies in Civil Engineering, University of Mumbai, we are
happy to state here that, the Program Educational Objectives (PEOs) for Undergraduate Program were
finalized in a brain storming session, which was attended by more than 40 members from different
affiliated Institutes of the University, who are either Heads of Departments or their senior
representatives from the Department of Civil Engineering. The PEOs finalized for the undergraduate
program in Civil Engineering are listed below;
1. To prepare the Learner with a sound foundation in mathematical, scientific and engineering
fundamentals
2. To motivate the Learner in the art of self-learning and to use modern tools for solving real life
problems
3. To prepare the Learner for a successful career in Indian and Multinational Organisations and
for excelling in post-graduate studies
4. To motivate learners for life-long learning
5. To inculcate a professional and ethical attitude, good leadership qualities and commitment to
social responsibilities in the Learner’s thought process
In addition to the above listed PEOs, every institute is encouraged to add a few (2 -3) more PEOs suiting
their institute vision and mission
Apart from the PEOs, for each course of the program, objectives and expected outcomes from a
learner’s point of view are also included in the curriculum to support the philosophy of OBE. We
strongly believe that even a small step taken in the right direction will definitely help in providing
quality education to the major stakeholders.

Board of Studies in Civil Engineering

University of Mumbai

Dr. S. K. Ukarande Chairman Dr. V. Jothiprakash Member

Dr. D.D. Sarode Member Dr. K. K. Sangle Member
Dr. S. B. Charhate Member Dr. D. G. Regulawar Member
Dr. Milind Waikar Member Dr. A. R. Kambekar Member

Dr. R.B. Magar Member Dr. Seema Jagtap Member

 Undergraduate Program Structure for Third year Civil Engineering
University of Mumbai
(With Effect from A.Y. 2021-2022)
Semester VI

Course Teaching Scheme Credit Assigned

Course Name (Contact Hours)
Code
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
Design & Drawing of Steel
CEC601 03 - - 03 - - 03
Structures
CEC602 Water Resources Engineering 03 - - 03 - - 03
CEC603 Geotechnical Engineering-II 03 - - 03 - - 03
CEC604 Environmental Engineering 04 - - 04 - - 04
Department Level Optional
CEDLO601X 03 - - 03 - - 03
Course -2
Design & Drawing of Steel
CEL601 - 02 - - 01 - 01
Structures
CEL602 Water Resources Engineering - 02 - - 01 - 01
CEL603 Geotechnical Engineering-II - 02 - - 01 - 01
CEL604 Environmental Engineering - 02 - - 01 - 01
CEL605 Skill Based Lab Course – III - 03 - - 1.5 - 1.5
CEM601 Mini Project – 2B - 03 $ - - 1.5 - 1.5
Total 16 14 - 16 07 - 23

Examination Scheme
Internal
End Exam
Course Assessment Term Pract.
Course Name Sem Duration Total
Code Test Test Work /Oral
Avg. Exam (Hrs.)
– I - II
Design & Drawing of Steel
CEC601 20 20 20 80 04 - - 100
Structures
Water Resources
CEC602 20 20 20 80 03 - - 100
Engineering
CEC603 Geotechnical Engineering-II 20 20 20 80 03 - - 100
CEC604 Environmental Engineering 20 20 20 80 03 - - 100
Department Level
CEDLO601X 20 20 20 80 03 - - 100
Optional Course -2
Design & Drawing of Steel
CEL601 - - - - - 25 25 50
Structures
Water Resources
CEL602 - - - - - 25 25 50
Engineering
CEL603 Geotechnical Engineering-II - - - - - 25 25 50
CEL604 Environmental Engineering - - - - - 25 25 50
CEL605 Skill Based Lab Course-III - - - - - 25 25 50
CEM601 Mini Project – 2B - - - - - 25 25 50
Total 100 400 - 150 150 800
$ indicates work load of Learner (Not Faculty), for Mini Project.

Undergraduate Program Structure for Third year Civil Engineering

University of Mumbai

(With Effect from A.Y. 2021-2022)

Semester - VI

Department Level Optional Course – 2

Course Code
Sr. No. Department Level Optional Course – 2
CEDLO601X

1 CEDLO6011 Rock Mechanics

2 CEDLO6012 Biological Processes & Contaminant Removal

3 CEDLO6013 Construction Equipment & Techniques

4 CEDLO6014 Urban Infrastructure Planning

5 CEDLO6015 Open Channel Flow

6 CEDLO6016 Computational Structural Analysis

7 CEDLO6017 Traffic Engineering and Management

8 CEDLO6018 Introduction to Offshore Engineering

 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC601 Design and Drawing of Steel Structures 03

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration of Total
End Sem Term
End Sem Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 4 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

Steel structures are preferred due to their higher strength, speed of construction and aesthetic
view. Civil Engineers must have knowledge of designing and detailing of steel structures to
make structures safe and serviceable during its life span. I.S. code specifying the use of Limit
State design philosophy for design of steel structures and its various components. This course
is designed to provide basic knowledge of design and detailing of steel structures.
Objectives
1 To make students familiar with behavior of steel structure and their components under the
action of various loads.
2 To train the students for effective use of IS codes, design tables and aids in analyzing and
designing the steel structures by limit state method.
3 To help students design connections of steel members.
4 To equip students with aspects required for designing tension member, compression
members and column bases.
5 To equip students with aspects required for designing of flexural members.
6 To aid students in designing steel trusses.
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Introduction
Types of steel structures, Properties of Structural Steel, Indian
Standard Specifications and Sections, Advantages and
1 limitations of WSM, permissible stresses in WSM. Introduction 03
1.1
to Limit State Design, partial safety factors for load and
resistance, design load combinations, section classification
such as plastic, compact, semi-compact and slender.
Design of Bolted And Welded Connections
Design of bolted and welded connections for axial force, beam
2 06
2.1 to beam and beam to column connections. Framed, stiffened
and unstiffened seat connections, bracket connections.
Design of Tension Members
3.1 Introduction, types of tension members, net area calculation.
3 3.2 Design strength due to yielding, rupture and block shear. 04

Design of tension members with welded and bolted end

3.3
connection using single angle section & double angle section.
Design of Compression Members and Column Bases
Introduction, types of compression members, classification of
cross sections, types of buckling, effective length of column and
4.1 slenderness ratio, buckling curves, design of compression
4 members as struts using single angle sections & double angle 11
section.
Design of axially loaded column using rolled steel sections,
4.2
design of built-up column, laced and battened Columns.
4.3 Design of slab bases & gusseted base.
Design of Flexural Members
Design strength in bending, effective length, Lateral torsion
buckling behavior of unrestrained beams, design of single rolled
section with or without flange plates, design strength of laterally
5 5.1 11
supported beams, low and high shear, design strength of
laterally unsupported beams, web buckling, web crippling,
shear lag effect and deflection.
Design of welded plate girder: proportioning of web and
5.2
flanges, flange plate curtailment
Design of Truss
Design of determinate truss. Calculation of dead load, live load
6 and wind load acting on truss. Load combinations and 04
6.1
calculation of internal forces. Design and detailing of members.
Support detailing. Design of angle section purlin.
Total 39
 Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Use the knowledge of Limit State Design philosophy as applied to steel structures. IS
800 code clauses
2 Design bolted and welded connections.
3 Design members subjected to axial tension.
4 Design compression members, Built-up columns and column bases.
5 Design members subjected to bending moment, shear force etc.
6 Estimate design loads as per IS 875 for roof truss and design the Steel roof truss.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total Five questions. {(𝟑𝟐 + (𝟒 × 𝟏𝟔)}
2 Question 1 will be compulsory carrying 32 marks and should be based on steel design
project.
3 Remaining questions will be carrying 4 × 16 marks, mixed in nature (for example if
Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be from any other module. Only three
questions carrying 16 marks need to be solved.
4 Total Four questions need to be solved. (32+16+16+16)
5 In end semester examination, students will write answers in answer booklet and draw
sketches on half imperial drawing sheet.
6 Use of relevant IS codes shall be allowed in the examination

Recommended Books:
1 Design of Steel Structure by N. Subramanian, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
2 Limit state design of steel structures by S. K. Duggal, McGraw Hill Education (India)
Pvt. Limited, New Delhi.
3 Design of steel structure by Limit State Method as per IS: 800- 2007 by Bhavikatti S.
S., I.K. International Publishing House, New Delhi.
4 Design of Steel Structures by K. S. Sai Ram, Pearson Education, New Delhi.
5 Limit state design of steel structures as per IS 800/2007. by S. Kanthimathinathan. I.K.
International Publishing House, New Delhi.
6 Relevant Indian Specifications, Bureau of Indian Standards, New Delhi
7 Limit state design of steel structure by Dr. V.L. Shah and Gore, Structure publication
Pvt. Pune.
Reference Books:
1 Design of Steel Structure by Allen Williams
2 Practical Design of Steel Structure by Karuna Moy Ghosh, Whittles Publishing
3 Structural design and drawing by D. Krishnamurthy, CBS Publishers, New Delhi.
4 Teaching Resources Material for steel structures by INSDAG Kolkata.
 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC602 Water Resources Engineering 03

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration of Total
End Sem Term
End Sem Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

India is an agricultural country where majority of population lives in villages so agricultural

industry is the backbone of Indian economy. Being a tropical country with large temporal and
spatial variation of rainfall and availability of rainfall only for three to four months, irrigation
is strongly needed in India. To satisfy this need, enhancing the irrigation facilities in the country
is required. This course provides necessary knowledge and information about various irrigation
methods as well as water requirements of crops, hydrologic processes, control level fixation of
dams and reservoirs and hydraulics of wells. In addition to this, it provides necessary
knowledge about analysis and design of gravity dams and earthen dams, different silt theories
related to irrigation channels, detailed classification of canal head -works and its distribution
system and finally discusses about different canal structures and cross drainage works.
Objectives
1 To study different irrigation engineering methods and water requirement of crops.
2 To study hydrological cycle, its elements and plotting of hydrographs.
3 To study and calculate discharge from aquifers.
4 To study control level fixation for reservoir, Dams i.e., gravity dam, its various components
and analysis and suitable conditions of earthen dam and its seepage analysis.
5 To study importance of silt theories and its design considerations.
6 To study Canal headwork, its distribution system and design of canal structures.
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Irrigation Methods and Water Requirement of Crops
National water policy. Introduction to irrigation and need of
irrigation, Benefits of irrigation and ill effects of irrigation,
1.1
types of Irrigation Projects: minor, medium and major
irrigation projects and National water policy.
Methods of Irrigation Systems: Surface irrigation and different
1 1.2 techniques of water distribution for surface irrigation, 07
Subsurface irrigation, sprinkler irrigation and drip irrigation.
Water Requirement of Crops: Crops and crop seasons in India,
delta and duty of crops, relationship between delta and duty of
1.3 crops. Soil water relationship and its significance from
irrigation considerations, root zone soil water, infiltration,
consumptive use, frequency of irrigation.
Hydrology
Hydrologic cycle, Precipitation: Forms and Types of
2.1
precipitations.
Measurement of rainfall by rain gauges and stream flow
2.2 measurement. calculation of missing rainfall data and adequacy
of rain gauge stations.
2 Runoff: Runoff- factors affecting runoff, computation of 07
2.3 runoff, yield of the catchment runoff hydrograph, flood
discharge and its calculations.
Hydrograph: Flood hydrograph- Its components and base-flow
separation, Unit hydrograph, application of unit hydrograph,
2.4
methods of deriving unit hydrograph, S-hydrograph and its
application.
Ground Water and Well Hydraulics
3.1 Ground water resources and occurrence of ground water.
3.2 Well hydraulics: steady state flow conditions in wells.
3 05
3.3 Equilibrium equations for confined and unconfined aquifer.
3.4 Aquifer tests.
3.5 Difference between open well and tube well, Well Losses
Dams and Spillways
Reservoir, various zones of storage reservoir, control level
fixation for a reservoir. Introduction to reservoir sedimentation
4.1
4 and 09
control measures.
Gravity Dams: Definition, typical cross section and components
4.2
of gravity dam, forces acting on gravity dam, modes of failure
 of gravity dam, structural stability analysis of gravity dam,
elementary and practical profile of gravity dam, low and high
gravity dam, galleries in gravity dam – Function of gallery and
different cross-sections of gallery adopted in practice, joints in
gravity dam. control of cracking in concrete dams.
Earthen Dam: Types of earthen dams and methods of
construction of earthen dam, causes and failures of earthen
4.3 dams, seepage line/phreatic line for different conditions and its
location using graphical method, seepage control through
embankment and through foundations.
Spillways: Introduction, types of spillways – its working and
4.4
functionality.
Irrigation Channels (Silt Theories)
Kennedy’s theory and method of channel designs silt supporting
5.1
capacity according to Kennedy’s theory.
Lacey’s regime theory and application of Lacey’s theory for
5.2
5 designing channel cross-section. 06
5.3 Comparison between Kennedy’s theory and Lacey’s theory.
5.4 Drawbacks of Kennedy’s theory and Lacey’s theory.
5.5 Introduction to sediment transport in channels.
Canal Headwork-Distribution System and Canal Structures
Canal Headwork and Distribution System: Classification of
6.1 canals, canal alignment, canal losses, canal lining, water
logging and remedial measures for water logging.
6 05
Canal Structures Canal Falls and types of canal falls, canal
escapes and types of canal escapes, canal regulators and types
6.2
of canal regulators, canal outlets and types of canal outlets,
cross drainage works and types of cross drainage work.
Total 39

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Describe National water Policy, Calculate Crop water requirement and Classify
various types and methods of irrigation.
2 Estimate flood discharge and Runoff by traditional and modern usage tools for
planning and management of water resources projects.
3 Apply knowledge on ground water, well hydraulics to estimate the safe yield and
ground water potential
4 Analyze and design gravity dams and earthen dams with spillways for sustainable
development
5 Compare different silt theories related to irrigation channel and design the same.
6 Classify and Explain various canal structures and suggest remedial measures for water
logging to save fertile irrigation
Internal Assessment 20 Marks
Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.
End Semester Examination 80 Marks
Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
3
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only four questions need to be solved in total.

Recommended Books:
Irrigation and Water Power Engineering: B.C. Punmia, PandeB.B.Lal, A.K Jain. Laxmi
1
Publications Pvt, Ltd. New Delhi.
Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulic Structures: S.K. Ukarande, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd.
2
ISBN-9789383656899.
Irrigation Water Resources and Water Power Engineering: P.N. Modi, Standard Book
3
House, Delhi, ISBN 978-81-87401-29-0.
4 Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulics Structures: S. K. Garg, Khanna Publishers. Delhi.
5 Design of Irrigation Structures: S. K. Sharma, S. Chand and Co.
6 Theory and Design of Irrigation Structures: R. S. Varshney and R, C. Gupta, Nem Chand
7 Engineering for Dams, Vol. I to III: Crager, Justin and Hinds, John Wiley
8 Design of Small Dams: USBR.
9 Hydro Power Structures: R. S. Varshney, Nem Chand and Bross.
10 Concrete Dams: R. S. Varshney, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co.
 Semester VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC603 Geotechnical Engineering-II 3

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
3 -- -- 3 -- -- 3

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Term Total

Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam Work

20 20 20 80 3 Hrs. -- -- -- 100

Rationale
Basic knowledge of analysis and design of foundations is very important for all civil engineers,
more so for geotechnical and structural engineers. Soil testing (both field and lab tests) and its
analysis are not only compulsory prerequisites for the analysis, design and construction of any
major structure but also holds lucrative consultancy work and job opportunities in the field of civil
engineering. Immense research opportunities are also available in this field.

Objectives
1 Students will gain knowledge of consolidation theory.
2 Students will evaluate the shear strength characteristics of the soil. Moreover, they would
apply the knowledge for solving the related problems.
3 Students will analyze stability of slopes.
4 Students will analyze and evaluate lateral earth pressure.
5 Students will analyze and design shallow foundation.
6 Students will analyze and design deep foundation.
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Module Name- Consolidation of soils
Compressibility & settlement, comparison between compaction
& consolidation, concept of excess pore water pressure, initial,
primary secondary consolidation, spring analogy for primary
1.1 consolidation, consolidation test results, coefficient of
compressibility, coefficient of volume change, compression,
expansion, recompression indices, normally and over
1 consolidated soils. 06
Terzhaghi’s theory of consolidation (no proof)- assumptions,
coefficient of vertical consolidation, distribution of hydrostatic
excess pore water pressure with depth & time, time factor,
1.2
relationship between time factor and degree of consolidation,
determination of coefficient of vertical consolidation, pre-
consolidation pressure.
Final settlements of a soil deposit in the field, time settlement
1.3
curve, field consolidation curve.
Module Name- Shear strength
Introduction, frictional cohesive strength, state of stresses in
soil mass, principal stresses, determination of stresses on an
2.1 inclined plane by using analytical and Mohr’s circle method,
important characteristics of Mohr’s circle.

Coulomb theory, Mohr-Coulomb theory- shear strength

parameters; Mohr-Coulomb failure envelope- relation between
2.2
major and minor principal stresses, total & effective stress
2 05
analysis.
Different types of drainage conditions UU, CU and CD: Direct
shear test, Triaxial compression test, Unconfined compression
test, Vane shear test; comparison between direct & triaxial
2.3
tests, interpretation of test results of direct shear & triaxial
shear tests stress-strain curves.

Determination of shear strength of soil- pull out test and

2.4
Introduction to liquefaction of Soils.
Module Name- Stability of Slopes
Introduction: Types of slopes, types of slope failures, factors of
3.1
3 safety. 06
Stability analysis of infinite slopes in i) cohesionless soil and
3.2 ii) cohesive soil under a) dry condition, b) submerged condition
and c) steady seepage condition along the slope.
 Stability analysis of finite slopes: i) Taylor’s stability number
3.3
ii) friction circle method iii) Swedish circle.
Module Name - Lateral Earth Pressure Theories
Introduction to Lateral Earth Pressure Theories: Concept of

4.1 lateral earth pressure based on vertical and horizontal stresses,

different types of lateral earth pressure
Rankine’s earth pressure theory: i) assumptions, ii) active and
passive states in cohesionless soil: effect of submergence,
4 4.2 08
effect of uniform surcharge, effect of inclined surcharge iii)
active and passive states in cohesive soil
Coulomb’s wedge theory: i) assumptions, ii) active and passive
4.3 states in cohesionless soil, iii) active and passive states in
cohesive soil
4.4 Rehbann’s Graphical Method (no proof)
4.5 Culmann’s Graphical Method (no proof)
Module Name- Shallow Foundations
Introduction: types of shallow foundations, definitions of
5.1 different bearing
Capacities
Theoretical methods of determining bearing capacity of
shallow foundations:
i) Terzaghi’s theory: assumptions, zones of failure, modes of
5 failure, ultimate bearing capacity equations for general and 08
5.2 local shear failure, factors influencing bearing capacity:
shape of footing and water table, limitations of Terzaghi’s
theory
ii) Vesic’s theory: bearing capacity equation I.S. Code
Method: bearing capacity equation
Field methods of determining bearing capacity of shallow
5.3
foundations: i) standard penetration test and ii) plate load test
Module Name- Pile Foundations
Introduction to pile foundations: necessity of pile foundations,
6.1
types of pile foundation.
Theoretical methods of determining load carrying capacity of
6 6.2 06
pile foundations: i) static formulae and ii) dynamic formulae
Field method of determining load carrying capacity of pile
6.3
foundations: pile load test
Group action of piles, settlement of pile groups, negative skin
6.4
friction
Total Hours 39
 Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Evaluate the consolidation parameters for the soil.
2 Calculate the shear strength parameters for the soil.
3 Calculate the factors of safety of different types of slopes under various soil condition,
analyze the stability of slopes.
4 Calculate lateral earth pressure under various soil condition.
5 Calculate bearing capacity of shallow foundations using theoretical and field methods.
6 Calculate load carrying capacity of individual as well as group of pile foundation using
theoretical and field methods and pile settlement.

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents
and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents
covered in Test I). Average of the two will be considered as IA marks.

End Semester Examination (80 Marks):

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the
curriculum.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1 Soil Mechanics and Foundation: Dr. B.C. Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain, Arun Kumar
Jain; Laxmi Publications
2 Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering: K.R. Arora; Standard publishers and
Distributors
3 Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering: V.N.S Murthy; Saitech Publications
4 Geotechnical Engineering: C. Venkatramaiah; New age International
5 Theoretical Soil Mechanic: K. Terzaghi; John Wiley and Sons
6 Fundamentals of Soil Engineering: D. W. Taylor; John Wiley and sons
7 Relevant Indian Standard Specification Code: BIS Publications, New Delhi
8 Soil Mechanics in Theory and Practice: Alam Singh; Asia Publishing House
9 Geotechnical Engineering: Purushothama Raj; Tata McGraw Hill Publications
10 Basic and Applied Soil Mechanic: Gopal Ranjan and A.S. Rao; New Age International
 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEC604 Environmental Engineering 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
04 - - 04 - - 04

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration of Total
End Sem Term
End Sem Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

Every civil engineer must be acquainted with the principles of public health engineering,
purification of water, sewage collection, design of water and sewage treatment and develop
rational approaches towards sustainable waste management via appropriate treatment and
reuse. The course deals with the overall features and study of treatment of water, building
drainage, rain water harvesting, sewage treatment processes and solid waste management. The
course also lays emphasis on the knowledge of Air and Noise pollution.
Objectives
1 To demonstrate the necessary knowledge and concepts in the fields of water supply and
quality of water.
2 To impart necessary skill for the design and operation of various units of water treatment
facilities.
3 To recognize the necessary knowledge of good plumbing system, building drainage and
rainwater harvesting.
4 To demonstrate the necessary knowledge on domestic sewage and Sewerage system.
5 To develop a flow Content for sewage treatment and design its units.
6 To impart the basic understanding of Air pollution, noise pollution and solid waste so as
to control its adversity on ambient environment.
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Water Supply and Quality Of Water
Water supply: Water supply systems, water resources, types of
1.1 intake structures, distribution systems of water and distribution
layouts.
1 04
Quality of water: Introduction to pure water: potable,
wholesome, palatable, distilled, polluted and contaminated
1.2
water, drinking water standards and characteristics of water,
water borne diseases.
Water Treatment
WTP: Typical layout of WTP, Aeration, Types of Aeration
2.1 systems, sedimentation, types of settling, tube settlers, design
of sedimentation tank.
Coagulation and flocculation: Principle of coagulation,
2.2
flocculation, Clari flocculator, coagulants aids.
Filtration: rapid sand filters, operation, cleaning and back-
2.3 washing, Entire design of rapid gravity filter with under
drainage system. Pressure filter: Construction and operation
2 15
Disinfection: Different methods of disinfection, chlorination
and chemistry of chlorination, chlorine demand, free and
2.4 combined chlorine, various forms of chlorine, types of
chlorination. Numerical to calculate quantity of required
chlorine doses.
Advanced and Miscellaneous Treatments: Water softening by
lime soda process and by base exchange method, Reverse
2.5
Osmosis, Activated carbon, Membrane filtration, Removal of
Iron and Manganese.
Building Water Supply, Drainage and Rainwater Harvesting
Building water supply: Water demands, Per capita Supply,
3.1
Service connection from main, Water meter.
Building drainage: basic principles, traps-types, location and
3 3.2 04
function, Systems of Plumbing, anti siphonic and vent pipes.
Rainwater harvesting: Need for rainwater harvesting, Annual
3.3 potential, Roof-top rain water harvesting. Numerical on annual
rainwater harvesting potential.
 Domestic Sewage and Sewerage System:
Sewage: Introduction to domestic sewage, and storm water,
System of sanitation, Physical and chemical characteristics,
4.1
decomposition of sewage, BOD, COD, numerical on BOD.
MPCB norms for disposal of sewage effluent.
4 Sewerage system: Systems of sewerage and their layouts: 08
Separate, Combined and partially combined system, merits and
demerits, self-cleaning velocity and non-scouring velocity,
4.2
Sewer- Shape, hydraulic design of sewers, Laying and testing
of sewers, manhole-location, necessity, types and drop
manhole, ventilation
Sewage Treatment
Treatment processes: Objective, methods of treatment, flow
sheets showing Preliminary, Primary, Secondary and Tertiary
5.1
treatment. Primary treatment: Screening, Grit removal, Oil and
Grease removal, settling tank.
Secondary Treatment Methods: Trickling filter- Principle,
Process description and Design of trickling filter. Activated
sludge process (ASP) - Principle, Process description,
5 15
Recirculation of sludge, (numerical), Sludge volume index.
Introduction to Biological Treatment: Aerated lagoons,
5.2
Oxidation ponds, oxidation ditches.
Self-purification of natural waterbodiess: Oxygen economy,
Disposal of treated effluent. Disposal of Raw and treated
sewage on land and water, DO sag curve.
Rural and Low-cost sanitation: Septic Tank and Soak Pit –
5.3
Operation, suitability and Design
Air Pollution, Noise Pollution and Municipal Solid Waste
Management
Air pollution: Composition of air, Quantification of air
6.1 pollutants, Air quality standards, Effect of air pollution on
6 Environment, Introduction to Air pollution control devices. 06
Noise pollution: Basic concept and measurement, Effects of
6.2
noise, and control methods, and numerical on sound level.
Municipal Solid Waste Management: Sources, storage,
6.3
treatment, disposal,5R Principles.
Total 52
 Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Analyse the quality of water and make outline of water Supply scheme.
2 Design the various units of water treatment plant and apply the advanced,
miscellaneous treatments whenever necessary.
3 Build service connection of water supply from main and building drainage system at
construction site along with rain water harvesting layout.
4 Analyse and plan sewerage system along with test for sewer line.
5 Design the units of sewage treatment plant. Also, able to apply the knowledge of low-
cost treatment and stream sanitation.
6 Understand air pollution, noise pollution and functional elements of solid waste
management.
Internal Assessment 20 Marks
Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

Site Visit:
The students will visit to sewage treatment plant/ water treatment plant in the nearby vicinity
or in the city and prepare detailed report thereof. This report will form a part of the term work

Recommended Books:
1 Water Supply Engineering: S. K. Garg, Khanna Publication.
2 Water Supply Engineering: P.N. Modi, Rajsons Publication.
3 Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering: S.K. Hussain, Oxford & IBH Publication,
New Delhi
4 Environmental Engineering: B. C. Punmia, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi.
5 Solid waste management in developing countries: A.D. Bhide and B.B. Sundaresan
6 Environmental Engineering Vol II- Sewage Disposal and Air Pollution Engineering: S.
K. Garg, Khanna Publishers New Delhi
7 Wastewater Treatment- Concepts and Design Approach: G. L. Karia and R. A.
Christian
8 Integrated solid waste management, Tchobanoglous. Theissen and Vigil, McGraw Hill
Publication.
Reference Books:
1 Manual on Wastewater Treatment 3rd Ed. Pub: CPH and Env. Engg. Organization,
Ministry of Urban Development, Govt. of India, New Delhi, 1991.
2 Plumbing Engineering, Theory and Practice: Patil S. M., Seema Publication, Mumbai.
3 Manual on Municipal Solid Waste Management: Ministry of urban development, New
Delhi.
4 Water Supply and Sewerage:E.W. Steel.
5 Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, (latest Ed.): Ministry of Urban Development,
New Delhi.
6 Water supply and pollution control: J.W. Clark, W. Veisman, M.J. Hammer,
International textbook company.
7 CPHEEO Manual on Water Supply and Treatment.
8 CPHEEO Manual on Sewage and Treatment.

9 Environmental Engineering: Peavy,H.S., RoweD.R., TchobanoglousG.; 1991, Tata-

Mcgraw Hill.
 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

Department Level Optional Course -2
CEDLO6011 03
Rock Mechanics

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration of Total
End Sem Term
End Sem Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

The Civil Engineering structures are built on or through rocks. The design of structures depends
on the rock mass properties and the interaction between the rock and the structure. This
demands the study of deformation resulting from the strain of rocks in response to various
stresses working on them. The mechanisms and character of the deformation of rocks can be
investigated through laboratory experiments. The course will give an idea of in- situ testing of
the rock and observation of geological conditions that can affect the way a rock behaves when
subjected to loads and stresses.
Objectives
1 To provide basic knowledge of Rock -Mechanics to understand design aspects of various
structures on or through rocks.
2 To study the various classification schemes of rock masses and their application.
3 To study the physical properties of rocks and various lab test conducted on them to
determine the strength.
4 To determine properties and behavior of various types of rock under different loading
conditions.
5 To study bearing capacity, stress distribution and factor of safety within the rock.
6 To study the stability of rock slopes and design aspects of openings in/on the rocks.
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Structural Geology and Data Interpretation
1.1 Introduction to Rock Mechanics and Importance

1 1.2 Geological classification of rocks 05

1.3 Description of discontinuities and their effect on rocks
1.4 Stereographic Analysis of structural Geology
Engineering Classification of Rocks and Rock Masses:
Classification of intact rocks. Rock mass classifications: Rock
2.1 Quality Designation (RQD), Rock Structural Rating (RSR),
Rock Mass Quality (Q system).
2 Strength and Modulus from classifications, classification based 06
2.2
on Strength and Modulus.
2.3 Geo-mechanics (RMR)} and Geo-engineering classification

2.4 Deere and Miller’s Engineering Classification

Laboratory Testing of Rocks: Field and Laboratory Tests on
Rocks
3.1 Determination of physical properties of rocks

3.2 Uniaxial Compressive Strength Test

3 3.3 Tensile Strength Test 07

3.4 Direct Shear Test and Triaxial Test

3.5 Slake Durability Test

Schmidt Rebound Hardness, Swelling Pressure and Free-Swell,
3.6
Void Index, Hydraulic fracture, Flat Jack Test
Strength, Modulus and Stress-Strain Responses of Rocks:
Factors influencing rock responses, Strength criteria for
4.1
isotropic intact rocks, Modulus of isotropic intact rocks.
Uni-axial Compressive Strength of intact anisotropic rocks,
4 07
4.2 Strength due to induced anisotropy in rocks, Compressive
Strength and Modulus from SPT.
Stress- strain models (constitutive models, elastic stress-strain
4.3
model, elastic-plastic stress-strain model, Visco-elastic Model.
Bearing Capacity of Rocks:
Estimation of bearing capacity (foundation on intact rock,
5.1 heavily fractured rock), UBC with Hoek-Brown criterion,
5 06
foundation on slope
Stress distribution in rocks, Factor of safety, strengthening
5.2
measures (concrete shear keys, bored concrete piles, tensioned
 cable anchors, concrete block at toe),
Settlement in rocks (from joint factor, for horizontal joints,
5.3
from field tests).
Stability of Rock Slopes & Opening in Rocks
Modes of failure, rotational failure, plane failure, wedge
6.1 method of analysis, buckling failure, toppling failure,
application of stereographic projection, Remedial measures.
Rock Bolting and Grouting: Methods to improve rock mass
responses, grouting in rocks, objectives, contact grouting,
6 6.2 consolidation grouting, process of grouting, grout requirement, 08
types of grout, stage grouting, grout curtain. Rock Bolting Rock
anchors.
Tunneling: Ground conditions in tunneling, Computing
structural discontinuities in rock masses, requirement of lining
6.3
in tunnels, pressure tunnels and tunnels for other purposes,
application of stereographic projection.
Total 39

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Explain basic concepts of Rock -Mechanics and apply it to design aspects of various
Civil Engineering structures on or through the rocks.
2 Classify the rock masses and evaluate them for various Civil Engineering works.
3 Explain the laboratory testing of rocks and determine the physical properties and
strength of intact rocks and rock masses.
4 Explain the stress-strain responses of the rocks and influencing factors.
5 Determine the bearing capacity and factor of safety of rocks.
6 Determine the stability of slopes and underground excavations.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.
Recommended Books:
1 Introduction to Rock Mechanics: Goodman, RE (1989), Canada, Jhon Wiley & Sons.
2 Rock Slope Engineering, Hoek, E and Bray, JW (1977), The Institution of Mining and
Metallurgy, London.
3 Rock Mechanics and Design of Structures on Rock: Obert, Leon and W. I. Duvall.
4 Engineering Rock Mass Classification, Singh, B and Goel RK (20011), Oxford, UK,
Elsevier Inc.
Reference Books:
1 Rock Mechanics in Engineering Practice: K. G. Stagg and O. C. Zienkiewicz, John
Willey and Sons, New York.
2 Rock Mechanics – Vol. I and II: Jumukis, Trans Tech Publication, USA.
3 Fundamentals of Rock Mechanics: Jaeger, JG, Cook, NGW and Zimmerman, RW
(2007) 4 th Ed., Singapore, Blackwell Publishing
4 Rock Mechanics and Design of Structures on Rock: Obert, Leon and W. I. Duvall.
 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

Department Level Optional Course - 1
CEDLO6012 03
Biological Process and Contamination Removal

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration of Total
End Sem Term
End Sem Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

Biological treatment processes are widely used in both developed and developing countries
to control and accelerate the natural process of organic matter decomposition. The process is
often used to treat biodegradable waste materials released from domestic, commercial and
industrial sources before they are disposed of. However, it is also observed to further treat the
wastewater for contamination removal in order to remove and treat toxic materials. The course
deals with the overall features and study of biological treatments of wastewater and
contamination removal. The course lays emphasis on complete updates of these processes and
knowledge related to design of treatment units.
Objectives
1 To understand quality, quantity, characteristics and treatment process of wastewater
generated from various sources
2 To understand the biological process and treatment of wastewater.
3 To provide students the necessary knowledge and concepts of advancements/ emerging
techniques of Microbial Growth Kinetics, Utilization of soluble substrate and
biotechnological remedies
4 To study and design the aerobic decomposition and its application in Aerobic Suspended
Growth Biological Treatment Systems.
5 To study and design the anerobic decomposition and its application in wastewater
treatment.
6 To develop rational approaches towards natural and biotechnological methods for
contamination removal.
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Waste Water Generation, Collection and Conveyance
Introduction: Domestic waste water, Industrial Wastewater and
1.1 Stormwater, Conservancy and Water carriage system, Systems
of sewerage, Quantity and Quality of Wastewater.
Need for Analysis, Characteristics of wastewater: Analysis of
wastewater, Characteristics of wastewater and sampling,
1.2
Composition, Biochemical characteristics, aerobic
1 08
decomposition, anaerobic decomposition,
Waste Water Treatment and Flow diagram: Treatment
processes: Objective, methods of treatment, flow sheets
showing Preliminary, Primary, Secondary and Tertiary
1.3
treatment. Waste Water Treatment Plant and Effluent
Treatment Plants. Various combinations and options. Low-cost
treatment plant.
Introduction to Biological Treatment:
Overview of biological wastewater treatment, objectives of the
2 treatment, role of microorganisms, types of biological 03
2.1
processes for wastewater treatment, suspended and attached
growth systems.
Microbial Growth Kinetics
Microbial Growth Kinetics terminology, rate of utilization of
soluble substrates, rate of biomass growth with soluble
3.1 substrate, rate of oxygen uptake, effects of temperature, total
volatile suspended solids and active biomass, net biomass yield
3 and observed yield. 06
Biotechnological remedies - Bio-fertilizers, Physical, chemical
and Microbiological factors of composting, Health risk –
3.2 Pathogens, Odor management, Microbial cell/enzyme
technology, Adapted microorganisms, Biological removal of
Nutrients.
Aerobic Decomposition:
Aerobic Suspended Growth Biological Treatment Systems:
Aerobic biological oxidation, process description,
environmental factors, Modifications of ASP: Complete Mix
4.1 activated sludge, Extended Aeration system, Oxidation Ditch
4 08
systems, Oxygen activated sludge, Oxidation ponds,
Stabilization ponds, Aerobic attached Growth Biological
Treatment-Trickling Filter.
Design of ASP, Trickling Filter, Oxidation Pond, Oxidation
4.2
Ditch and Aerated lagoons.
 Anaerobic Decomposition:
Anaerobic Decomposition: Mechanism of anaerobic
fermentation – a multistep process, Microbiology and
5 5.1 Biochemistry of Anaerobic processes, Substrate inhibition, 08
Stuck reactors, Standard rate, High rate and Multistage anoxic
digesters. Introduction to UASB.
5.2 Design of anaerobic treatment units: Anaerobic Lagoons

Natural and Biotechnological Methods of Contamination

Removal:
Natural Treatment Systems: Development of natural treatment
systems, Rapid infiltration systems, Overland Flow systems,
6 06
constructed wetlands, Floating aquatic plant treatment systems.
6.1
Introduction to engineering Fundamentals of Biotechnology.
Heavy Metal Removal using advance treatment methods –
Membrane filtration, Reverse Osmosis and Ion exchange.
Total 39

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Determine and analyze the characteristics of wastewater and decide the treatment for
wastewater.
2 Understand biological treatment process and necessity of contamination removal
3 Understand and apply the concepts of advancements/emerging techniques of Microbial
Growth Kinetics, Utilization of soluble substrate and biotechnological remedies.
4 Summarize the concept of aerobic decomposition and its application in Aerobic
Suspended Growth Biological Treatment Systems
5 Summarize the concept of the anaerobic decomposition and its application in
wastewater treatment.
6 To derive the knowledge and develop rational approaches towards natural and
biotechnological Methods for contamination removal

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
3
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.
Recommended Books:
1 Wastewater Engineering Treatment, Disposal, Refuse: Metcalf and Eddy, T.M.H.
Edition, New Delhi, 1995.
2 Environmental Engineering Vol II- Sewage Disposal and Air Pollution Engineering: S.
K. Garg, Khanna Publishers New Delhi.
3 Water supply and sanitary Engineering: Hussain S. K., Oxford and IBH Publication,
New Delhi.
4 Wastewater Treatment for Pollution Control and Reuse by Soli. J Arceivala (Author),
Shyam. R Asolekar.
5 Environmental Engineering: B. C. Punmia, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi.
6 Water Supply and Sewerage: E.W. Steel.
7 Introduction to Environmental Engineering, Vesilind, PWS Publishing Company
2000.
8 Introduction to Environmental Engineering: P. Aarne Vesilind, Susan M. Morgan,
Thompson.
9 Wastewater Treatment- Concepts and Design Approach: G. L. Karia and R. A.
Christian.
10 Basic Principles of Wastewater Treatment Book by Marcos Von Sperling.

Reference Books:
1 Manual on Wastewater Treatment 3rd Ed. Pub: CPH and Env. Engg. Organization,
Ministry of Urban Development, Govt. of India, New Delhi, 1991.
2 CPHEEO Manual on Sewage and Treatment.
3 Relevant Indian standard specifications and BIS publications.
4 Handbook of Water and Wastewater Treatment Plant Operations Book by Frank R.
Spellman
 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

Department Level Optional Course-2
CEDLO6013 03
Construction Equipment & Techniques

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration of Total
End Sem Term
End Sem Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

Machines have revolutionized every sphere of human being’s life. Engineering constructions
also have seen a drastic reformation due to introduction of various construction equipment and
techniques. This course provides an extensive overview of advanced equipment used in
construction industry and also discusses certain methods/techniques used to construct facilities
using these equipments. It makes the student aware of the equipment/techniques required while
constructing different kinds of civil engineering structures. Student will be introduced to some
emerging technologies in the field of Civil engineering which will make them more industry
ready.
Objectives
1 To understand the characteristics and complexities involved in large civil engineering
projects so that the equipment/technique requirements of a project can be listed out.
2 To know the various conventional techniques/equipments used in civil engineering
projects.
3 To get acquainted with the modern equipments/techniques which have replaced the
conventional ones.
4 To select the appropriate equipment/techniques in construction for large and heavy
engineering projects on the basis of suitability, availability, productivity, output, initial and
operation cost, savings in time and other resources, etc.
5 To understand the characteristics and complexities involved in large civil engineering
projects so that the equipment/technique requirements of a project can be listed out.
6 To know the various conventional techniques/equipments used in civil engineering
projects.
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Introduction
Equipment v/s Labour, Standard and Special equipments,
Types of costs related to equipments including related
1.1 numerical, Equipment life and Replacement decisions
including related numerical, Cycle time, Balancing of
equipments and related numerical.
Different categories of construction equipments used
1 conventionally with reference to available types and their 06
output, working mechanism, factors affecting their
performance and criteria for selecting a particular equipment:
1.2 Earthmoving and other hauling equipment, Pavers for road
construction. Numbering and Record maintaining of
Earthmoving and other hauling equipment’s; Pile driving
equipment; Applications of Air compressor. Dewatering
techniques for trenches; Stone crushing equipment.
Underground & Underwater Tunnelling
Various purposes for which tunnelling may be carried out,
Basic terms related to tunnelling. Conventional methods of
2.1
carrying out tunnelling in different types of soils/rocks.
Methods for dewatering tunnels.
Detailed Procedure for underwater tunneling. Modern methods
of tunnelling and detailed study of following equipments/
techniques in this regard.
Use of drones, construction robots for aerial surveys. Use of
2 09
GPS and remote sensing for setting out tunnel alignment.
Jumbo – used for drilling and blasting, Blasting Techniques for
2.2 quarrying stones for construction purpose. Diaphragm wall
construction and other ground stabilization methods. Vertical
shaft sinking machine (VSM). Tunnel Boring machine (TBM),
Micro tunneling. New Austrian tunnelling method (NATM).
Cut & cover method, Top to bottom construction. Tunnel lining
trolley. Tunnelling for Metro projects. Difference in Tunnelling
for Roads and Metros.
Modern Formwork Systems and Working Techniques in Limited
Space
Difference in conventional and modern systems of formwork
3.1 Mivan, Doka shuttering along with their advantages and
3 disadvantages. Modular shuttering, Slip and jump form. 06
High rise construction: Concrete making on mass scale,
3.2 pumping and placing booms. Tower cranes and the benefits
they offer for high rise construction. Range diagram.
 Prefabricated housing systems, Difficulties faced in the
3.3 installation and operation of all these systems. Emergency
housing for disaster management.
Working skills/tricks required for managing a site in
3.4 urban/restricted space environment. Techniques for controlled
demolition of buildings.
Equipments For Laying of Utility Lines, Bridge Construction &
Installation of Structural Steel Members.
Use of ground penetrating radar (GPR) for locating
underground utilities. Laying of pipes using pipeline insertion
4.1
system. Installation and operation of underground power
transmission lines as well as overhead transmission towers.
4 06
Incremental launching method and balanced cantilever method
4.2 of bridge/flyover construction with reference to the recent
infrastructure developed in the local and global context.
Equipments/techniques used for connecting structural steel
4.3 components of bridge decks, terminals, malls, stadiums, car
sheds, etc.
Equipments/ Techniques for Setting Up of Power
Generation/Supply Structures.
Hydropower station. Tidal power plants. Desalinization plants.
5 Thermal power station. Solar power station. Atomic power 06
5.1
generation. Installation and operation of wind mills.
Construction of a fuel station.
Equipments/ Techniques for Construction of Transporting
Facilities
Construction of railway lines using track laying machine.
Methods, techniques and equipments involved in the
6.1 construction of Metro, mono and maglev trains. Connecting
link between underground and overhead metro systems. 5D
6 BIM integration in Metro projects. 06
Equipments required for construction and operation of an
airport and sea port. Application of Drones, GIS, GPS and BIM
6.2
for monitoring project progress/working of Airports and
Seaports. Piling Equipment’s for Jetty Construction.
Light Detection and Ranging (Lidar) Technique for Railways/
6.3
Highways/ Bullet train alignments.
Total 39
 Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Understand the use/applications of various conventional construction equipments and
select the best out of them for a particular site requirement.
2 Know modern methods/equipments used for underground as well as underwater
tunnelling.
3 Compare conventional and modern methods of formwork and get acquainted with
techniques used on sites with restricted space.
4 Understand the techniques involved and the equipments required thereof for laying of
utility lines, bridge construction and installation of structural steel members.
5 Gain knowledge about the setting up of different kinds of the power generating
structures.
6 Get acquainted with the equipments/ techniques for construction of transporting
facilities.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1 Construction Equipment & Planning. Purifoy, R.L & Ledbetter McGraw Hill
2 Construction Equipment & its Management. Sharma, S. C. Khanna Publishers
3 Tunnel Engineering HandbookThomas R. Kuesel, Elwyn H. King, John O. Bickel
Springer
4 Practical tunnel construction Gary B. Hemphill Wiley Publishers
5 Success with drones in Civil Engineering Brett Hoffstadt Kindle
6 Construction Technology for Tall BuildingsMichael Yit Lin Chew World Scientific
7 The prefabricated home Colin DaviesReaktion Books
8 Literature/specifications/downloadable videos available on Doka and Mivaan
shuttering websites.
9 Accelerated Bridge Construction: Best Practices and Techniques Mohiuddin Ali Khan
BH Elsevier
Reference Books:
1 Design and Construction of Nuclear Power Plants Rüdiger Meiswinkel, Julian
Meyer, Jürgen Schnell Wiley Publishers
2 Energy and Power generation handbook K.R Rao ASME Press
3 Magnetic Levitation Hyung-Suk Han Dong-Sung Kim Springer
4 Metro Rail Projects in India M Ramachandran Oxford
5 BIM Handbook Eastman,Teicholz,Sacks,Liston John Wiley and Sons
6 IRC:43-2015 Recommended Practice for Plants, Tools and Equipment Required for
Construction and Maintenance of Concrete Roads (First Revision).
7 IRC-2018 Pocket book for Road Construction Equipment.
8 IRC: SP-97- 2013 Guidelines on Compaction Equipment for Roads Works
 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

Department Level Optional Course -2
CEDLO6014 03
Urban Infrastructure Planning

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration of Total
End Sem Term
End Sem Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

Indian cities are currently expanding at a rapid rate, and are therefore facing immense pressure
for the improvement of their services and infrastructure. Without coordination and planning
for the anticipated spatial growth and densification, the infrastructure services are neglected.
Such growth areas can become under-serviced places of the cities, one from which many
problems of the city stem: water, sanitation and waste problems, uncontrolled pests, and crime
due to poor access to water and sanitation services. To address the emerging issues of urban
centre, there is a pressing need to train urban infrastructure specialists who can
comprehensively plan for city’s growing infrastructure needs and formulate projects for
efficient infrastructure service delivery for existing areas. There are ample urban
infrastructure challenges and opportunities in terms of planning; effective policy, program and
project formulation for well-trained young urban infrastructure professionals with specific
domain knowledge
Objectives
1 Describe an infrastructure system using accurate terminology;
2 Demonstrate an understanding of the main concepts and principles of infrastructure
planning;
3 Identify the key features of a sustainable infrastructure system and explain how they
promote sustainable development;
4 Apply analytical tools for infrastructure planning;
5 Critically evaluate infrastructure cases/projects/proposals through the lens of
sustainability;
6 Identify the gaps between theoretical principles of sustainable infrastructure and their
application in practices
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Introduction to Planning
Origins and growth of cities, effects of cultural influence on
physical form; Human settlements as an expression of
1.1
civilizations; Basic elements of the city; Concepts of space,
1 time, scale of cities. 04
Contribution of housing to micro and macro economy,
contribution to national wealth and GDP, housing taxation,
1.2
national budgets, fiscal concessions; need of affordable
housing for urban poor, concept of RERA
Urban Economics
General introduction to principles of economics and public
2.1 finance. Importance of economics in Urban Development and
Planning
Industrial location policies, any other economic activity base
policies and their impact on urban development, Role of land
2.2
economics in preparation of Urban Development plans.
2 06
Relevant case studies of Urban Land Economics.
Economic growth and development, quality of life; Human
development index, poverty and income distribution,
employment and livelihood; Economic principles in land use
2.3 planning; Policies and strategies in economic planning,
balanced versus unbalanced growth, public sector dominance;
changing economic policies, implications on land.

Infrastructure Planning
Role of Infrastructure in Development, Elements of
Infrastructure (physical, social, utilities and services); Basic
definitions, concepts, significance and importance; Data
required for provision and planning of urban networks and
3.1 services; Resource analysis, provision of infrastructure, and
land requirements; Principles of resource distribution in space;
Types, hierarchical distribution of facilities, Access to
facilities, provision and location criteria, Norms and standards,
3 12
etc.
Zoning, Various growth patterns of town, Housing layouts and
3.2 road networks in town, Urban aesthetics and landscaping,
MRTP and Land Acquisition Acts
Planning and Management of Water, Sanitation and Storm
Water; Water – sources of water, treatment and storage,
transportation and distribution, quality, networks, distribution
losses, water harvesting, recycling and reuse, norms and
standards of provision, institutional arrangements, planning
 provisions and management issues;
Sanitation – points of generation, collection, treatment,
disposal, norms and standards, grey water disposal, institutional
arrangements, planning provisions and management issues.
Storm water – rainfall data interpretation, points of water
stagnation, system of natural drains, surface topography and
soil characteristics, ground water replenishment, storm water
collection and disposal, norms and standards, institutional
arrangements, planning provisions and management issues;
Solid Waste Disposal and Management Basic principles,
3.3
generation, characteristics, collection, disposal, management
Fire and Electrification, and Social Infrastructure Planning for
fire protection, services and space standards, location criteria;
3.4 Planning for Education, health, civic, cultural infrastructure
and facilities for transport and other miscellaneous
infrastructure services
Planning for Education, health, civic, cultural infrastructure
3.5 and facilities for transport and other miscellaneous
infrastructure services
Traffic and Transportation Planning
Evaluation of urban structure: Transport system, infrastructure
and management, transport systems and their types, design and
4.1 operating characteristics, urban road hierarchy, planning, and
management criteria for road and junction improvements,
arterial improvement techniques.
Traffic management, mass transit system: Problems and
4 prospects. Review of existing traffic management schemes in 07
4.2
Indian cities. Case study of various metro rail project envisaged
for Mumbai, Navi Mumbai & Pune.
Economic evaluation: pricing and funding of transport services
and systems, economic appraisal of highway and transport
4.3
projects. Techniques for estimating direct and indirect road user
costs and benefit value of time
4.4 Intelligent transport system (ITS) its types and applications
Urban Management and Governance
Introduction to Development Management and Urban
Governance- Concept, approaches, components, interface with
national goals and political economic system. Urban
Development Management Strategies, Tools and Techniques;
5 organizations involved Land and Real Estate Development 06
5.1
Economic concepts of land, Land Pricing / valuation; Urban
reforms and acts and policies. Overview of Urban Governance
Definition, concepts, components, government and
governance, hierarchy and structure, forms of governance,
process of inclusion and exclusion.
 Information System and Urban Reforms Spatial and Non -
spatial information systems;
5.2 Use of GIS in overlaying infrastructure facilities, use of remote
sensing in identifying and mapping urban structures.
Present organizations and involved in urban governance with
focus on MCGM, TMC and CIDCO. Urban Local Governance
and Participatory Processes System, structure, functions,
5.3
powers, process and resource, performance, interface with
NGO’s, other agencies.

Environmentally Safe and Disaster Resilient Infrastructure

Frame work, statement prediction and assessment of impacts of
air, water, noise, cultural and socio-economic environment.
Methods of impact analysis, public participation.
6.1 Environmental protection international and national agencies
and legislation,
6 Environment Impact Assessment. Urban Heat Island Effect, 04
Effect of uncontrolled growth of town
Disaster response planning, roles and responsibilities of various
agencies Emergency operation support and management
6.2 Planning for Disaster Prone Areas, Planning requisites for
disaster prone areas and preventive measures, Vulnerability
analysis
Total 39

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Explain the concepts related to planning of modern cities, GDP contribution, RERA,
affordable housing
2 Elaborate the economics involved in urban infrastructure planning
3 Envisage the various elements required for infrastructure development of a city and
describe the concepts, significance and importance of each
4 Evaluate technical, social and economic feasibility of transportation projects within
cities
5 Demonstrate modern tool usage for urban management and governance
6 Design environmentally safe and disaster resilient infrastructure

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.
End Semester Examination 80 Marks
Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1 The Urban and Regional Planning Reader, edited by Eugenie L. Birch, Published by
Routledge, 2008; ISBN 978-0-415-319
2 Housing: The Essential Foundations, edited by Dr. Paul Balchin, Paul Balchin,
Maureen Rhoden, Edition Routledge, DOI https://doi.org/10.4324/9780203010426,
eBook ISBN 9780203010426
3 New Urban Housing by Hilary French, Publisher: Yale University Press,
ISBN0300115784 (ISBN13: 9780300115789)
4 Sociology: A Brief Introduction, by Richard T. Schaefer, Publisher: McGraw-Hill
Education, ISBN 10:1259425584, ISBN 13: 9781259425585
5 Sociology: Principles of Sociology with an Introduction to Social Thoughts, by Rao
C.N. Shankar, S. Chand Publication
6 Projects: Preparation, Appraisal, Budgeting and Implementation by Prasanna Chandra,
Tata McGraw-Hill; ISBN0074516280 (ISBN13: 9780074516287)
7 Introduction to Transportation Planning, by B. Bruton, Michael J. Bruton; Published
by Hutchinson Radius; ISBN0091580412 (ISBN13: 9780091580414)

Reference Books:
1 Modern Economics by H.L. Ahuja, 19th Revised Edition, Published by S.Chand (G/L)
& Company Ltd
2 Economics, An Introductory Analysis by Paul A. Samuelson, William D. Nordhaus,
Published July 27th 2004 by Irwin/McGraw-Hill (first published 1948),
ISBN0072872055 (ISBN13: 9780072872057)
3 Modelling Transport, by de Dios Ortuzar and Luis G. Willumsen, 4th Edition, Wiley
Publication
4 Principles of Urban Transport Systems Planning, by B.G. Hutchinson, Publisher:
Scripta Book Co.; ISBN0070315396 (ISBN13: 9780070315396)
5 Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning, L. R. Kadiyali, Khanna Publishers, 1983
6 Remote Sensing and GIS, by Basudeb Bhatta, second Edition, Oxford University press
7 NEPA and Environmental Planning: Tools, Techniques, and Approaches for
Practitioners; Charles H. Eccleston; CRC Press
8 Planning for Disaster: How Natural and Manmade Disasters Shape the Built
Environment, by William Ramroth; Publisher: Kaplan Business; Original edition;
ISBN-13: 978-1419593734.
 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

Department Level Optional Course -2
CEDLO6015 03
Open Channel Flow

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration of Total
End Sem Term
End Sem Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

Civil engineers deal with the analysis and design of irrigation systems which include dams,
weirs, barrages, canals, drains and other supporting systems, for which good knowledge of
dynamics of open channel flow is very much essential. Hence this course is designed to study
different types of flow like uniform flow, non- uniform flow, spatially varied flow, and
unsteady flow occurring in open channels. Competencies developed by this course would
therefore be useful for students to handle and solve the practical p roblems/ issues in the field
of Water resource management, Water shed Management etc. It is expected that the students
will be better equipped to address various engineering problems related to hydrology and
hydraulics.
Objectives
1 Understand the nature of flow, explain the basic concepts of uniform flow and to design
the best hydraulic sections in open channel.
2 Apply the Energy concepts of fluid in open channel and demonstrate various flow
measurement devices in open channels.
3 Develop Dynamic equation to compute the flow profiles for Gradually varied flow and
classify water profiles in prismatic channels with different slope conditions.
4 Illustrate the causes of Rapidly varied flow, predict the formation of hydraulic jump and
its applications.
5 Determine different types of spatially varied flow with varying discharges and
characteristics of water surface profiles.
6 Study and analyze the temporal flow variations in open channel and the formation of
surges.
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Uniform Flow
Flow through open channel, Types of channels, open and
covered channels, Classification of flow in channel,
1.1
Geometrical properties, velocity distribution in a channel
section
Uniform flow in open channels, Discharge through open
1.2 channel, Manning’s and Chezy’s Equation, Determination of
1 07
roughness coefficients,
Determination of Conveyance of a channel, Hydraulic mean
1.3 depth, Normal depth and Normal velocity, computation of
uniform flow
Most economical sections of prismatic channels, condition for
1.4 maximum velocity in a circular channel, condition for
maximum discharge in a circular channel
Energy-Depth Relationships
Specific energy, Specific energy curve, Depth- Discharge
2.1 diagram, critical depth, critical slope, critical flow, alternate
depths
Condition for maximum discharge for a given value of Specific
2.2
energy
2 Momentum in open channel flow- Specific force, specific force 07
2.3 diagram, Dimensionless specific force diagram,
Critical flow and its computation, Application of specific
2.4
energy and discharge diagrams to channel transitions
Metering Flumes- Venturi flume, Standing wave flume,
2.5 Parshall flume, Determination of mean velocity of flow,
Measurement of discharge in Rivers
Non-Uniform Flow: Gradually Varied Flow
Dynamic equation of Gradually Varied Flow (GVF) in
3.1
rectangular and wide rectangular channels
Types of slopes- channel bottom slopes and water surface
3.2 slopes, classification of channel bottom slopes and surface
3 07
profiles
Characteristics of surface profiles, Backwater curve and
3.3
drawdown curve
Computation of GVF-Direct Step and Standard step method,
3.4
Numerical methods, Graphical Integration method
 Non-Uniform Flow: Rapidly Varied Flow
Rapidly varied flow (RVF), Hydraulic Jump, Momentum
4.1
equation for the jump
Hydraulic jump in a rectangular channel, Froude Number
4.2 before and after jump, Classification of jumps, Characteristics
4 07
of jump in a rectangular channel
Jumps in non-rectangular channel, applications of jump,
4.3
location of jump, surges in open channel
Use of RVF for flow measurement purpose-Sharp crested weir,
4.4
Broad crested weir, Ogee spillway, sluice gate
Spatially Varied Flow
Importance of Spatially Varied Flow (SVF), Causes,
5.1
Continuity, Momentum and Energy Equation
5 Water surface profiles, Applications, 06
5.2 Differential Equation for SVF with increasing and decreasing
discharge
5.3 Relevant case studies
Unsteady Flow
Basic concepts of Gradually varied unsteady flow, Rapidly
6.1
varied unsteady flow
6 05
6.2 Positive and negative surges

6.3 Relevant case studies

Total 39

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Describe the basic nature of flow in open channels, analyze the behaviour of flow and
apply basic theories to design the optimum channel sections.
2 Demonstrate the energy concepts in open channel and its practical applications.
3 Apply dynamic equation for Gradually varied flow (GVF) and evaluate water profiles
at different conditions in prismatic channels.
4 Differentiate between GVF and Rapidly Varied Flow (RVF), analyze hydraulic jump
in open channel and its importance.
5 Explain the spatially varied flow and classify water profiles.
6 Discuss the temporal variations of flow in GVF and RVF in open channel.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.
End Semester Examination 80 Marks
Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1 Flow in Open channels: K. Subramanya, Tata Mc Graw -Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New
Delhi
2 Flow through Open channels: Rajesh Srivastava, Oxford University Press
3 Flow through Open channels: K. G. Ranga Raju, Tata Mc Graw -Hill Publishing Co.
Ltd., New Delhi
4 Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics: Dr S.K. Ukarande, Ane’s Books Pvt. Ltd., (Revised
Version 2012)
5 Hydraulics & Fluid Mechanics: Modi P.N. & Seth S.M, Standard book house, New
Delhi

Reference Books:
1 Open channel Hydraulics: Chow, V.T., McGraw Hill International, New York
2 Open Channel Flow: Henderson F.M., McGraw Hill International
3 Open Channel Flow: M. Hanif Chaudhry, Prentice Hall of India.
4 Open channel Hydraulics: French, R.H., McGraw Hill International
 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

Department Level Optional Course - 1
CEDLO6016 03
Computational Structural Analysis

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration of Total
End Sem Term
End Sem Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

This subject deals with the conceptual applications of principles of mechanics of rigid and deformable
bodies in Structural Engineering.
Objectives
1 To understand basic concepts of Matrix Methods of Structural Analysis and application of
approximation techniques (Numerical Methods) in analysis of Structural Member
2 To analyze the behavior of structural members viz beams/plane trusses/ continuous beams/
portal frames

Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Basic concepts of structural analysis and methods of solving
simultaneous equations
1.1 Introduction, Types of framed structures
1.2 Static and Kinematic Indeterminacy, Equilibrium equations
1 Compatibility conditions, principle of superposition, Energy 04
1.3
principles, Equivalent joint loads
Methods of solving linear simultaneous equations- Gauss
1.4 elimination method, Cholesky method and Gauss- Seidel
method.
 Fundamentals of Flexibility and Stiffness Methods
2.1 Concepts of stiffness and flexibility
2.2 Local and Global coordinates
Development of element flexibility and element stiffness
2.3 matrices for truss, beam and grid elements
2 07
2.4 Force- transformation matrix
Development of global flexibility matrix for continuous beams,
2.5
plane trusses and Rigid plane frames
Displacement- transformation matrix, Development of global
2.6 stiffness matrix for continuous beams, plane trusses and rigid
plane frames.
Analysis Using Flexibility Method (Including Secondary Effects)
3 07
3.1 Continuous beams, plane trusses and rigid plane frames
Analysis Using Stiffness Method (Including Secondary Effects)
4 07
4.1 Continuous beams, plane trusses and rigid plane frames
Direct stiffness Method
Stiffness matrix for truss element in local and global
5.1
coordinates
5 5.2 Analysis of plane trusses 07

5.3 Stiffness matrix for beam element

5.4 Analysis of continuous beams and orthogonal frames.

Finite Element Method
Historical Background – Mathematical Modeling of field
6.1
problems in Engineering
6.2 Governing Equations – Discrete and continuous models
Boundary, Initial and Eigen Value problems– Weighted
6.3 Residual Methods – Variational Formulation of Boundary
6 Value 07
6.4 Basic concepts of the Finite Element Method.
One Dimensional Second Order Equations – Discretization –
Element types- Linear and Higher order Elements – Derivation
6.5 of Shape functions and Stiffness matrices and force vectors-
Assembly of Matrices – Solution of problems from solid
mechanics.
Total 39
 Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Formulate force displacement relation by flexibility and stiffness method
Analyze the plane trusses, continuous beams and portal frames by transformation
2
approach
3 Analyze the structures by direct stiffness method
4 Explain the basics of finite element formulation.
5 Apply finite element formulations to solve one dimensional Problems

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1 Matrix Methods of Structural Analysis, S. S Bhavikatti, WILEY
2 Matrix Analysis of Framed Structures, Weaver, W., and Gere, J.M., CBS Publishers
and distributors pvt. Ltd., 2004.
3 Computational Structural Mechanics, Rajasekaran, S., and Sankarasubramanian, G.,
PHI, New Dehi, 2001.
4 Introductions to Matrix Methods of Structural Analysis, Martin, H, C., McGraw-Hill,
New York, 1966.
5 Structural Analysis A Matrix Approach, G. S. Pandit, S. P. Gupta, TATA McGraw
Hill
6 Matrix Computer Analysis of Structures, Rubinstein, M.F., Prentice-Hall

Reference Books:
1 Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis, S S. Sastry, ASIN : 8120345924,
Publisher-Prentice Hall India Learning Private Limited.
2 Introduction to the Finite Element Method, Desai Abel, CBS Publishers and
distributors
3 Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering, Chandrupatala, Belugundu, Pearson
Education Publisher : Pearson; 4th edition (20 December 2011)
4 Numerical Methods for Engineers, Steven Chapra, Tata McGraw Hill
 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

Department Level Optional Course -2
CEDLO6017 03
Traffic Engineering and Management

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration of Total
End Sem Term
End Sem Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale

Traffic Engineering Management follows the Transportation Planning and is the specialized
branch of the Highway Engineering, which introduces the concepts of characterizing traffic,
various modeling approaches, and design of facilities to control and manage traffic. A key
feature of the course is that it is well connected with the current design and analysis practice
stipulated in national standards, and manuals. Therefore, it deals with the application of
scientific principles, tools, techniques and findings for safe, rapid, economical and efficient
movement of people and vehicles.
Objectives
1 To understand the concepts of traffic characteristics, traffic surveys to be conducted for
planning any transportation network or judging the adequacy of the existing one
2 The application of various statistical tools to the analysis of the large data base emerging
out of extensive traffic surveys and transportation and traffic planning.
3 To understand the concept of various features of the intersection infrastructures, their
necessity, pros and cons, design or planning principles and subsequently, to design / plan
the features such as channelization, island, speed change lanes and parking facility.
4 To understand the concept of highway capacity and such other components such as
Passenger Car Unit and Level of Service affecting the Capacity; and Speed- Flow- Density
Relationship and various theories describing these relationships.
5 To understand the importance of Highway Safety and implementation of Traffic System
Management (TSM) Measures and subsequent to study the various Traffic Control Devices
and aspects of Highway Lighting.
6 To explore the future of traffic engineering in the form of Intelligent Transportation
system
 Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Traffic Characteristics and Surveys
Scope, Traffic Elements - Characteristics-vehicle, road user
1 and road - Traffic studies-speed & delay, traffic volume, O & 03
1.1
D, parking and accidents - Sample size, study methodology -
Data analysis & inferences.
Application of Statistics in Traffic Engineering
Various probability distributions & their applications -
2.1
Parameter estimation - Hypothesis testing - Random variables
2 Estimation and analysis of simple regression models - 05
2.2
Correlation coefficients - Analysis of correlation coefficients
Application of queuing theory as applied to traffic flow
2.3 problems for study state conditions

Intersection Design
Types of intersections - Conflict diagrams –Control hierarchy-
Design of rotaries (Indo-HCM 2017) & at-grade intersections
3 10
3.1 – Signal design as per IRC:93- Grade separated intersections &
their warrants, coordination of signals, types of area traffic
control
Traffic Flow Theory
Measurement, microscopic and macroscopic Study of Traffic
Stream Characteristic -Flow, Speed and Density; pace – Time
diagram, Headways, Speeds, Gaps and Lags; gap acceptance.
Fundamental Equation of Traffic Flow, Speed-Flow-Density
Relationships, Shock Wave Theory Passenger’s car units,
4 10
4.1 Factors affecting PCU and methods to determine PCU, level of
service, factor affecting capacity and level of service. Capacity
and level of service suggested for different road facilities as
discussed in Indo-HCM 2017, review of flow density speed
studies, Light hill and Whitham’s theory, fundamentals of
traffic stimulation modeling.
Traffic Management and Road safety Audit
Various measures for traffic systems management and travel
demand management-Congestion management -cost effective
5.1
Management, their scope, relative merits and demerits.
(Pedestrians and Cyclist Management) (IRC SP:55-2014)
5 Highway Lighting: Important definitions, law of illumination, 07
discernment by artificial lighting, mounting height, spacing,
5.2
lantern arrangements, types of lamps, lighting of some
important highway structures.
5.3 Accidents: Accident cause, recording system, analysis and
 preventive measures, accident cost, alternative methodologies
for calculation.
Road Safety Audit: Global & Local perspective – Road safety
issues – Road safety programmers – Types of RSA, planning,
5.4 design, construction & operation stage audits – Methodology –
Road safety audit measures, road safety audit process as per
IRC: SP-88-2010
Intelligent Transportation System
Overview of ITS implementations in developed countries, ITS
6.1
in developing countries. Study of IRC: SP-110-2017
Historical Background, Benefits of ITS – Introduction to
Automatic Vehicle Location (AVL), Automatic Vehicle
6.2
6 Identification (AVI), Geographic Information Systems (GIS), 04
Traffic control and monitoring aspects.
Application of ITS: Advanced Traffic Management Systems
(ATMS) Advanced Vehicle Control Systems (AVCS), Public
6.3
Transportation Systems (APTS), Advanced Rural
Transportation Systems (ARTS), Automated Highway Systems
Total 39
Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Understand different characteristics of the road users and vehicles from their
consideration and view point in the traffic engineering and transportation planning.
2 Conduct different traffic surveys, analyzing the data collected as a part of such studies
and interpreting it with the help of the different statistical models.
3 Explain the concepts of PCU and LOS, their implication in determination of the
capacity using Speed-Flow-Density relationships.
4 Discuss the aspects associated with road safety, its audit and different TSM measures.
5 Discuss transportation planning and ascertain the financial viability of any
transportation network in the inception stage itself.
6 Improve the effectiveness and efficiency of transportation systems through advanced
technologies in Information systems and communication.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1 Kadiyali, L.R., Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning, Khanna Publishers, New
Delhi, 2002.
2 Srinivasa Kumar .R ,Introduction to Traffic Engineering,The Orient Blackswan;south
Asian Edition,2018.
3 Chakroborty P., Das N., Principles of Transportation Engineering, PHI,New
Delhi,2003
4 Khanna S.K., Justo C.E.G., Highway Engineering, Nem Chand & Bros., Roorkee,
2001
5 Khisty C J,LallB.Kent; Transportation Engineering-An Introduction, Prentice-Hall,NJ,
2005
6 May, A.D., Traffic Flow Fundamentals, Prentice – Hall, Inc., New Jersey,1990.
7 O’Flaherty C A, Highways- Traffic Planning & Engineering, Edward Arnold, UK
8 Drew, D.R., Traffic Flow Theory and Control, McGraw-Hill, New York.
9 Benjamin J. R., Cornell C. A., Probability Statistics and Decision for Civil Engineers,
McGraw-Hill, 1970.
10 Asad J. Khattak , Intelligent Transportation Systems: Planning, Operations, and
Evaluation, CRC Press

Reference Books:
1 Transportation Engineering and Planning Papacostas, C. S., Prevedouros, P. D., PHIL
earning Pvt. Ltd.
2 Transportation Engineering: Khisty, C.J. and Lall, K.B.; PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd.
3 Introduction to Urban Transport Systems, Planning: Hutchinson, B.G.;McGraw-Hill.
4 Economics of Transportation: Fair and Williams, Harper and Brothers, Publishers,
NewYork.
5 Highway Capacity Manual, Transportation Research Board, National Research
Council, WashingtonD.C.
6 Relevant IRC Codes amended time to time.
 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

Department Level Optional Course -2
CEDLO6018 03
Introduction to Offshore Engineering

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
03 - - 03 - - 03

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration of Total
End Sem Term
End Sem Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 Hours - - - 100

Rationale
Offshore Engineering discipline deals with the design and construction of structures intended
to work in the ocean environment. The majority of offshore structures are used in the Oil and
Gas industry. Offshore construction is the installation of structures and facilities in a marine
environment. Civil Engineering graduates will be able to work in the specialized field of ocean
and coastal environment.
Objectives
1 To understand the complexities in offshore construction and obtaining resources from the
ocean.
2 To addresses the general engineering concepts that are fundamental to offshore
engineering.
3 To understand types of sites and platform structures, key engineering systems and ocean
environmental monitoring
Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Module / Contents Periods

Introduction:
History and current state of the art of offshore structures, Definition
1 05
1.1 of Offshore Structures, Met ocean Engineering: wind, wave and
current loads on offshore structures
Environment & Construction:
2 Offshore environment, Construction and launching, offshore 06
2.1
project management,
3 Ocean Construction: 06
 Types of Platforms: Jackets, Tension Leg Platforms (TLP),
3.1 Semisubmersibles, Jack-ups, Concrete Gravity, deep water
construction in ocean, offshore site investigations
Offshore Pipelines:
4 06
4.1 Hydrostatic, hydrodynamic analysis and structural design
Buoys and Mooring systems:
5 Buoys and Mooring systems Mooring configurations, advantages 08
5.1
and disadvantages
Design Criteria:
Introduction to probabilistic design, extreme load & strength &
6 fatigue, basics of anchoring and mooring system, riser system, 08
6.1
Scaling laws & Model testing, Challenges in Deepwater testing:
deep-water installations, constructions challenges.
Total 39

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 To know various offshore construction methodologies
2 To addresses the general engineering concepts during construction stages.
3 To handle complexities and key engineering systems in ocean environment
Internal Assessment 20 Marks
Consisting of two Compulsory Class Tests –
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in first test).
Average of marks will be considered for IAE.
End Semester Examination 80 Marks
Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from
3
module 3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.
Recommended Books:
Subrata K. Chakrabarti (2005): Handbook of offshore engineering Volume –I & II,
1
Elsevier, The Boulevard Langford Lane, Kidlington, Oxford OX5 l GB, UK.
2 Deo M C (2013):Waves and Structures, http://www.civil.iitb.ac.in/~mcdeo/waves.html
American Petroleum Institute, Recommended Practice for Planning, Designing and
3 Constructing Fixed Offshore Platforms - Load and Resistance Factor Design, 1st
Edition, 1993. (TP690.A642 RP2A-LRFD)
American Petroleum Institute, Recommended Practice for Planning, Designing and
4 Constructing Fixed Offshore Platforms - Working Stress Design, 21st ed., 2000.
(TP690.A642 RP2A-WSD).
 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL601 Design and Drawing of Steel Structures (Lab) 01

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration Total
End Sem Term
Test- of End Pract. Oral
Test-I Average Exam Work
II Sem Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course Objectives:
1 To estimate the design loads on steel structures as per IS 875
2 To analyze the member forces by any suitable method.
3 To design the members for axial, flexure and shear forces.
4 To prepare the detailed design report and fabrication drawings by manual or CAD
software.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learner will be able to:
1 Calculate dead, live and wind loads on the structure.
2 Analyze the structure by analytical/graphical method.
3 Use steel table for selecting appropriate section.
4 Design the members for various load combinations.
5 Design the bolted and welded connection.
6 Read and Prepare the detailed fabrication drawing and design report.
The Project shall be given to a group of students consisting of not more than10 students.
List of the Projects
Lab
Schedule Detailed Content Session /
Hr.
Design and drawing of steel roof truss for industrial shed should consist of
Project 1
the following items.
Introduction, problem statement, Calculation of panel point DL,
1 st Week 02
LL, and WL on truss.
Analysis of truss by graphical method/ any software and
2 nd Week 02
calculation of design loads in members
Design of purlins, Principal rafter, Main Tie, Design of remaining
3 rd Week 02
members of truss. etc.
Design of bolted /welded connections and design of sliding and
4 th Week 02
hinged supports including anchor bolts
To generate/draw fabrication drawings on full imperial size
5 th Week 02
drawing sheet and design report on A4 size pages.
To generate fabrication drawings and design report including
6 th Week 02
estimation of steel required.
Design and drawing of floor beam system for steel building G+1 should
Project 2
consist of the following items
7 th Week Introduction, problem statement and to draw grid floor plan. 02
Calculation of DL, LL on slab, beams etc. and to analyze frame for
8 th Week 02
BM and SF.
9 th Week Calculation of design loads on columns and footing. 02
10 th Week Design of beams, columns and footings. 02
11 th Week Design of beam end and beam-column connections. 02
To generate/draw fabrication drawings on Full imperial size
12 th Week 02
drawing sheet and design report on A4 size pages.
To generate fabrication drawings and design report including
13 th Week 02
estimation of steel required.

Assessment:
• Term Work
Shall consist of design report and fabrication drawings for the above projects and Site visit report
related to this course. Distribution of marks for Term Work shall be as follows:
Project 1+Project 2+ Site visit report : 20 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks
Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be
resorted to: 75%- 80%: 03 Marks; 81%- 90%: 04 Marks; 91% onwards: 05 Marks.
• End Semester Oral Examination
Oral Examination will be based on Sketching Examination, Term Work and Entire syllabus

Recommended Books:
1 Design of Steel Structure by N. Subramanian, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
Limit state design of steel structures by S. K. Duggal, McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt.
2
Limited, New Delhi.
Design of steel structure by Limit State Method as per IS: 800- 2007 by Bhavikatti S. S.,
3
I.K. International Publishing House, New Delhi.
4 Design of Steel Structures by K. S. Sai Ram, Pearson Education, New Delhi.
Limit state design of steel structures as per IS 800/2007. by S. Kanthimathinathan. I.K.
5
International Publishing House, New Delhi.
6 Relevant Indian Specifications, Bureau of Indian Standards, New Delhi.
Reference Books:
1 Design of Steel Structure by Allen Williams
2 Practical Design of Steel Structure by Karuna Moy Ghosh, Whittles Publishing
3 Structural design and drawing by D. Krishnamurthy, CBS Publishers, New Delhi.
4 Teaching Resources Material for steel structures by INSDAG Kolkata.
 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL602 Water Resources Engineering (Lab) 01

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration Total
End Sem Term
Test- of End Pract. Oral
Test-I Average Exam Work
II Sem Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course Objectives:
1 To study different irrigation engineering methods and water requirement of crops.
2 To study hydrological cycle, its elements and plotting of hydrographs.
3 To study and calculate discharge from aquifers.
4 To study control level fixation for reservoir, Dams i.e gravity dam, its various
components and analysis and suitable conditions of earthen dam and its seepage
analysis.
5 To study importance of silt theories and its design considerations.
6 To study Canal headwork, its distribution system and design of canal structures.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learner will be able to:
1 Classify various techniques of water distribution and compute water requirement of
crops.
2 Discuss in detail about hydrological process and interpret plotting of hydrographs.
3 Apply their knowledge on well hydraulics and compute discharge from an aquifer.
4 Classify and describe various hydraulic structures such as dams and carry out its
analysis for structural stability.
5 Compare different silt theories related to irrigation channel and design the same.
6 Identify and classify different canal head works - its distribution system and canal
structures.
List of Experiments (Minimum Five)
Lab Session /
Module Detailed Content
Hr.
Assignment
Assignment no 1: Irrigation projects in India and Numerical based
1 02
Water requirement of crops.
2 Assignment no 2: Numerical based on missing data, hydrographs. 02
3 Assignment no 3: Numerical based on yield of aquifer. 02
Assignment no 4: Numerical based on stability of gravity dam,
4 02
seepage line (earthen dam)
5 Assignment no 5: Numerical based on Silt Theories 02
Assignment no 6: Case study on different canals in India and
6 02
abroad.
Model Preparation (if possible, prepare any one model from below suggested topic)
Prepare a model for any one water distribution technique referring
1
to introductory chapter. 06
2 Prepare model for Dam (Gravity or Earthen Dam).

Assessment:
• Term Work
Comprises of Assignments which has to be submitted by each student individually and
preparation of model can be worked out in group of 6 members each.
Distribution of marks for Term Work shall be as follows:
Assignments : 20 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks
Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be
resorted to: 75%- 80%: 03 Marks; 81%- 90%: 04 Marks; 91% onwards: 05 Marks.

• End Semester Oral Examination

Pair of Internal and External Examiner should conduct oral examination.
Reference Books:
1 Irrigation and Water Power Engineering: B.C. Punmia, PandeB.B.Lal, A.K Jain. Laxmi
Publications Pvt, Ltd. New Delhi.
2 Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulic Structures: S.K. Ukarande, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd.
ISBN-9789383656899.
3 Irrigation Water Resources and Water Power Engineering: P.N. Modi, Standard Book
House, Delhi, ISBN 978-81-87401-29-0.
4 Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulics Structures: S. K. Garg, Khanna Publishers. Delhi.
5 Design of Irrigation Structures: S. K. Sharma, S. Chand and Co.
6 Theory and Design of Irrigation Structures: R. S. Varshney and R, C. Gupta, Nem Chand
7 Engineering for Dams, Vol. I to III: Crager, Justin and Hinds, John Wiley
9 Design of Small Dams: USBR.
10 Hydro Power Structures: R. S. Varshney, Nem Chand and Bross.
11 Concrete Dams: R. S. Varshney, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co.
 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL603 Geotechnical Engineering-II Lab 01

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration of Total
End Sem Term
End Sem Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course Objective:
1 To study consolidation characteristics of soil.
2 To study and examine shear strength parameters of soil.
3 To Study and determine the strength of sub-grade soil.
4 To Study and determine swelling pressure of soil.
5 To gain the knowledge of stress distribution in soil.
6 To gain the knowledge of various geotechnical software.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course Students will be able to
1 Determine consolidation parameters such as coefficient of compressibility, coefficient of
volume change, coefficient of consolidation.
2 Determine cohesion and angle of shearing resistance for various soil types.
3 Determine the CBR value of soil for pavement design.
4 Determine swelling pressure of soil.
5 Understand the concept of stress distribution in soils due to vertically applied load.
6 Solve design problems using geotechnical software.

List of Experiments (Minimum Five)

Lab Session
Module Detailed Content
Hrs.
Determination of pre-consolidation pressure and coefficient of
1 02
consolidation from one dimensional consolidation test
2 Determination of shear strength parameters using direct shear test 02
Determination of shear strength parameters using unconsolidated
3 02
undrained tri-axial compression test

4 Determination of undrained cohesion using unconfined compression 02

test
5 Determination of shear strength of soft clays by vane shear test 02
6 Determination of CBR value using CBR test 02
7 Determination of swelling pressure of clays 02

Assignment:
a) Term Work Assessment
Assignments should contain at least 15 numerical problems covering the entire syllabus.
b) One assignment shall be given on either vertical stress distribution in soils or a design
problem using geotechnical engineering software. The teacher is expected to impart
the knowledge to the students about the concept of stress distribution of soils or design
problem using software. The questions related to stress distribution in soils or design
problem using software shall NOT be asked in the theory examination. However, it
shall be treated as a part of term work submission. It shall preferably cover the following
points:
• Vertical stress distribution in soils: Estimation of vertical stress in soil due to surface
load using Boussinesq equation.
OR
• Design problem using software: Introduction to any geotechnical software like Geo 5,
PLAXIS, FLAC, MIDAS GTS-NX etc.

Distribution of Term Work Marks

Including Laboratory Work and Assignments both, Distribution of marks for Term Work shall
be as follows:
Laboratory Work : 15 Marks
Assignments : 05 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks

• End Semester Oral Examination : 25 marks

Reference Books:

1 Engineering Soil Testing: Shamsher Prakash, P.K. Jain; Nem Chand & Bros
2 Soil Testing for Engineers: William T. Lambe; John Wiley and Sons, Inc.
3 Soil Mechanics Laboratory Manual: Brij Mohan DAS; Oxford University Press Inc.
4 Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice: Karl Terzaghi, Ralph B. Peck, Gholamreza
Mesri; John Wiley and Sons, Inc.
5 Soil Mechanics and Foundations: Dr. B. C. Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain, Arun Kumar;
Laxmi Publications
6 Soil Mechanics in Theory and Practice: Alam Singh; Asia Publishing House
7 Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering: V. N.S. Murthy; Saitech Publications
8 Relevant Indian Standard Specifications Code: BIS Publications; New Delhi
 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL604 Environmental Engineering (Lab) 01

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 02 - - 01 - 01

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration Total
End Sem Term
Test- of End Pract. Oral
Test-I Average Exam Work
II Sem Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course Objectives:
1 To analyse engineering skill related to water and wastewater sample.
2 To apply decision related to treatment of water and wastewater based on standards.
3 To understand the fundamental characteristics of municipal solid waste.
To acquire knowledge on the severity of air pollution and suggest remedies and
4
preventive measures.
5 To understand the basic concepts of noise and its measurement.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learner will be able to:
1 Impart the knowledge on quality or characteristic of water and wastewater sample.
2 Interpret the required treatment for water and wastewater based on standards and norms.
3 Impart the knowledge on quality of solid waste.
4 Measure the concentration of particulate matters, dust and dispersed pollutants in air.
5 Inspect the levels of noise and interpret the results.
List of Experiments (Any eight to be performed)
Lab Session /
Module Detailed Content
Hr.
1 Determination of pH of water/ sewage sample /solid waste. 02
2 Determination of Turbidity in water sample. 02
Determination of Total Solids, suspended solids, dissolved solids,
3 02
volatile solids.
4 Determination of chlorides. 02
5 Determination of Optimum dose of coagulant by using Jar Test. 02
6 Determination of Dissolved Oxygen. 02
7 Determination of Residual chlorine 02
8 Determination of air quality using High Volume air Sampler. 02
9 Determination of Level equivalent of Noise 02
Determination of Bio Chemical Oxygen Demand of sewage
10 02
sample
11 Determination of Chemical Oxygen Demand of sewage sample. 02
12 Determination of moisture content of solid waste. 02

Assessment:
• Term Work
Including Laboratory Work and Assignments both, Distribution of marks for Term Work shall
be as follows:
Laboratory Work : 15 Marks
Assignments : 05 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks
Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be
resorted to: 75%- 80%: 03 Marks; 81%- 90%: 04 Marks; 91% onwards: 05 Marks.

• End Semester Oral Examination

Oral exam will be based on experiments performed, site visit and theory syllabus.

Reference Books:
1 Water Supply Engineering: S. K. Garg, Khanna Publication.
2 Environmental Engineering Vol II: Garg, S. K., Khanna Publishers New Delhi.
3 Water Supply Engineering: P.N. Modi, Rajsons Publication.
4 Environmental Engineering: B. C. Punmia, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi.
5 Solid waste management in developing countries: A.D. Bhide and B.B. Sundaresan.
6 CPHEEO Manual on Water Supply and Treatment.
7 CPHEEO Manual on Sewage and Treatment.
 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEL605 Skill Based Lab Course-III 1.5

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 03 - - 1.5 - 1.5

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration Total
End Sem Term
of End Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Sem Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Course Objectives:
To Provide hands on training on analysis, modelling and design of R. C. C. Framed
1
structure and Steel structure.
2 To prepare the database and perform its statistical analysis using relevant software.
To understand and apply the basic functions of excel for data analysis, preparation of
3
programs and generation of reports having mathematical and pictorial representation.
4 To design reliable and sustainable transportation systems.
To evaluate the demand of water for given population and create the proper distribution
5
system.
To Apply the basic knowledge of various computer languages to create the programme
6
pertaining to civil engineering domain.

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learner will be able to:
1 To understand the functions involved various softwares related to civil engineering field.
2 To perform different functions of the software related to analysing modelling and
designing the structure, creation of database and its analysis.
3 To describe and represent the data obtained from site, experimental work in various
formats as per industrial requirements
4 To import road geometric design into the software as well as relate with the design
standards applied into the software.
5 To design the effective distribution network system for the distribution of water
resources.
6 To apply the knowledge to create the programme in excel and various computer
languages for solving problems pertaining to civil engineering field.
List of Experiments (Minimum Eight)
Lab Session
Module Detailed Content
/ Hr.
Analysis, Modelling and Design of structure using professional software 15
Introduction to structural engineering software. Study of basic
1 03
commands and tools.
Analysis of determinate and in-determinate structure. Extraction of
2 shear force and bending moment diagram for given structure 03
manually as well using software
Developing a model of simple plan of a building (square or
3 03
rectangular)
4 Analysis of frames – R. C. C. framed structure 03
5 Analysis of frames – Steel structure 03
Preparation and analysis of database using open-source software 03
Introduction to statistical software – Basic function required for
6 preparing database, statistical analysis of the data and its 03
representation
Excel 15
Introduction to Excel – Basic function required for preparing
database, statistical analysis of the data and its graphical
representation
7 a. Creation of database of result obtained from Traffic volume 03
survey and its analysis
b. Creating database of results obtained from laboratory
experiments and its analysis
Preparation of programme using various functions in excel or any
other relevant exercise in civil engineering field
8 1. Mix design of concrete 03
2. Design of pavement
3. Design of structural members
Preparation of checklist for various items of work in building
construction for quality control, Preparation of various reports like
9 03
Daily progress report, Daily Labour report, Weekly progress report,
Weekly Labour report, Geotechnical reports, Audit reports
Use of transportation engineering related software for creation of
10 contour, creation of cross section, setting horizontal and vertical 03
alignment and calculation of cut and fill
Use of open-source software for designing and simulation of water
11 03
distribution network
Programming using open-source software C or C++ or java or python 06
Introduction to programming software, Basics commands and tools
12 03
for development of programme related to civil engineering field
Programming for Civil Engineers with content related to any domains
13 03
of Civil Engineering problem solving using programming software.
Assessment:
• Term Work
Including Laboratory Work comprising of minimum 5 software generated reports/sheets/program
outputs along with minimum 5 assignments or reports, distribution of marks for Term Work shall
be as follows:
10 Marks (comprising of min. 5 software generated
Laboratory Work :
sheets/program outputs)
Assignments : 10 Marks (comprising of min. 5 Reports)
Attendance : 05 Marks
Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be
resorted to: 75%- 80%: 03 Marks; 81%- 90%: 04 Marks; 91% onwards: 05 Marks.

End Semester Oral Examination

Oral exam will be based on Laboratory Work performed.

Reference Books:
1 Software manuals
2 IS 456, IS 800
3 Refereed Journal papers on Software applications
4 Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, C. P. H. E. E. O., Ministry of Urban
Development, Government of India, New Delhi
5 The ‘C’ Programming Language, B.W Kernighan & D.M Ritchie, Prentice Hall of India
6 Statistics for Managers, Using Microsoft Excel, 8th Edition, David M., Levine, Pearson
India Education service Pvt ltd.

Recommended Books:
1 Excel with Microsoft Excel: Comprehensive & Easy Guide to Learn Advanced MS Excel
Paperback – 1 January 2019 by Naveen Mishra (Author); Publisher:Penman Books;
Publication date: 1 January 2019; ISBN-10: 9389024153; ISBN-13: 978-9389024159
2 Structural Modeling, Analysis & Design Using Staad Pro Software Paperback – 15
October 2015 by Vignesh Kumar M (Author); Publisher: LAP Lambert Academic
Publishing; Genre: Business & Economics; ISBN: 9783848447671, 9783848447671
3 Discovering Statistics Using SPSS for Windows: Advanced Techniques for the Beginner;
By Andy P. Field; Publisher:Sage Publications; ISBN:9780761957553, 0761957553
4 Quality Management in Construction Projects; By Abdul Razzak Rumane; Copyright
Year 2018; ISBN 9780367890032; Published December 10, 2019 by CRC Press
5 Introduction to Machine Learning with Python: A Guide for Data Scientists Paperback –
7 October 2016; by Andreas C. Mueller (Author), Sarah Guido (Author); ISBN-10:
1449369413; ISBN-13: 978-1449369415, 1st Edition; Publisher O ′Reilly
 Semester-VI

Course Code Course Name Credits

CEM601 Mini Project -2B 1.5

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 03 - - 1.5 - 1.5

Term
Theory
Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment Duration
Total
End Sem of End Term
Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Work
Exam
- - - - - 25 - 25 50

Rationale
Civil engineers deal with many challenges on daily basis. The civil engineering industry's growth
has been need based and society centric. Computers and IT systems have touched almost every
part of our lives and inter-disciplinary approach is way of life ahead. Mumbai University
proposed Mini projects in the syllabus so that the budding civil engineers can connect with the
world outside their textbooks and have the idea of future course. The Mini project should actually
provide solution to a typical problem after a brainstorming and in a stipulated period. The
solutions based on software, development of computer application, or IT systems based on
artificial intelligence or IOT are expected from civil engineering students. The competitions
ahead will give students the experience of the civil engineering industry's real-world problems
and make students brainstorm ideas, learn, and explore the civil engineering industry.

Course Objectives:
1 To recognize societal problems and convert them into a problem statement by
understanding of facts and ideas in a group activity.(BTL-2)
2 To deal with new problems and situations by applying acquired knowledge, facts,
techniques and rules in a different way.(BTL-3)
3 To examine and break information into parts, by analyzing motives or causes.(BTL-4)
4 To learn evaluating information, validity of ideas and work based on a set of criteria.
(BTL-5)
5 To create solutions by compiling information together in a novel way.(BTL-6)
6 To design software based model, application or IT system by combining elements in a new
pattern or proposing new solutions. (BTL-6)

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learner will be able to:
1 Identify problems based on societal /research needs and formulate a solution strategy.
2 Apply fundamentals to develop solutions to solve societal problems in a group.
3 Analyze the specific need, formulate the problem and deduce the interdisciplinary
approaches, software-based solutions and computer applications.
4 Develop systematic flow chart, evaluate inter disciplinary practices, devices, available
software, estimate and recommend possible solutions.
5 Draw the proper inferences from available results through
theoretical/experimental/simulations and assemble physical systems.
6 Create devises or design a computer program or develop computer application.

• Guidelines for Mini Project -2B

Expected outcome is Software based, “A Computerized Model/ A software/ A
computer program, an IOT application or A Computer or Mobile based
application ”.
Students shall form a group of 3 to 4 students, while forming a group shall not be allowed
less than three or more than four students, as it is a group activity.
Students should find ‘List of Mini project- 2B problems’ in University web portal
www.mu.ac.in, and in consultation with faculty supervisor/head of department/internal
committee of faculties select the title.
Students shall submit implementation plan in the form of Gant/PERT/CPM chart, which
will cover weekly activity of mini project.
A log book to be prepared by each group, wherein group can record weekly work progress,
guide/supervisor can verify and record notes/comments.
Faculty supervisor may give inputs to students during mini project activity; however, focus
shall be on self-learning.
Students in a group shall understand problem effectively, propose multiple solution and
select best possible solution in consultation with guide/ supervisor.
Students shall convert the best solution into A Computerized Model/ a software/ A
computer program, an IOT application or A Computer or Mobile based application using
various components of their domain areas and demonstrate.
The solution to be validated with proper justification and report to be compiled in standard
format of University of Mumbai.
With the focus on the self-learning, innovation, addressing societal problems and
entrepreneurship quality development within the students through the Mini Projects, it
is preferable that Students come out with original solution.
However, based on the individual students or group capability, with the mentor’s
recommendations, if the proposed Mini Project adhering to the qualitative aspects
mentioned above gets completed in odd semester, then that group can be allowed to work
on the extension of the Mini Project with suitable improvements/modifications or a
 completely new project idea in even semester. This policy can be adopted on case-by-case
basis.
List of approved problems for Mini Project -2B:
Development for Mobile App for Smart Traffic Management System Using Internet of
S501:
Things
Development for Mobile App for IoT based smart traffic signal monitoring system using
S502:
vehicle Count.
Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App. To identify quantity of (bricks,
S503:
pipes, bars etc.) from photograph.
Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App. To identify size of cracks in
S504:
distressed structure from coin aimed photograph.
Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App. To identify size of cracks in
S505:
distressed structure.
Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App. For Assessment of Irrigation
S506:
Water Quality Index.
Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App. For Ground Water Quality
S507:
monitoring in industrial zone.
Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App Advanced Earthquake Resistant
S508:
Techniques
S509: Development of Remote Monitoring System For Civil Engineering projects.
S510: Application of Geographic Information system using Quantum GIS software.
Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App for Building Information Modelling
S511:
using ArchiCAD/ Revit architecture software.
S512: Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App Digitization of Slump cone Test.
Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App Digitization of other mechanical
S513:
Tests.
Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App Civil Engineering quantity
S514:
calculator.
Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App Digitization of Non-destructive
S515:
testing of concrete-various methods.
Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App Mapping of area using Total Station
S516:
and plotting the same on 3-d drafting.
Preparation of Excel VBA sheet for solving Survey, Soil Mechanics, Structural Analysis
S517:
problems.
Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App Smart street lights and fault location
S518:
monitoring in the cloud over IoT
S519: Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App IOT based smart irrigation system
Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App Smart cities: Traffic data
S520:
monitoring over IoT for easy transportation/alternative route selection
Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App Dam gate level monitoring for water
S521:
resource analysis and dam gate control over IoT.
Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App Smart colony: RFID based gate
S522:
security system, street lights, and water pump automation.
Development of (AI Based) software or mobile App Agriculture automation using GSM
S523:
(soil moisture level control and motor control)
(This is tentative list, this list will be continuously updated by contributions
from faculty, industry and alumni.)

Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project:

• Term Work
The review/ progress monitoring committee shall be constituted by head of departments of each
institute. The progress of mini project to be evaluated on continuous basis, minimum two reviews
in each semester.
In continuous assessment focus shall also be on each individual student, assessment based on
individual’s contribution in group activity, their understanding and response to questions.
Distribution of Term work marks for both semesters shall be as below:
Marks awarded by guide/supervisor based on log book : 10 Marks
Marks awarded by review committee : 10 Marks
Quality of Project report : 5 Marks
Review/progress monitoring committee may consider following points for assessment based on
either one year or half year project as mentioned in general guidelines.

• Assessment criteria of Mini Project:

Mini Project shall be assessed based on following criteria:
Quality of survey/ need identification
Clarity of Problem definition based on need.
Innovativeness in solutions
Feasibility of proposed problem solutions and selection of best solution
Cost effectiveness
Societal impact
Innovativeness
Cost effectiveness and Societal impact
Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements
Effective use of skill sets
Effective use of standard engineering norms
Contribution of an individuals as member or leader
Clarity in written and oral communication
In one year, project, first semester evaluation may be based on first six criteria’s and
remaining may be used for second semester evaluation of performance of students in mini
project.
In case of half year project all criteria in generic may be considered for evaluation of
performance of students in mini project.
• Guidelines for Assessment of Mini Project Practical/Oral Examination:
Report should be prepared as per the guidelines issued by the University of Mumbai.
Mini Project shall be assessed through a presentation and demonstration of working model
by the student project group to a panel of Internal and External Examiners preferably from
industry or research organizations having experience of more than five years and approved
by head of Institution.
Students shall be motivated to publish a paper based on the work in Conferences/students
competitions.

• Mini Project shall be assessed based on following points:

Quality of problem and Clarity
Innovativeness in solutions
Cost effectiveness and Societal impact
Full functioning of working model as per stated requirements
Effective use of skill sets
Effective use of standard engineering norms
Contribution of an individuals as member or leader
Clarity in written and oral communication